Home

GT15 User's Manual

1. a Power on the GOT while pressing the installation switch S MODE switch on the back of the GOT 1 lt point press installation function Z 2 e For GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 o Power on the GOT while touching the upper and left of the GOT screen 2 point presses installation Z j function tenes switch fii S MODE fo f SROENEERESSSBEEEED SOMERREGSOSOEEEEROD fo Bs 2 ue l Simultaneous Soz XAJ 2 point touch vzd For GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 2 For GT1595 GT1E50 n 4 BootOS standard monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory a The CF card access LED is lit during install execution Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the CF card access LED is lit Now installing BootOS x lt a Z 5 GOT restarts automatically after installation is completed When standard monitor OS is already installed GOT restarts by touching OK button Reboot QO After confirming normal restart switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT When it is confirmed that CF card access LED is not lit remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 1 8 5 18 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 18 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility For details of program data control function refer to the followin
2. Communicatio 9 LON Standard I F Setting Channel_Dr iver assign zzz Oot Oo ChNo RS232 SyS Co USB aon 1 TA GnA7OCPU QUTIC 4 YA 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting D o S4 Extend F 1 Extend _ F 2 Era 1st ChNo None ChNo None meZ Q None Q None GEO 2nd ChNo None ChNo None oak 0 None 0 None oth 3rd ChNo None ChNo None QO None 0 None a Zz Definition of ChNo m Z O None 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK a 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection 5 o gt wo O LO 2 Select and define whether 5V power supply is supplied or not iw T O i N e D oO z O 59 SS 25 to ge oa x 6 wit oF t ioe Zur Seu 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 10 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation 3 After setting completion is displayed indicating that 5V power supplying setting is on Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channel Dr iver assign ChNo heres BY supp ly f ChNo USB 1 A QnA QCPU QS 1024 v3 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo_ None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo_ None ChNo_ None 0 None 0 None Definition of ChNo O None 8 Barcode connection Other connection 1 FA device connection 9 PC connection 1 0 11 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Communication se
3. oe ee rcode connection Other connection ee levice Rice 9 PC in i i x a Za SES Zz 1 Channel Driver assign aon Channel No can be assigned to the communication driver installed in the GOT a Communicating without setting Communication Setting of GT Designer2 ee Even without setting Communication Setting on GT Designer2 communication with controller 254 e is available by assigning channel No with this function DEA lt C 10 1 4 A Channel Driver assign operation al b Changing the assignment of communication drivers to channels in the utility OZ Without using GT Designer2 the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed o When change a communication driver the alternative communication driver has to be r lt installed in GOT in advance a a 2 Standard interface display BOX ms Display the communication interface included as standard in GT1500 m There are the following 2 types RS232 e For communicating with PC GT Designer2 controller x USB seeeeee For communicating with PC GT Designer2 Li O 3 Extend interface display BOX 7 The name of the unit installed in the extend interface is displayed 5 Displays None when any unit is not mounted For details of each uint refer to the following 8 5 Printer Unit Z 8 7 Communication Unit mi on On Zz Extend interface Z lt i Sa fi z fe we GOT front face GOT rear face SS SE U
4. App 13 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function Continued to next page Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Soft Deni i rawin Item Functions overview GT15 GOT GT11 ae 1000 Operation Setting of buzzer volume O O O O Window move buzzer O O O O Setting of key sensitivity O O x Displaying of key reaction speed O O x i Changing of security level object unit security password Security setting 3 urity setting input O O O x Menu call key Setting of the utility call key O O O Touch panel calibration EJ g Correcting touch position reading error O x x z a O GT1595 X Setting of data storage location for the MELSEC Q QnA Q QnA ladder monitor E a ii O x O ladder monitoring function Setting communication target channel Nos when the FA Transparent mode settings fiat _ x O transparent function is used Video RGB Setting Video Unit Settings Setting of the video input signal and resolution O x O Video Display Setting of the captive area size for each video channel the Settings color tone contrast brightness and color intensity O 2 x O RGB Display Setting of the RGB clock phase horizontal screen position Settings and vertical screen position O E x O Selection of base clock O O O Display current time of clock O O x Time setting amp display 3 Set current time of clock O O x Display
5. The image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity for the selected channel No can be changed BA Channel UTILITY FUNCTION Image Quality L ColorTone 000 E sds F F 2 1 Contrast 000 E spe if Sod Br ightnss 000 E dst E I h h h h Intensi ty 000 B dps E E T a Z Copy CH1 Defauit Confirm 4 Z N vA E pe Changes the Changes the Changes the lt x number a number to number a So certain the touched certain T amountin the position amountinthe ZNE direction direction ED Qozu EATA Touching Default returns to the default status When touching Copy CH1 the image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity for the selected channel No is matched with the image quality settings a Zz Tog gt E age Qi Sa OOV for Channel No 1 cH1 N gt amp When touching the Confirm button the Z gt 4 i minia setting contents are determined WEG otb If you touch the X button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed z z G gt ae 10 After completing all the items to set if you E the windon before pressing Confirm touch the x button the display returns to tt P PO Se ie et OC the preview screen x W After completing the settings for all the 5
6. 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting 11 6 1 Touch panel calibration setting function Touch panel reading error can be corrected Normally the adjustment is not required however the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs correct the position with this function Before adjustment After adjustment Run Sto Run pstop gt N C J The Run will operate though you The Stop button can be touched intended to touch the Stop button without fail 11 6 2 Touch panel calibration setting display operation Main menu GOT setup Operation settings gt gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch Touch GOT setup Operation Touch Touch panel calibration Touch panel calibration Perform touch panel adjustment 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration 1 1 23 Setting COMMUNICATION MEY INTERFACE MEY SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION a Zz Tog gt E 432 Qi Ooty AON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION
7. 1 3 76 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Logging information operation 13 9 Memory Information Zz O 5 13 9 1 Memory information functions z i A Displays the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area E size Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a personal computer Zz 13 9 2 Memory information display operation 2 Sy 520 Szo Main menu Program Data control C gt 9 3 Utility Display i a S2 fs LON Touch Program Data Si zaz control a ant Pow Touch ppg Memory Information N gt Z gt 4 Fug Memory Information oiea Program Data control Memory information lt oOo 2 Flash memory empty area size eae A Built in CF card 9268 K byte osx C Flash Memory ee hp Sap 08 area 1516 K byte 3 Boot drive empty area size 56896 K byte Check memory information FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 9 Memory Information 1 3 77 13 9 1 Memory information functions 13 9 3 Memory information display example Program Data control Memory information x memory empty area size Built in CF card 9268 K byte C Flash Memory User area 7978 K byte 3 Kby rive empty area size 56896 K byte Description Indicates the memory space of each drive available for the user to store files
8. 11 6 3 Touch panel calibration operation 11 24 Touch the x point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting Touch panel calibration Touch panel calibration Q Touch the x point displayed on the upper left Be sure to touch the center of the DX precisely Touch the x point displayed on the upper right 3 Touch the x point displayed on the lower left 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting 4 Touch the x point displayed on the lower right UTILITY FUNCTION z O E Su 50 Z T She m O5 w 02H When the setting is completed the Touch panel calibration setup is message shown left is displayed completed f Calibration setup will bewvalid Touching the OK button returns to the previous screen a Zz Tog gt E lt s2Z Qi Ooty AON o CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration 1 1 25 Setting 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 7 1 Q QnA ladder monitor setting function The data used for ladder monitor function can be saved Saving the ladder data cuts out the need for reading the ladder data from PLC CPU at the next GOT start up enabling to start the ladder monitoring earlier Refe
9. 4 When the all checks ended normally the dialog shown right z is displayed If touch ok button after confirming the RS232 ag Ue e check Le o error contents the GOT restarts Restart o j oA Z we t Sle a99 Zur SEY 14 7 I O Check _ 14 7 3 I O Check Operation 1 4 1 If an error occurs the dialog is displayed which notifies the 14 19 GOT terminates abnormally at that point and at which byte RS232 ge ion check rror the error occurred If a verification error occurs the RS 232 Verify 4 BYTE interface hardware may be faulty Restart If touch OK button in the dialog the GOT restarts 14 7 I O Check 14 7 3 I O Check Operation 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display The network unit status display is a function that uses the communication units below to monitor the network status e MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 The LED status or error status of a network module can be checked For the corrective actions for errors that occur on the network refer to the following manual The Reference Manual of the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 network system PLC to PLC network to be used The Useris Manual of the CC Link system master local module to be used 14 8 2 Displaying the NETWK unit status display Main menu Debug amp self check Self check gt 9 3
10. Partial additions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 1 2 2 2 Section 3 2 Section 4 1 4 2 4 3 Section 5 3 Section 7 3 1 7 5 1 7 5 2 Section 8 3 Appendix 1 2 4 Additions Section 10 6 Section 12 6 Section 13 2 Apr 2005 SH NA 080528ENG C Partial corrections Section 4 1 4 2 4 3 7 1 2 7 5 2 18 6 Appendix 1 Chapter 5 to 19 gt 6 to 20 Appendix 2 to 4 3 to 5 Additions Chapter 5 Appendix 2 Sep 2005 SH NA 080528ENG D Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 18U Partial corrections Chapter 1 Section 1 1 1 2 Section 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 Section 4 1 to 4 4 Section 5 1 5 1 3 5 2 5 5 4 2 Section 6 3 Section 7 7 4 Section 8 1 8 1 1 8 1 2 8 2 8 3 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 6 2 8 7 3 8 7 4 8 11 8 11 1 Section 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 1 to 9 3 3 Section 10 10 1 2 to 10 1 4 10 2 2 10 2 3 Chapter 11 11 1 11 1 1 to 11 1 3 11 2 2 11 2 3 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 4 2 11 5 1 to 11 5 3 Section 12 1 1 to 12 1 3 Section 13 13 1 2 13 1 3 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 4 13 3 2 to 13 3 4 13 4 2 13 5 2 13 6 1 to 13 6 3 13 7 13 7 1 13 7 2 13 7 4 13 7 5 Chapter 14 14 1 2 14 2 1 14 3 1 to 14 3 3 14 4 2 14 5 2 14 6 2 14 7 1 14 7 2 Section 15 1 2 Section 16 1 3 Section 17 1 3 Chapter 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 3 1 18 3 2 18 4 Section 20 1 20 2 Appendix 5 Partial corrections Section 5 3 2 5 3 3 Section 6 2 6 5 Section 8 4 1 8 7 2 8 8
11. Install 13 2 OS Information Property 13 2 4 Operation of OS information If touch a drive in Select drive the information of the first folder of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder name of the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed If touch A LV button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch Yv Vv button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the touched file name is selected and inverted Refer to the following for operation of installation upload property data check EEE this section Installation ETETE LCS this section ET OET F gt this section reel L gt this section Touching lt lt button closes the screen Installation operation Z BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive Standard CF card can be installed in GOT S i install the CF card to which the BootOSor amp OS to install is written to the GOT 5 Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card lt 8 1 CF Card 6 z So Touch A Built in CF Card for drive Szo ul selection aan SEET Touching Install button starts the install a Za Seg Y agf 15048KB 15600KB VAi Doty Inst
12. 4 5 PC connection Cable ececeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenneeeees 2 15 Performance specifications ccceeeeeeeeeees 3 2 Periodic inSpection ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 19 2 Power supply specifications 0 0ee 3 10 Power supply wiring 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaes 7 2 GrouginG 2 sass ahete aint ae 7 4 Power supply connection cecceeeeeeeeeees 7 6 Wiring of connection cables ceeereeeees 7 3 Printer unitat sister eectisea det eins Aa ee 2 13 Installing procedure eceeeeseeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenaes 8 10 Printer Unit type i senine e 8 10 Program data control s s s 13 1 Project informatio eccrine ai 13 17 Display operation of project information 13 17 Function of OS information o 13 17 Operation of project information 13 19 Protective Sheet cccccceecccceeeeesseeeeeeeaaees 2 14 8 29 Applicable protective sheet ee 8 29 Installing procedure eee ceeeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 8 30 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Q Q extension Cable cccceccceeeeeeeeteeeeetteeeeeeeeees 2 5 Q long distance connection cable 2 5 Q QnA ladder monitor setting ceee 11 26 QCPU Q mode bus connectio
13. 507 20 10 Warning Display section needs replacement The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached the set time or more The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the display section The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Action No storage Error message code Warning Touch panel The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached the set count number or more The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times 508 reset function after replacing the touch key The GOT can also x needs replacement ae be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times The dedicated GS is notifying that the built in flash memory Warning Built in Flash eNi aeli si ro areca 2 as i F e must be replaced In that case Data backup and re 509 ROM needs replacement i p p x i ihe COT setting are needed The GOT can also be restored by turning angete i off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times The value that is input as clock da
14. GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 8 8 1 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit The following RS 422 conversion units are applicable for GT1500 Model name Description RS 422 side connector 9 pins RS 232 RS 422 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 conversion unit RS 422 side connector 25 pins 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Point gt Notes on using the RS 422 conversion unit 1 Use GT15 RS2T4 25P when you switched to use from the GOT A900 series Use GT15 RS2T4 9P when you newly use the GOT1000 series 2 Set to ON by 5V supply at Communication settings of the utility 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation 8 8 2 Installing procedure Power OFF the GOT Installs the RS 422 conversion unit in the RS 232 interface of the GOT rear face amp Tighten the fixing screws in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m after the installation 8 34 8 8 RS 422 Conversion Unit 8 8 1 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit 8 9 Battery Battery is used to backup data when the power supply of GOT is OFF The data which can be backed up with the battery is shown below e Present time Clock data gt 12 1 Time Setting and Display e Maintenance time notification data lt gt 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 8 9 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT1500 Model Description GT15 BAT Battery for backup of clock data and maintena
15. GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M Option function board GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50FNB Multi color display board GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB Protective Sheet GT15 90PSCB GT15 80PSCB GT15 70PSCB GT15 60PSCB GT15 50PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11H 50PSC GT15 90PSGB GT15 80PSGB GT15 70PSGB GT15 60PSGB GT15 50PSGB GT11 50PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 80PSCW GT15 70PSCW GT15 60PSCW GT15 50PSCW GT11 50PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSGW GT11 50PSGW USB environmental protection cover GT15 UCOV GT11 50UCOV Sang GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND an GT05 50STAND GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC Memory card CF card GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 256MC Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC Attachment GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT E Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works2 VersionO Description SWOD5C GTWK2 E SWOD5C GTWK2 EV GT Designer2 VersionO SWODS5C GTD2 E SWOIDSC GTD2 EV GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Simulator2 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Soft
16. If touch 4 button moves the graph up down by one screen e If touch q gt button moves the graph to left right by one column e If touch 44 p gt button moves the graph to left right by one screen 10f40_ 11 10 11 40 12 10 12 40 13 10 13 40 14 j a 4 If touch X lt button closes the graph Example Historical graph 1 3 32 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 1 Historical graph display Program data control Alarm information Histrical graph x 6 Occur ACK O Repair quipment A failure e gO la O ine A stop ou fe Material shortage in Tai e i O Al lajor_error_in Conveyand oa en OO Pe quipment B fai lire eno Z m Zz fa an 220 asz awe A O5 u 02H TOH40 11 10 11 40 12 10 12 40 13 10 13 40 14 10 i j a m e Displays the generated time confirmed time M and restored O time of each alarm e Displays the time scales by 30 minutes interval in the bottom of the graph The alarms generated in the order of registering alarm are displayed 25 gt EO By the name of each alarm the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT Designer2 2 i F Q are displayed with up to 12 characters of full size character up to 24 half size characters Sai The 13th of full size character and after the 25th and after for ha
17. connection CNC connection display BOX RS232 MELSEC FX Direct CPU connection This section 2 AJ71QC24 Computer link connection Extend interface display AJ71UC24 C24 Computer link connection BOX This section 3 1to4 MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC MELSECNET H network MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC MELSECNET 10 network CNC connection CC Link Ver 2 ID CC Link connection intelligent device station Ver 2 CC Link ID CC Link connection Intelligent device station CC Link G4 CC Link connection Via G4 E71 Connection 10 3 Ethernet connection CNC connection 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Communication setting contents Extend interface display BOX This section 3 Continue to next page Corresponding Driver name Compatible connection type Displayed interface channel No OMRON SYSMAC OMRON PLC connection KEYENCE KV 700 1000 KEYENCE PLC connection SHARP JW SHARP PLC connection JTEKT TOYOPUC PC JTEKT PLC connection TOSHIBA PROSEC T V TOSHIBA PLC connection HITACHI HIDIC H HITACHI PLC connection HITACHI HIDIC H2 MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP MATSUSHITA PLC connection YASKAWA GL YASKAWA PLC connection YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 us PLC Standard interface connection i STARDOM display BOX RS232 AB SLC500 AB 1 N JE a 1t04 Allen Bradley PLC connection AB Micr
18. 2 An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds The error may occur in the sequence program Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the sequence program 3 An error occurs when a specific device operates The mis operation may be caused by noise Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating device If the line is too close to the device separate the line 100 mm or more from the device c Locating the module where an error occurs Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information locate a specific module where an error occurs By the method stated above correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one and check whether the error occurs If the error continues to occur it may have another cause Referring to 20 3 2 Further locating error positions locate the error position further 20 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 3 1 Locating error positions 20 3 2 Further locating error positions If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is replaced with a new one the error may be caused by the effect from another module Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the module located fur
19. NOLLVOISILON SIL FONVNALNIV YOS 13934 SAWIL NOILIGGY SO GYVGNVLS GNV SOLOOd AO NOILLVTIVLSNI NOILOAdSNI ANY SONVNALNIV 316 12 44 263 10 35 onaptic orerarion Termar GO T1000 vej MITSUBISHI 6 0 S 6 ZvZ Wav Iv WALSAS ANY ASVSSAW YOUN 250 9 84 6 0 OL v6 8 22Z OL so z SAHOIGNAddV 301 11 85 Unit mm inch XANI App 2 Appendix 1 External Dimensions 3 10 0 39 199 7 83 10 0 39 App 3 GT157 O 303 11 93 252 9 92 kA x o S N MITSUBISH 222 8 74 288 11 34 49 1 93 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch SADIGNAddV G0 zzo i IN Ban F a cD L ce 3 G ire OTe 15 S 9 T i oO N L N g rT v Smug SARS ene nayelecy LASS SNIL NOILIGGV 30O NOILVTIVLSNI CINA SENRANELNIRAN AOVSSAW YOUNS 4 z Q Q k 7 M 8 i z f i
20. PLC connected Setting FX CPU compatible Input a keyword to delete with 2nd keyword p iad FX CPU not compatible Input the keyword to delete only into the keyword with 2nd keyword The 2nd keyword will be ignored Protection delete Delete the protection by key word in order to access to a FX PLC to which a key word is registered D Touching the Clear key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword Input a keyword and touch the Enter key to delete the protection Keyword Please input keyword PLC connected Setting FX CPU compatible i Input a keyword to delete the protection with 2nd keyword FX CPU not Input a keyword to delete only into the keyword compatible with 2nd The 2nd keyword will be ignored keyword Protection Reset the keyword in which protection has been deleted to the protection status Touch the Protect key and the keyword goes to a protected status 1 0 17 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Zz Q GOT SET UP Z u gt Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from GOT setup 5 In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set Item Descr
21. App 23 Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Added GT Designer2 functions me Version of GT F GT GT Soft GT Item Description k Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Ethernet download Downloading the project data via Ethernet 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O x x Basic comment Copying comments in column unit on 2 09K O O O comment group Basic Comment or Comment Group etc Improved library structure and added 2 09K O O O import function Improved user library structure expanded i the user library registration capacity Library workspace i ry g p y 2 18U o O O copying the figure data to the user library etc Addition of fixed frame figure 2 18U O O O Project data Matching project data stored in GOT and i 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Oo O Oo matching project data opened on GT Designer2 Enables copying of only characters in Copy ON gt OFF lamp display touch switch and comment 2 18U O Oo O Copy OFF gt ON display Enables editing of the settings for advanced alarm observation advanced Import Export user alarm alarm history advanced 2 18U O O oO recipe function and recipe function in the CSV file format and other format Print Enables printing of header and footer 2 18U Oo O O Enables changing of the settings for the Data View i 2 18U O O O resp
22. As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for saving the device value amp If touch the ave record button the screen shown left is displayed For changing the record comment of saving destination input the record comment By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital a z English minuscule 0 9 Numeric Symbol Other than alphanumeric and symbol can not be inputted If record comment is not changed it is not need to input Record No 1 4 If touch the Enter button the dialog i A F Record Comment Process 1 setting shown left is displayed 9 ra gt Do you want to save record If touch the Ok button starts saving record 5 2 Q an 30 siz fod Suir Process conpleted When saving is completed completion Bam dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog Q Za sty e 52 we N aon N OS 2 FEA Fug HEA xng oak oto A zZ lt z e i oO D O gt wo xe wo x O W a O u Lu N e O Oo Zz O of Ze 25 go a oA Z O wg ZE 250 woz Zur lt SEO 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 59 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Record match operation Verifies weather selected record matches to the device value of the controller After executing loading saving with
23. GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 5 Hard Copy Information 1 3 37 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information Copy operation Copies the selected file Size Date Time A Built in CF card ag C Flash Memory ISNAPOOO1 ISNAPOOO2 302K 07 08 04 16 13 302K 07 08 04 16 13 a Te 16 12KB 15600KB Del Copy Copy file name SNAPOOO1 BMP Copy destinati A Copy now on File is already exist Overwrite now or Copy is completed Cance Touch and select the file to copy If touch button the dialog Please select a destination is displayed in the left bottom of the screen If touch the folder of the copy destination the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination The copied file cannot be copied to its own folder Select the different folder If touch Next button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the screen shown left is displayed without starting to copy If touch the button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information
24. GT1585V STBD Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent A March 2006 or later product GT1585 STBA Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd B April 2005 or before Model name GM C9RMDU11 or equivalent product C April 2005 or later Manufacturer DDK Ltd GT1585 STBD Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent A July 2005 or later product 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1570 MaIAYSAO NOILVYENSISNOO WALSAS SNOILWOISIOAdS Bd oO N 15 SONILLAS ANY SWVN Lavd ee Ea a Hines 7 6 GOT rear face AAILOAYIG ASVLIOA MOI ANY OWS NOILVTIVLSNI 14 8 ONIMIM 13 12 NOILdO 5 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 No Name POWER LED Description Lit in green Power is correctly suppl
25. Install the optional function board in the option function board interface When the expansion unit is installed in GOT detach the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the optional function board 4 After the installation of option function board attach the expansion unit cover For installation of expansion unit install the expansion unit 8 8 8 3 Option Function Board 8 3 2 Installing procedure 8 4 Multi Color Display Board The multi color display board is used when supporting 65536 display colors With some GOT hardware versions 65536 colors are available even without the multi color display board installed For GOTs requiring installation of the multi color display board refer to the following L 3 2 Performance Specifications 8 4 1 Applicable multi color display board The following multi color display board is applicable for GT1500 Model GT15 XHNB Description Multi color display board for XGA For 65536 color display Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display GT15 VHNB Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display 1 To use it fora SVGA or VGA GOT install the following OS to the GOT Cannot be used for a SVGA or VGA GOT without installing the OS For how to install the OS refer to GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Ver 02 01 00 E or later Standard monitor OS
26. Property display operation z E Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder 9 mi gt ty 2 Rae ine sion Date Time If touch Property button after selecting BIQSHONT OUT 25K Basic 02 04 00 02 08 00 04 45 A the property displaying target folder the 5 Standard monitor ie 7 notes i EE eie O08 eae Property display shown left is displayed SIF 12STG FON 406K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 __12dot Standard Gothic Font Japanese i In Property display the following I5 10SMONT 61D K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 i OE gaye z BINT Informe Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 information is displayed for each file E System Screen Data T GIFTTNMG FON 40K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 selected by Ow True Type Numerical Font LS 30 S1CMAQDR OUT 110K Comm 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 rae A QnA QCPU QJ7 1624 M TEE zZ BIOSRECP OUT 46K Option 02 04 00 02 02 00 19 33 Item Description Shir eC pe GE Name Displays the file name OZD Size Displays the file size r Displays the following items according to the file type A Zz Boot BootOS ben Type Basic Standard monitor OS zaz Extend Extended function OS Tm Seranit Option Optional function OS aon Comm Communication driver Version Displays the version of BootOS and OS n gt Date Displays the date and time of the file 9 Fra and time creation HWN HEA oak If touch A button of the scrollbar the An screen scr
27. touch OK button When cancel the memory card format touch Cancel button ok nee If touch OK button by the dialog mentioned left is displayed for reconfirm Format now Q Reconfirm whether to format the memory card If touch OK button starts formatting If touch Cancel button cancels OK Cancel formatting 1 3 40 13 6 Memory Card Format 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format When the formatting is completed the Format is complete f z completion dialog mentioned left is 2 displayed Z i gt If touch button closes the dialog E ang 2 O an Zgo g Str a Remark Restrictions on formatting 95i R _ A e When use an unformatted memory card in GOT format the memory card by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted memory card The formatting of GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 of the memory card and inherits the file system before formatting Zoe gt EO Se Oot aram N A a5 oak eran FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 6 Memory Card Format 1 3 41 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information Point P Before using advanced recipe information 13 7 1 For writing reading into from a controller with this function or editing of advanced recipe
28. Cannot be used for a SVGA or VGA GOT without installing the OS BootOS Standard monitor OS Ver 02 01 00 E or later Ver 02 01 00 or later For how to install the OS refer to GT Designer2 VersionL Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Option unit Sold separately Product name Model name Description 7 For connecting a or Printer unit GT15 PRN USB slave PictBridge 1 channel printer Video input unit GT15V 75V4 For NTSC PAL input 4 channels RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 For analog RGB input 1 channel Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 For NTSC PAL 4ch analog RGB 1ch mixed input RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT For analog RGB output Dedicated printer connection cable Sold separately Product name Dedicated printer connection cable Model name GT09 C30USB 5P gt Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT USB mini to printer USB 5 At printer unit purchase it is included with the unit Stand Sold separately Product name Stand Battery Sold separately Product name Battery Model name Description GT15 90STAND Stand for 15 GT15 80STAND Stand for 12 1 GT15 70STAND Stand for 8 4 10 4 GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Model name Description GT15 BAT Battery for clock data and maintenance report data backups 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Protective sheet Sold separately Product name Model name GT15 90PSCB
29. GT1595 XTBD 15 1024 x 768 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB GT1585V STBA 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB compliant 100 to 240VAC memory size 9MB GT1585 STBA 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1585 STBD 12 1 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB GT1575V STBA GT1575 STBA 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors video RGB compliant 100 to 240VAC memory size 9MB 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1575 STBD 10 4 800 x 600 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB GT1575 VTBA 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1575 VTBD 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 100 to 240VAC Mem
30. lt x ao D Oo m zZ Q Oo SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 2 Option Communication unit Sold separately Product name Bus connection unit Model name Description GT15 QBU For QCPU Q Mode Motion For terminal GOT 1 Channel controller CPU Q Series For intermediary and terminal GOTs 2 GT15 QBUS2 connection standard model channels GT15 ABUS For A QnACPU Motion For terminal GOT 1 Channel controller CPU A Series For intermediary and terminal GOTs 2 GT15 ABUS2 connection standard model channels GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L For QCPU Q Mode Motion For terminal GOT 1 Channel controller CPU Q Series connection slim model For intermediary and terminal GOTs 2 channels GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L For A QnACPU Motion For terminal GOT 1 Channel controller CPU A Series connection slim model For intermediary and terminal GOTs 2 channels Serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 RS2 For RS 232 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 For RS 422 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 TE For RS 422 interface connection terminal block type GT15 J71E71 100 GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 Ethernet 100Base TX 10Base T unit Optical double loop unit Coaxial bu
31. B Channel Captive Area Hor izont 1 000 Vertical 000 Image Quality ColorTone 000 Contrast 000 Brightnss 000 Intensity 000 BA channe m Gee oH oa Captive Area Left Right Horizont 1 000 E smp fi Up Down Vertical 000 jj j Default Confirm z Changes are discarded if you close x the window before pressing Confirm Do you want to proceed 1 1 36 11 10 Video Display Settings 11 10 3 Operating the video display settings Select a video channel No to be displayed The video image for the selected channel No is previewed 2 To change the captive area or image quality touch the display section of each item Captive Area Refer to to G Image Quality Refer to D to O The captive area horizontal direction vertical direction for the selected channel No can be changed Moves the Moves the Moves the captive areaa captive area captive area certain to the a certain distanceinthe touched distance in direction position the direction Touching Default returns to the default status 4 When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined If you touch the X button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed Q After completing all the items to set if you touch the X button the display returns to the preview screen
32. RS 232 9 Specifications GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation and FA transparent function Built in interface USB USB Full Speed 12 Mbps 1ch Connector shape Mini B Application For communicating a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation and FA transparent function CF card Compact flash slot 1ch Connector shape TYPE 1 Application Data transfer data storage Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 1ch Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Protective structure Outside the enclosure IP67 4 Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions Excluding USB environmental 167 6 6 W x 135 5 3 H x 56 2 2 D mm inch protective cover Panel cutting dimensions 153 6 0 W x 121 4 8 H mm inch Weight 1 1 kg mounting fixtures are not included Compatible software package GT Designer2 Version 2 30G or later 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid cr
33. 0 00000 eee App 19 Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 20 INDEX Index 1 to Index 4 ABOUT MANUALS The following manuals are also related to this product In necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below Related Manuals Manual Name GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual Describes the screen configuration functions and using method of GT SoftGOT1000 Sold separately Manual Number Model Code SH 080602ENG 1D7M48 GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series Describes methods of the GT Designer2 installation operation basic operation for drawing and transmitting data to GOT1000 series Sold separately 1 SH 080529ENG 1D7M24 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 1 3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 2 3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 3 3 Describes specifications and settings of the object functions used in GOT1000 series Sold separately SH 080530ENG 1D7M25 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 2 Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable creation method Sold separately al GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Describes extended functions and option functions
34. 11 12 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Functions of the brightness contrast 11 2 3 Operating the brightness contrast Zz fe o Zz rd Brightness can be adjusted by touching z key of brightness adjustment E 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched 2 O an 50 Q rap Toy With do not push OK button If touch button without touching gt lt zaz if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is displayed HHA value will be canceled a0n OK N 2 gt Emig HES oak JZE Oxun 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup A screens after completing the setting of all lt items to change with lt x button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents E 3 Slo EO x O W a O u h N E O Oo Zz O 58 On it oa Zz O wg ae t Zur SEY 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 13 11 2 3 Operating the brightness contrast 11 3 Operation settings 11 3 1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set The items which can be set are described below If touch the each item part the respective setting becomes possible Function Buzzer volume setting Description Buzzer volume setting can be changed Setting range OFF SHORT LONG lt At factory shipment SHORT gt Window move buzzer volume setting Whether t
35. 13 6 Memory Card Format Zz O 13 6 1 Function of the memory card format 2 Formats the memory card 5 13 6 2 Display operation of memory card format 6 Su 220 Main menu Program Data control sre gt 9 3 Utility Display SET 020 fe fe Touch Program Data control 25 Touch Memory card LON format zaz Boe aon Memory card format Program Data control Memory card format Select Drive N A Built in CF card O gt z gt FEA n HUN Select the drive HES and format A OAE den FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 6 Memory Card Format 1 3 39 13 6 1 Function of the memory card format 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format D Install the memory card to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of memory card L 8 1 CF Card Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection If touch Format button the password input screen is displayed 1 Caution Type 1 1 1 1 and touch the Enter If execute format operation all data key The dialog box shown on the left will on the CF card will be initialized oon Plese do tot renove CF card appear The password is fixed to 1111 while formatting Confirm the contents of the dialog Format the CF card When execute the memory card format
36. 17 1 Addition times reset 1 7 1 17 1 1 Addition times reset function 17 1 3 Operation of Addition times reset If touch If touch Reset OK button of each item the addition time or the addition count becomes 0 button the reset value is reflected If touch X lt button instead of touching OK below is displayed and the screen closes button the changed contents are canceled after the dialog With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK E If touch X button GOT restarts After restart GOT operates with the changed settings Point gt Addition times resetting timing It is convenient to reset addition times when replace backlight display section touch panel or built in flash memory 17 2 17 1 Addition times reset 17 1 3 Operation of Addition times reset 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS ADDITION TIMES RESET ey FOR MAINTENANCE eve TIME NOTIFICATION In order to execute the GOT utility it is necessary to install BootOS and standard monitor OS on the GOT C drive built in flash memory BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when upgrading of f it is unnecessary 590 This chapter explains the installation using GOT Se 2100 GT Designer2 Memory card GOT ZE Write OS
37. 22E Channel 232 Error B52 Error message Action No Awe code storage Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen Set monitor points too a For the number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the gt 303 large Decrease setting 3 x 680 following lt 9 points 48s lt gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual x52 nat Set trigger points too The number of objects using Sampling Cycle during ON Zan 304 large Decrease setting Cycle during OFF exceeds 100 x points Decrease the number of objects 3 lt i The project data is not downloaded to the built in flash m No project data SZ 306 memory x g0 Download screen data S a5 Download the project data to the built in flash memory cu tn The monitor device of the object is not set 2 307 Monitor device not set f x Set the monitor device of the object No comment data The comment file does not exist 308 W Download comment Create the comment file and download to GOT x Ds om 309 Device reading error The error occurred when reading a continuous device Sh gt Correct device Correct the device x Sog zZ MERA 1 Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project data Project data does not p n 310 2 Specified base screen window screen is out of the x exist or out of range H TE permissible area Specify the existing base screen window screen i The number of alarm histories that can be
38. 5 17 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 4 2 Processing connection cables 5 4 3 Grounding the cable Ground the cable and grounding wire to the control panel where the GOT and base unit are installed 1 Ground the braided shield portion gt of the cable to the control panel u with the cable clamp AD75CK 2 Braided shield Z fe Ke 2 20 5E gt 0 nO 2 O z Cable clamps 2 O For the cable clamp attaching a details refer to AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual lt IB 68682 gt o zZ i a For GT15 CL EXSS 1 and Zo GT15 C _ BS mE Ground the ground wire to the o FG terminal of the GOT power supply section ol oa ray Z lt 8 Ww w w gt OF LO a ox gt a GOT FG terminal FG wire a Bus connection cable O b For other bus connection 5 cables Ground the braided wire for Z grounding to the control panel by tightening a screw O z Zz O a O 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 18 5 4 3 Grounding the cable 6 INSTALLATION CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Do not expose the GOT to dust lamp soot conductive dust corrosive gas or combustible gas high temperature condensing wind or rain
39. 5 5 5 S S 2 5 D wo a N x y Y 0 eve NC J 0Z 0 G 87 2 064 f j o E e l J JJ t D J T jU r 60 _ 6 0 OL 68 9 GZL OL l i ve 0 a Toz 0 9s Unit mm inch XANI App 4 Appendix 1 External Dimensions 5 GT155 0 167 6 57 m 110 4 33 m oS Ho T C av m ws lo S D N mM of Be J LPs i T o A 110 4 33 S 0 20 0 24 U 60 2 36 152 5 98 Unit mm inch App 5 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Depth dimension when an extension unit is installed GOT rear face GOT side face 100 3 94 or more GOT type Dimension of GT1595 55 2 17 GT1585 46 1 81 B GT157 O 43 1 69 E Ke p GT156 O 46 1 81 Extension unit p 4 Other equipment GT155 O 54 2 13 Unit mm inch a GT1595 R Model name A B C D j bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 21 0 83 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 0 0 8 0 32 GT15
40. GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW 15 protective sheet Description Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW 12 1 protective sheet Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets ie OVERVIEW Zz O E T a 0 iL Zz Q oO SYSTEM Protective sheet 10 4 protective sheet GT15 70PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets z GT15 70PSGW Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets z GT15 60PSCB Clear 5 sheets 5 GT15 60PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets D 8 4 protective sheet GT15 60PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets GT15 60PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets a Zz GT15 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets a n GT15 50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets SS 5 7 protective sheet EE GT15 50PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets lt Ww GT15 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Backlight Sold separately z Product name Model name Description ziS ZOE GT15 90XLTT For 15 high intensity wide angle view TFT XGA GT1595 X Onn Sor GT15 80SLTT For 12 1 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1585V S GT1585 S Hza GT15 70SLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view
41. S eee FESS ee W touching gt CSV OPE 7K 03 38 G10 Mae 33 2 O an 220 Bey M 7 155 72KB OKB 4F ile soo toy te 610 gt 7XT Del Rename List 2z eg xl If touch the Rename button displays the lt 3 g2 Parn am hown left then input the fil Bk A PROJECT 1 0PELOG screen snown left then input the tile eon File Name name to be renamed LINE A_LO By touching the following button input text type is changed Oo amp aa A z English capital peg N 0 9 Numeric Symbol lt a _ ook otn If touch the Enter button displays the A Zz OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 dialog shown left lt After LINE A_LOG G10 E If touch the OK button starts 5 Change filename i i T a renaming file 6 U While executing Processing message appears on the screen x O W x O 5 MEEA m Process completed When renaming is completed 5 completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog O So 2 N gt zx 4D oA Z fa wg ae SE Boe Zur Seu 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 97 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Folder create operation An operation log folder is created 13 98 rogram Data Control Operation Log Information A PROJECT 1 OPELOG indName Size Date Time DIRT G10 JOPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 G10 OPELOG 20060309 0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 GSV IPE oG 200603000001 aK 03 00 06 10 33 O OG_z U2 K
42. Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen For connecting a personal computer 4 USB interface Connector type MINI B For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 5 RS 232 interface Connector type D sub 9 pin 6 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 7 Extension unit interface For installing an extension unit 8 CF card interface For installing a CF card Lit CF card accessed 9 CF card access LED Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 10 CF card access switch f RA ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board A 11 For installing the optional function board interface 12 Multi color display board For installing the multi color display board For GT1562 VN 65536 color display interface is not supported even with the multi color display board installed Hardware reset switch 13 Reset switch ae a Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 14 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 15 Battery holder Houses the battery lt Remark iow For the multi color display board refer to the following lt gt gt 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN
43. gt For details on the connection types refer to the following u O lt L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual e Video RGB unit Images taken with a video camera and a personal computer display can be displayed on the GOT e Video input unit lt Images taken with a video camera can be displayed on the GOT g RGB input unit ro A personal computer display can be displayed on the GOT eae e RGB output unit A GOT display can be displayed on a commercially available display 8 6 1 Video RGB unit types 5 5 There are the following types of video RGB units D Model name Description GT15V 75V4 For NTSC PAL input 4 channels 9 GT15V 75R1 For analog RGB input 1 channel a GT15V 75V4R1 For NTSC PAL 4ch analog RGB 1ch mixed input 2 2 GT15V 75ROUT For analog RGB output lt m 8 6 2 Installing procedure 6 This section explains how to install a video RGB unit on a GOT anes A video RGB unit can also be installed together with another extension unit 225 When installing a video RGB unit together with some other extension unit after executing the procedure in zok this section refer to the following One video RGB unit can be installed only in the first stage of the extension interface lt 77 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers 6 z Power OFF the GOT x ip amp Remove the expansion unit covers I F 1 side and I F 2 side of the GOT rear face 8 6 Video RGB Unit 8 15 8 6 1 Video RGB unit types 3 Install the ex
44. tees 14 29 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 15 1to 15 2 15 1 Clean 15 1 15 1 1 Display operation of Clean 0000 cece eee 15 1 15 1 2 Operation of Clean 0 0000 ccc eee 15 2 16 MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING 16 1to 16 4 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 2 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting 0 0 00 eee eee 16 2 16 1 2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting 20 0 cee eee eee 16 3 16 1 3 Operating the maintenance timing setting 0 0 cee eee 16 4 A 15 17 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION ADDITION TIMES RESET 17 1 to 17 2 17 1 Addition times reset 17 1 17 1 1 Addition times reset function 0 0 00000 eee eee 17 1 17 1 2 Display operation of Addition times reset 0000 00 cece eee 17 1 17 1 3 Operation of Addition times reset 0 00000 17 2 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 18 1 to 18 14 18 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation 18 2 18 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 18 3 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18 4 18 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 1 2 ee 18 5 18 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 18 6 18 4 When installing the different
45. x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 1 Debug 14 2 14 1 2 Display operation of Debug 14 2 Self check 14 2 1 Self check function Carries out self check of screen data or memory etc The items which can be self checked are as follows Items Description Reference page Carries out write read check of the memory card and built in flash memory Memory check 14 4 Password o o Drawing Check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 14 7 Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually 14 12 Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit Touch panel Check 14 14 16 dots x 16 dots I O check Carries out RS 232 connecting target confirmation and self loopback check 14 16 NETWK unit status Displays the LED status error information etc of the installed MELSECNET H 44 26 display communication unit or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 1 4 3 14 2 Self check 14 2 1 Self check function 14 3 Memory Check 14 3 1 Memory check function Memory check function carries out the write read check of A drive Built in CF card and C drive Built in flash memory Function Description A drive memory check Checks whether the memory CF card of the A drive can be read written normally i Checks whether the memory Built in flash
46. 2 o gt Special data information W 5 Program Data control ial data information LO elect drive A i Built in CF card C Flash Memory 5 W I O u LU a e Operate Project data file z O 505KB Fi 5 o Property Data check oO Z gt Delete Download z s Mi E amp oa z O we oy ZS SE oe Zur lt SEG 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 79 13 10 1 Special data information function 13 10 3 Special data information display example Belect drive Program Data control Special data information eT PROJECT 1 G1SPC CIRDAT b058kB Property Data check Delete Download Number Item Description 1 Select drive The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is not installed A Built in CF card is not displayed Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder 2 Kind 2 In the case of file displays the extension in the case of folder displays DIR Displays the name of special data in the selected drive 3 Name When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The special data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed 7 The
47. 3 To correct the input character touch Del key after password input key to delete the correcting character and reinput retype the new character 2 Password input cancel operation When button is touched it returns to the monitor screen Refer to the following for the details related to the password setting lt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of utility is as follows zZ O fam O Z S Wwe gt 5 Title display Close Return button Program Data control 0S information Eere i Tee Size Date Time A Built in CF card ales IG 10SBTOS 405K 06 01 04 10 48 C Flash Memory an S29 K Swe Scroll key EN SEET Screen om LON Ae 1 Title display nee The screen title name is displayed in title display part Een As the screen is composed of multiple layers the title including these layers is displayed GOT setup Operation TE dp Buzzer volume OFF Title display woe Fra Fug HEA A lt Window move buzzer ON xng oak ity setti Setting Security setting etting An Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 A Z lt z GOT setup Operation Menu call key a Se D Please select keys Title display a Ps qe wO x O W 3 2 Clo
48. 5 Author Displays the author of the project data 5 Drawing Displays name and version of the drawing 7 S W software by which the project data is 5 u version created 2 If touch A button the screen scrolls Z up down line by line S Ze If touch amp Xl button the screen scrolls ZS up down by one screen ae 4 If touch gt lt button the property display is 3 closed and returned to the previous 2 screen gS Se ioe zr i 13 3 Project Information 1 3 19 13 3 4 Operation of project information Data check operation Carrys out data check of the selected project file Dialog at data check normal Touch the Data check button after Data normal selecting the file for data check The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left If touch button the dialog is closed Dialog at data check abnormal Data error 1 3 20 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information g Download operation setup operation 3 kK 1 Download operation Z Transfers the project data stored in the A drive Standard CF Card to the C drive Built in flash x memory The GOT monitors using the data in the C drive 2 Point Before download operation e_ Zz 1 Setup cancel e When the project data in the A drive is set up the project data cannot be Se downloaded to the C drive siz Sa
49. 50 1 97 Z CC Link communication 50 1 97 or more or more 3 unit GT15 J61BT 13 fitted 20 0 79 or more 32 1 26 or more 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 MELSECNET 10 communication or more or more or more or more unit optical fitted 20 0 79 26 1 02 43 1 69 48 1 89 9 or more or more or more or more 3 50 1 97 50 1 97 50 1 97 MELSECNET H communication or more or more or more 50 1 97 72 2 84 unit coaxial fitted 20 0 79 24 0 95 38 1 5 or more or more or more or more or more Continued to next page Z E 6 3 Mounting Position 6 2 Type GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 MELSECNET H communication 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more 3 unit optical fitted 50 1 97 50 1 97 F 50 1 97 or more or more or more 50 1 97 Printer unit fitted 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more or more or more 50 1 97 or more Video input unit fitted A 20 0 79 or more 4 50 1 97 or more RGB input unit fitted F _ 20 0 79 or more gt 50 1 97 or more Video RGB input unit fitted 20 0 79 or more gt 50 1 97 or more RGB output unit fitted f 20 0 79 or more B 80 3 15 or more 20 0 79 or more When the CF card is not used 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more C 100 3 94 or When the CF card is used 50 1 97 or more 20 0 79 or more mor D 50 19 7 or more 2
50. Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B Cable length 2 5m For connecting Motion controller CPU A series Extension base and A7GT CNB Small size CPU long distance connection cable GT15 C100EXSS 1 Cable length 10 6m GT15 C200EXSS 1 Cable length 20 6m GT15 C300EXSS 1 Cable length 30 6m For long distance connection of QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and GOT For connecting A7GT CNB and a combined product of the GT15 EXCNB and GT15 COBS for long distance connection GOT to GOT long distance connection GT15 C07BS Cable length 0 7m GT15 C12BS Cable length 1 2m GT15 C30BS Cable length 3m GT15 C50BS Cable length 5m For connecting GOT and GOT cable GT15 C100BS Cable length 10m GT15 C200BS Cable length 20m GT15 C300BS Cable length 30m AOJ2HCPU For connecting AOJ2HCPU power supply module connection cable GT15 J2C10B Cable length 1m AQJ2 PW and GOT Buffer circuit cable GT15 EXCNB 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Cable length 0 5m Combined with GT15 COBS can be used as GT15 COEXSS 1 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs Sold separately RS 422 cable Product name FXCPU direct connection cable FX communication function extension board connection cable QnA A FXCPU direct connection cable computer link connection cable Model name GT01 C10R4 8P Cable length 1m GT01 C30R4 8P Cable length 3m GT01 C1
51. Conducted RF immunity Immunity test in which a noise inducted on the power and signal lines is applied Power line 3V Data communication port 3V Instantaneous power failure and voltage dips immunity Test for checking normal operations at instantaneous power failure AC power type 0 5 cycle interval 1s or more DC power type 10 ms interval 1s or more Radiated RF immunity Test for checking normal operations when the power supply unit input voltage is fluctuated 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive AC power type 47Hz 85V 264V 63Hz 85V 264V DC power type 20 4V 28 8V 5 2 5 1 1 EMC directive OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS ol a ja Zz T Q W w w gt OF LO hw o S0 INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Applied standard EN61131 2 2003 Test standard Third harmonic immunity Test details Test for checking normal operations when the AC power waveform mixed with third harmonic wave is input Standard value 47Hz 85V phase 180 distortion rate 10 63Hz 132V phase 0 distortion rate 10 9 External power supply fluctuation immunity Test for checking if the unit becomes faulty with a transient voltage of the internal and external input sides of the power supply unit or unit power supply AC power type 47Hz 85V 63Hz 264V DC power type 19 2V 30V
52. Copy Copies the file 13 18 13 5 2 The display operation of hardcopy information Main menu L gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch Program Data control 1 3 34 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 5 1 The function of hardcopy information Program Data control A eE Touch Hard copy information Date Time A Built in CF card GISPC_ CIRDAT C Flash Memory 03 08 04 04 51 02 27 04 06 29 02 27 04 21 09 Operate the Hard copy file 13 5 3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information Zz O Program Data control Hard copy information Select drive x A Built in CF card ioe ES 5 G1SPC CIRDAT f 5 C Flash Memory Zz O an 2 3 Zo sre Suit 828 7 8 9 Jf o7 aam tears lt 28 Del Copy See Qin Now aon Number Item Description F The drive which displays file or folder can be selected n 1 lect d OX 1 merc dive When CF card is not installed A standard CF Card is not displayed ram KWo 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder DRA In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR E Displays the file name or folder name ozo For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 1 3 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button etc a Zz lt gt 13 5 4 EJ Copy operation
53. Display operation of clock display and setting 12 1 Time setting and display functions 12 1 Touch panel calibration cccccceeeteeteeees 11 23 Touch panel check 2 0ceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 14 14 Display operation of touch panel check 14 14 Touch panel check function 0 0 ceeee 14 14 Touch panel check operations 05 14 15 Transparent function setting eee 11 29 Transportation Precautions 0ceeee App 25 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting for monitoring e 20 16 Troubleshooting in bus connection 20 13 U Usage condition of utility function App 10 USB environmental protection Cover 0 8 31 Applicable USB environmental protecton cover8 31 Installing PrOCECUIEC eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetettteeeeeeees 8 31 Utility basic Configuration cceeeeneeeeeeeees 9 10 Utility call key Setting ccc eeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 11 20 Utility call key display operation 0 008 11 20 Index 3 Utility call key setting function ee 11 20 Utility call key setting operation ee 11 21 Utility display encena Se eect dd oie ea 9 5 Display operation of main menu 08 9 7 Main ment ie aenneren aAA AREEN 9 5 PASSWONMG conuri ina a 9 8 System message switch button eee 9 5 Utility EXECUTION eect eteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 9 1 Utility functio
54. GT1585 STBD A x 3 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display 2 screen and increases the backlight life 4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment 6 When using multiple extension units and a bar code reader the total current of the extension units and bar code g reader must not be greater than the total current that the GOT can supply a For current values of extension units and bar code reader and the total current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 5 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 5 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S 3 2 3 GI1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN Item Specifications GT1575 STBA GT1575V STBA GT1575 STBD GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD TFT color liquid crystal LCD of high intensity and wide angle TFT color liquid Type view crystal Screen size 10 4 Resolution 800 x 600dots 640 x 480dots Display size 211 8 31 W x 158 6 22 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 50 characters x 37 li
55. H x O u Point gt Precautions for setting T If the value for Horizontal or Vertical is too large RGB display may not be S performed or the display may be disrupted or stopped If this happens return the settings to their default values and make settings in the range where RGB display is possible LF On On Bio oA Z fa wg an Zur Sey 11 11 RGB Display Settings 1 1 39 11 11 3 Operating the RGB display settings 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY The clock display setting items and the time when displayed the setting screen are displayed While displaying clock and the seting screen the display time does not change The voltage status of the built in battery is also displayed 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible ure Reference Function Description page Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock Clock setting 12 2 data of controller connected to the GOT Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data 12 4 GOT internal battery voltage i Displays GOT internal battery voltage status 12 5 status 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting Main menu L gt 9 3 Utility Display Time setting amp display Clock setting Adjust i 08 31 2005 15 57 41 WED
56. H01 backlight and the cable connector of the lower H02 backlight from the GOT side connectors Lu O Bs xn wut Q Pull the upper backlight by pressing the projecting part of the rubber holder that fixes the backlight with a minus driver to unfasten the backlight In the same way pull the lower backlight by pressing the projection part of the rubber holder that fixes it the backlight with a minus driver to unfasten it a Expanded figure of part Ain a a lt x lt a Z 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 a7 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 8 Pull the upper backlight out through the hole for backlight replacement on the upper part of the GOT In the same way pull the lower backlight out through the hole for backlight replacement on the lower part of the GOT Hole for backlight replacement Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When inserting a new backlight through the hole for backlight replacement of the GOT main unit take care not to damage the sheath of the cable And push the backlight in securely until the projection part of the rubber holder is fixed Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT For GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN
57. ON When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION z O a 8 1 CF Card 8 3 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Removing D Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF and make sure that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED turns off the CF card can be removed even during the GOT power on When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 Open the cover of the CF card interface Push the CF card eject button of the GOT The CF card eject button is pulled out after pushing at once When using other than the GT1550 8 4 8 1 CF Card 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Point P CF card eject button For the following GOTs after opening the cover of the CF card interface raise the CF card eject button e GT1585 S GT1575 S Hardware version B April 2005 or earlier z e GT1575 V GT1565 V Hardware version D April 2005 or earlier zZ f0 Ke z aie 2S nO 2 O 7 Push the CF card eject button of the GOT to lift the CF card and remove it 2 O When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 a a Zz lt W n a0 zz e F o
58. Reset in prgr Data link being executed Data link being stopped Set to the initial status Parameter not received In cut off status with no inquiry from master station In cut off status due to line error In cut off status due to other causes Line test being executed Parameter setting test being executed from master station Return processing being executed automatically CC Link communication unit being reset GOT reset status 14 25 Error Status Displays the status of the current error Normal Invalid TransPath Invalid Parameter CRC Error Time Out Error Abort Error Invalid Setup Other Abnormality 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Normal status Transmission path error detected Parameter error detected Reception data error detected Timeout error detected in data reception Error detected in data communication Invalid station number station type transmission speed or mode setting detected Error due to some other cause detected Display example of the NETWK unit status display 14 9 System Alarm Display Zz O o Zz 14 9 1 System alarm display function gt a System alarm display is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT 5 controller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display
59. S LU ere e iwa D When it cannot be deleted the dialog 2 ee showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder gt and execute the delete operation again mi on _ 13 11 5 Precautions 2 i5 oa Zz fa we t OS Ze Seu 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 93 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Copy operation An operation log file is copied Size Date Time aS Ed OPELO6_20060308_0000 1K 08 08 06 11 18 A OPELOG 20060309 0001 3K 03 09 06 09 V OPEL 06 20060500 000 7K 03 09 06 10 3 OPELO 2 4K 03 10 06 13 33 5 OKB 4Fi le B10 gt CSV Copy Hove gres 610 gt TxT Del Renae List eration Log Information 4 PROJECT 1 OPELOGS indName ize Date Time E OPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 i OPELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 a OPELOG_20060309_0001 7K 03 09 06 10 38 OPELOG_20060310_0002 4K 03 10 06 13 33 m ha 2SKB 15600KB 4F ile Please select dest ination Te Tal Target file OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Do you want to copy the file Target file OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Do you want to overwrite the file Continued to next page 1 3 94 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation amp Touch and select the file to copy Touch the Copy button Select th
60. TIME Red a Responses from all stations breakage or transmission path affected by noise Operating as master Operating other than as MST Green a station master station SW Red Switch setting error No switch setting error LINE Red Cable breakage error No cable breakage error Operating as standb Operating other than as S MST Green p 7 P 9 f master station standby master station Duplicate master station No duplicate master station M S Red error error Operating other than as local LOCAL Green Operating as local station f station PRM Red Parameter error No parameter error GOT R W Green Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 14 24 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY m9 FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O Wwe l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION 2 No Data link information Displays the CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 data link startup status and error status Item D Link Boot Status Description Displays the data link startup status D Link in prog D Link Offline Initialize Parameter wait Disconnect No Polling Disconnect Line Err Disconnect Other Testing Line Testing Pram Setup Auto Reconnecting
61. Touch Time setting amp GOT internal battery None Low Set the Clock settings display voltage status i and Time settings 1 2 1 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display z O O Z mi Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT data and the clock data of controller connected to the GOT Setting Description Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of controller an 50 Z ane Adjust Zar ob ozo Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 lt gt GT Designer2 Version J Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function Adjust the time of controller clock data to the clock data of GOT Q zZz LON Ae Broadcast nee Doty aon Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 1 2 GT Designer2 Version J Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function None No adjustment of clock data 8 z Z gt Adjust the GOT and controllers to the controller whose clock data is used as a base Ei hee neo xiL Sok h aze Adjust Broadcast oxun It is same as set in the GOT setup in Sy
62. Ver 02 01 00 or later Point f When using GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT1562 VN 8 4 2 Installing procedure For GT1575 VN GT1572 VN and GT1562 VN 65536 color display is not supported even with the multi color display board installed Power OFF the GOT Remove the expansion unit cover I F 2 side of GOT rear face Install the multi color display board in the multi color display board interface When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the multi color display board 8 4 Multi Color Display Board 8 4 1 Applicable multi color display board 8 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION E After the installation tighten a fixing screw within the specified torque range 0 25 to 0 35N m 8 10 8 4 Multi Color Display Board 8 4 2 Installing procedure 8 5 Printer Unit Printer unit is used for connecting a printer to GOT For details of the connection type refer to the following gt C gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual z 8 5 1 Printer unit type 6 The following type of printer unit can be used for GT1500 z Model name Description fi 3 Zz GT15 PRN 83g including connector holder and cable clamp gt 2 8 5 2 Installing procedure This section describes how to
63. W E System Screen Data 02 04 00 E Buitin Flash Memoy z ae Fl s H Standard Font i y TrueType Numerical Font 02 04 00 C Communication driver Extended function OS Option OS Intelligent module monitor data C Built in Flash Memory i C 0 motion monitor data J Servo amplifier monitor data ben ee Doty Data control Project_ information N aon i qe ie Q Install a CF card in the GOT A Built in CF card XIPROJECTT 3K 11 09 05 14 56 For how to install a CF card refer to the C Flash Memory following 6 gt z gt C7 8 1 CF Card EiS HEG sas Touch A Standard CF Card in Select Sok drive oto A zZ 24KB 15600KB lFile lt Property Data check Z Delete Download Upload z N O gt 48 Setup If touch the Download button the dialog LO Execute now mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button the setup is W executed 5 u LU N e O 0 zZ O i Setup is eonpleted When the setup is completed the dialog o9 On Restart now mentioned left is displayed Zz aa Touching the Ok button restarts the ae GOT Zz O we 90 TE lt Sle fig Zur lt SEQ 13 3 Project Information 1 3 23 13 3 4 Operation of project information Upload setup cancel operation 1 Upload operation By upload operation the project data is transferred from the C drive Built in flash memory to the A drive Standard CF Card The CF card after uplo
64. ZO LZ xE W He W Zo DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING oO UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Point gt Precautions for communications between GOT and controller 1 Installing communication driver and downloading Communication Setting The followings below are required for the communication interface to communicate with the controller 1 Installing communication drivers Up to 4 communication drivers 2 Assigning the channel number and communication driver for the communication interface 3 Downloading the contents project data assigned in 2 Perform 2 3 by GT designer2 Extend I F Settings Extend F 1 CHNo Driver Ist 1 gt Bus 4 Ond v Detail Setting 2nd D z Sa oa ENR A Qn4 Q CPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 ae o x Arac Detail Setting QUAITE 1 AJ 71 QE 71 MITET JA PRA Fh I hassas Refer to the following for details C GT Designer2Version O Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings e GT Designer2Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 3 1 Downloading project data PC to GOT 2 When Communication Setting has not been downloaded The GOT automatically assigns the installed communication driver in the order of 1 to 4 as follows Only the extend interface is ass
65. cancels to copy Fa Process completed When the copy is completed the dialog 6 of completion is displayed Q If touch button closes the dialog m g m Zz an 220 Zy 828 Move operation An operation log file is moved P ate JE on Los Information P x te AEROLECTINOPELO SG SET D Select the file to be moved by touching it Za Reese o fl uae CSV JOPELOG x K 310 Touch the Move button ag G10 a Oo aon N OS 2 FEA ma GEO y 508 z oak 155 72KB OKB 4F i le Ban 10 05 Copy Move Forder BOTT Del Renate List 3 a TE Select the target folder Rea Tein Cr card ae 7 y a E z 610 GPELO6_20060908 _0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 T E k aa N E 5 G2 T 09 i 3 r 610 oPELOG 200603 10 0002 4K 03 10 06 13 33 moving directly below the drive Oy wo Ego TO x O W T U i 5 g D PKBZ15600B Jild E Please select 2 destination EPT Ba gt O Continued to next page z 5 Lu Qo gt zs to aD oa z O we Qo SE O ears Zur eam ZF 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 73 13 8 4 Logging information operation 13 74 Target file OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Do you want to move the fi le Target file OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Do you want to overwrite the fi le Process completed 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Loggin
66. s a sasaa s aeaee 13 79 13 10 2 Special data information display operation s sasaa aaaea 13 79 13 10 3 Special data information display example n n nananana 13 80 13 10 4 Special data information operation ssas aoaaa aeee 13 81 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 87 13 11 1 Function of operation log information ssaa sasaaa aeaa 13 87 13 11 2 Display operation of operation log information saasaa aaaea 13 88 13 11 3 Example of operation log information display 20000 0c eee eee 13 89 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 000 00 ete 13 90 1324 1 5 Precautions 52 524 ta2c6 isl daa Sets balers ea aber a A a dd tate sae het 13 102 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK 14 1 to 14 29 14 1 Debug 14 1 trI The Debug functions deena ade ls doh abel Fa Ae a 14 1 14 1 2 Display operation of Debug 0 2 nee 14 2 14 2 Self check 14 3 14 2 1 Self check function 0 0 0 eee ee eee ees 14 3 14 3 Memory Check 14 4 14 3 1 Memory check function 0 00 0 14 4 14 3 2 Display operation of memory check aaau aaa 14 4 A 14 14 3 3 Memory check operation 0 0 600 cee ee bee eet es 14 5 14 4 Drawing Check 14 7 14 4 1 Drawing check function 0 aaua aaaeeeaa 14 7 14 4 2 Display operation of drawing check 0 eee tees 14 7 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 0 0 00 tne tees 14 8 14 5 Font C
67. serial communication GT09 C30R20101 9P Cable length 3m nO ee RS 232 module communication board serial communication board cable GT09 C30R20102 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable GT09 C30R20103 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs Sold separately Product hae Model name Description name GT09 C30R41101 5T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41101 5T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C200R41101 5T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R41101 5T Cable length 30m GT09 C30R21101 6P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 bl GT09 C30R21102 9S Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C30R21103 3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 11 We OVERVIEW zZ O x a oO L Zz Q 1S SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Description name GT09 C30R41201 6C Cable length 3 m RS 422 GT09 C100R41201 6C Cable length 10 m i For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable GT09 C200R41201 6C Cable length 20 m GT09 C300R41201 6C Cable length
68. the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed kEm H15560KB 0KB SF e rl 4 If touch A Y button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch amp M button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected For operation of operating switches refer to the following G10 CSV G10 TXT gt this section Delete a lt gt this section COPY en lt gt this section MOVE cece lt gt this section Rename a CF this section A Create Folder gt gt this section List a K gt this section 8 If touch D lt button the screen is closed 1 3 90 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Operation of G10 CSV conversion G10 TXT conversion z Operation log file G10 file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on S personal computer z z V intro ol 2 A 7 5 Burna EEE 1 Touch and select the G10 file which is to 0 WV be converted to CSV file or Unidcode text file 5 O f z Touch the following button in oy accordance with destination file type aiz ZuE CSV file 610 5CSV button 824 e Unicode text file G10 gt TXT button T L 15572KB 0KB ror e10 c5y Copy Move Create o 6
69. there is no setting item which displays the keyboard For the operation of keyboard refer to the next page 6 7 89 Del lt gt QLD 2 13 44 s Cancel Enter Touching Enter confirms the numerical input When the setting range exists it repeats the numerical without displaying keyboard Example 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps Se ee Displays the another setting screen 2 Setting contents are reflected if OK amp If touch button without touching Setting Key It shifts to the setting screen of each setting item when touched OK button is touched button the dialogue mentioned below is displayed With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK 9 11 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Keyboard operation Touch the numerical value to be changed 2 Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously The key board display position chanegs by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting z O fam O Z S Wwe gt 5 2 O an 529 Communication Setting Suit Bey Standard I F Setting Channe 1 Dr iver as
70. we au gt 25 mer Zur Sey 11 8 Transparent Settings Transparent Mode Setting 1 1 29 11 8 1 Function of the transparent mode 11 8 3 Operation the transparent mode GOT setup Transparent mode With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Touching the transparent ChNo numerical part on the left the keyboard is displayed Input numerical value by the keyboard 2 Touching the OK button reflects the selected setting Touching the D lt button without touching the OK button displays the dialog mentioned left is displayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with PX button after completing the setting of all items to change GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 1 1 30 11 8 Transparent Settings Transparent Mode Setting 11 8 3 Operation the transparent mode 11 9 Video Unit Settings Zz fe O 5 GT1585 GT1575 11 9 1 Functions of the video unit settings E The video input signal and resolution can be selected 6 z Item Description Setting range ou g0 Input signal NTSC PAL Src lt At factory shipment NTSC gt Ob vid o Unit Settings The input signal and resolution can be Resolution 640 x 480 11 selected 5 720 x 480 lt At factory shipment 640 x 480 gt Only when PAL is selected fm Zz Tog gt E lt s2Z Qi
71. 02H GOT setup Language English Opening screen time 6 Sec Screen save time Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display OFF Brightness contrast Setting Touch an item to change settings Human sensor Effective r detect level 10 MAX 10 r detect time 0 0 Sec a Zz Tog gt E 432 Qi Ooty OON Sensor off delay 0 Min N 2 gt Fra Mere LiL a5 oak otb Q Z lt z Point gt Restart after setting change a If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the lt lt button after the WS wo setting of each item is changed and touch the x button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings o W If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the 5 setting contents are canceled without reflected al 2 O GOT setup oO E pisn T If touch X the GOT restarts fa EA H e ae and the changes are reflected zZ fe BB vi deommes setting z S On it Sa Z fa wg ZE Zur SEY 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 5 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting 11 1 3 Display setting operations Opening screen screen save time EE Q If t
72. 1 The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The above test items are conducted in the condition where the GOT is installed on the conductive control panel and combined with the Mitsubishi PLC 2 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 3 The above test items are conducted in the following conditions 30M 230MHz QP 40dB UV m 10m in measurement range 230M 1000MHz QP 47dqB V m 10m in measurement range 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 1 1 EMC directive 5 1 2 Control panel The GOT is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel OVERVIEW 1 Control panel a The control panel must be conductive b When fixing a top or bottom plate of the control panel with bolts do not coat the plate and bolt surfaces so that they will come into contact And connect the door and box using a thick grounding cable in order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency CONFIGURATION SYSTEM c When using an inner plate to ensure electric conductivity with the control panel do not coat the fixing bolt area of the inner plate and control panel to ensure conductivity in the largest area as possible d Ground the control panel using a thick grounding cable in
73. 11 48 19 14 50 50 Author Downloading continue Setup is completed Restart now 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information If touch the Downoad button the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button executes downloading 2 If any project data with the same name exists in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting downloading In this case the project data of the C drive is overwritten with the project data of the A drive when downloaded Touching the Cancel button cancels the downloading When the downloading is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restarts the GOT 2 Setup operation Sets the project data stored in the A drive Standard CF Card to be used in the GOT A z The GOT monitors using the data in the A drive 2 2 m i Point Before setup operation Z a When storing project data from GT Designer2 to CF card select A Standard CF 5 Card for Project Data in Boot Drive Communicate with Memory Card Zz Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write 2 ee z FJ Untitled Project GOT Type GT15 V 640 480 X oT i Z 9 Standard monitor OS 02 04 00 Boot Drive S fe zZ System Screen Information 02 04 00 Project Data
74. 17 1 Operation of Addition times reset 0 17 2 Advanced Recipe Information e 13 44 Alarm information cceeceeeeeeeeceeecteeeeeeeeees 13 28 Alarm information operation 0 000 13 30 Function of alarm information 005 13 28 The display operation of alarm information 13 28 Attachment iee iaa citi satanic ance 2 14 8 33 Applicable attachment ceceeeeeeeeeees 8 33 Installing PrOCCCUIE eeeeeceeesettereeeeeteteeeeeeees 8 33 B Backlight iii eared 2 14 19 6 Backlight replacement ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneees 19 6 Backlight shutoff detection and replacement 19 5 Bar Code reader 2 ceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaees 2 12 Basic operation of settings change 9 11 BaSIGO Sis 82 elves aa adaa ei Tenka eh eden 9 1 Battery aena easel aren eee 2 13 8 27 Applicable battery c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeerees 8 27 Battery life eseina e 8 28 Battery replacement procedure 2 006 8 27 Battery Specifications ccc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 27 Battery voltage low detection and battery replacement cecceeeeeceececceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeneenes 19 4 Battery status display cceecceeeeeeesteeeeeeenaes 12 1 GOT internal battery status display 12 5 BOotiOS retn a Sete tate 9 1 18 1 Brightness contrast adjustment eee 11 12 Brightness adjustment funct
75. 2 Installing procedure 4 Fasten the printer unit by tightening its mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 N m ZI W gt Zz O Ke When mounting any extension unit in a later stage refer to the following a 2 Z r z 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers 26 nO When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed stick accessory labels on the top of mounting screws 2 places to cover the top of them in order to avoid receiving electrostatic charge 2 Keep the connector cover and label fixed 2 S m O W Accessory labels F Connector cover Q lt W n cto 2z Ar o sow Bue lt lt 5 Sox w gt O FS O 3 n zZ 8 5 Printer Unit 8 13 8 5 2 Installing procedure Point P 1 Precautions for connecting the dedicated printer connection cable USB cable e Wait 5s or more between the connection and disconnection of the dedicated printer connection cable If connecting or disconnecting the dedicated printer connection cable shortly after disconnecting or connecting the cable the GOT may not operate normally e Do not connect or disconnect the dedicated printer connection cable during printing Doing so can cause the GOT operate incorrectly e Connected printer may not be recognized in rare cases When printer is not recognized disconnect the dedicated printer connection cable once and connect i
76. 2run 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 99 13 11 4 Operation log information operation ion Log Information File Name A PROJECT1 OPELOG OPELO6_20060310_0002 610 A D 2006 Pate Tine Screen No Operation Change To 3 10 12 08 49 Switch applications Moni tor E 3 10 a Screen switching Base BASE_1 13 10 Numerical Input 100 f 13 10 Numerical Input 80 13 10 Numerical Input 900 13 10 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_2 13 10 Screen switching Base BASE_2 13 10 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_10 13 10 Screen switching Base BASE_10 3 10 Switch applications Utility 13 10 Switch applications Moni tor 13 10 Screen switching Base BASE_10 13 10 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_1 3 10 Screen switching Base BASE_1 3 10 Numerical Input 5000 3 10 Switch languages 32767 3 10 Numerical Input 32768 7 13 10 Switch applications Utility i 13 10 Switch applications Utility kl Search File Name A PROJECTI OPELOG OPELOG200603100002 610 h 2006 bate Tine Screen No Operation Change To 03 10 12 06 48 Screen switching Base BAGE_1 E 03 10 12 08 55 B 1 Numerical Input 100 03 10 12 08 58 B 1 I J 03 10 12 09 02 B 1 i 103 10 12 09 02 B 1 Date 2006 A 3 10 Jv 03 10 12 09 03 ine 32 g 5 a 03 10 12 09 03 8 20 ho 03 10 12 09 03 w 03 10 12 09 04 71 8 9 4H ty 03 10 12 09 09 lor 0
77. 3 Logging Function F ow 30 SiO Zy zua Function Description Refer to 9zW Displaying file The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 67 13 68 folder data G1L CSV F G1L file of logging file is converted to CSV file 13 69 o conversion Zz a G1L TXT B GIL file of logging file is converted to Unicode text file 13 69 wee conversion Ont aon Del File or folder is deleted 13 71 Copy File is copied 13 72 Move Folder is moved 13 73 Oo amp ee Rename File name is changed 13 75 Emig eel Create Folder New folder is created 13 76 Dao Qha E ode OH A zZ xt z e i oO 5 O gt wo 30 miS x O W a u Lu N e O zZ O og ae 25 go 1B Oe Zz O we 99 TE ZE 250 woz Zur lt SEG 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 65 13 8 1 Function of logging information 13 8 2 Display operation of logging information Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display Bee ee Touch Program Data Touch Logging control Information Logging Information select Drive PROJECT1 indName Size Date A Built_in CF card LOs00001 1K 06 05 0 Lagooo02 2K 06 05 0 L0G00002 2K_06 05 0 513K 0 Operate Logging file 7 768KB 15632KB BIL gt CS Copy Move BILSTAT Del Rename 1 3 66 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 2 Display operation of logging information 13 8 3 Example of logging information
78. 5 Point P Precautions for removing the CF card aie Se ZOF 1 While the CF card access LED is on do not install remove the CF card or power a off the GOT aSa To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the CF card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card z z 3 Do not install remove the CF card while downloading the monitor data or other o data by the RS 232 transmission To do so may cause a faulty communication of the GT Designer2 and the data cannot be downloaded normally 8 1 CF Card 8 5 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor The memory card adaptor is used to convert the CF card into the memory card Type Il The memory card Type Il is used to transmit the OS project data and to save the data of alarm history function or other functions by installing it to the PC which is equipped with the CMCIA interface Refer to the following for the details related to CF card gt 8 1 CF Card 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor The following memory card adaptor is applicable for GT1500 Mode Description GT05 MEM ADPC Converts the CF card into a memory card 8 2 2 Installing procedure Fit the memory card in the memory card adaptor LP ZZ CF card Memory card adaptor 8 6 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adapt
79. 6 2 Installing procedure 8 7 Communication Unit The communication unit is used to relate the GOT expansion unit interfaces to the system at the connection destination Refer to the following for the details of connection statuses GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 8 7 1 Applicable communication unit The following communication units are applicable for GT1500 Product name Bus connection unit Serial communication unit Model GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L Description For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series For last GOT 1 connector connection standard model For intermediary and last GOT 2 connectors For A QnACPU motion For last GOT 1 connector controller CPU A series connection standard model For intermediary and last GOT 2 connectors For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series For last GOT 1 connector connection slim model For intermediary and last GOT 2 connectors GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P For A QnACPU motion For last GOT 1 connector controller CPU A series For intermediary and last GOT 2 connectors connection slim model For RS 232 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 98 1 For RS 422 interface connection connector type GT15 RS4 TE For RS 422 interface connection terminal block type Ethernet commu
80. 640 x 480 rebooting the GOT E B When you touch the Confirm button the So i Sao _Confira setting contents are determined ene O5 u 020 Changes are discarded if you close If you touch the X button without the window before pressing Confirm touching the Confirm button the dialog box Do you want to proceed aire on the left is displayed a Zz Tog gt E lt s2Z Qi Ong AON N Eug HEA Yn OK Cancel Sar OH 4 After completing the settings for all the a items you want to change in Video Unit lt Settings when closing Video Unit Settings and Video RGB Setting A S Communication Setting with the 5 button the GOT is restarted and the new setting contents are reflected S W x O u d k O oO zZ fe Sp On if Sa Z fa we Zi Zur SEB 11 9 Video Unit Settings 11 33 11 9 3 Operating the video unit settings 11 10 Video Display Settings aga 11 10 1 Functions of the video display settings The target for the video settings and the preview channel can be selected and the captive area and image quality can be set Item Description Setting range Channel 1 2 3 4 lt At factory shipment 1 gt Captive area Horizontal 100 to 100 The target for the video settings and the lt At factory shipment 0 gt Vertical 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt preview channel can be selected and the captive area in the horizontal direct
81. 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers 00 000 cece eee 8 31 8 8 RS 422 Conversion Unit 8 34 8 8 1 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit 02000 eee 8 34 8 8 2 Installing procedure 0 002 eee ee 8 34 8 9 Battery 8 35 8 9 1 Applicable battery esa c42i 25 sre eet ea da eth aes a alae wand da ee cake nal aa k a 8 35 8 9 2 Battery specifications ceso ao eedi ee E a 8 35 8 9 3 Battery replacement procedure 0 000 cee eee 8 35 8 9 4 Battery lilon i se mat acetals s aa ae a eee e eet ae baa A gaa eed 8 36 8 10 Protective Sheet 8 37 8 10 1 Applicable protective sheet 000 000 ce eee 8 37 8 10 2 Installing procedure sne e erena n a a eee ee 8 38 8 11 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 39 8 11 1 Applicable USB environmental protecton cover 2200 cece eee eee 8 39 8 11 2 Installing procedure 0 00 eee eee 8 39 8 12 Stand 8 41 8 12 1 Applicable stand 0 00 eee 8 41 8 122 installing procedure j 2 1 tid ie deaianed eaa e ba dalnce dd based ed Medd nined 8 41 8 13 Attachment 8 43 8 13 1 Applicable attachment nosi innen a eee eae 8 43 8 13 2 Installing procedure 0 0 teas 8 43 UTILITY FUNCTION 9 1to9 12 9 1 Utility Execution 9 1 9 2 Utility Function List 9 2 9 3 Utility Display 9 5 A 11 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu 0 00000 eee 9 7 9 3 2 Utility basic c
82. 8 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX App 9 d GT1560 R Model name A B C D bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 47 1 85 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 23 0 91 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 27 5 1 08 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 47 1 85 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L 10 0 39 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS 2i 73 5 2 89 27 1 12 36 1 42 45 1 77 GT15 RS2 9P 2 72 5 2 85 28 5 1 12 GT15 RS4 9S 2 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 0 0 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 3 23 0 91 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 45 5 1 79 30 1 18 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 5 0 2 28 1 1 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 4 4 4 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 42 1 65 47 5 1 87 80 3 15 38 1 5 50 1 97 GT15 75J61BT13 Z GT15 PRN 52 2 05 45 1 77 7 0 28 23 0 91 18 0 71 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch e GT155 0 Model name A B GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL 73 5 2 89 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P 2 72 5 2 85 GT15 RS4 9S 2 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 GT15 J71LP23 25 3 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 G
83. 8 5 0 34 36 1 42 28 1 1 55 2 17 5 0 2 8 0 32 36 1 42 9 5 0 37 30 1 18 0 0 18 0 71 24 0 95 4 4 23 5 0 93 30 1 18 o 28 1 1 3 3 45 5 1 79 16 0 63 50 1 97 0 0 18 0 71 68 2 68 20 0 79 1300 51 32 1 26 BNC 68 148 0 71 2 68 BNC 20 0 79 RGB 13 RGB 32 1 26 0 51 13 0 51 32 1 26 Unit mm inch c GT157 0 R Model name A B C D bending radius of the cable GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 42 1 65 55 2 17 GT15 QBUS2 21 0 83 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 22 5 0 89 36 1 42 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 42 1 65 8 0 32 55 2 17 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL T 73 5 2 89 22 0 87 8 0 32 36 1 42 50 1 97 GT15 RS2 9P 2 72 5 2 85 23 5 0 93 GT15 RS4 9S 2 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 0 0 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 2 21 0 83 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 37 5 1 48 30 1 18 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 0 28 1 1 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 4 4 4 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 47 1 85 45 5 1 79 80 3 15 33 1 3 50 1 97 GT15 75J61BT13 Z GT15 PRN 52 2 05 50 1 97 2 0 08 18 0 71 GT15V 75V4 6 132 5 2 85 3 35 20 0 79 GT15V 75R1 6 77 3 03 30 1 18 32 1 26 BNC 132 BNC 85 9149 83 5 2 47 1 85 3 35 BNC 20 0 79 GT15V 75V4R1 6 RGB 77 RGB 30 RGB 32 1 26 3 03 1 18 GT15V 75ROUT 6 77 3 03 30 1 18 32 1 26 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch App
84. CF Card in Select 02 drive 1 3 A zZ j lt 2 12KB 15600KB IFile gt Property Data check Si Delete Download a A gt wo xe wo Continued to next page x E O u Lu N e O Oo Zz O og 25 25 go 12 oA Z O wg lt 250 woz zu SEG 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 85 13 10 4 Special data information operation 13 86 Special data download now The special data has already downloade Current Target Built Version 215R 215R Built Date f Built Time i Author Downloading continue Cancel Download is completed Restart now 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 4 Special data information operation Download button the screen If touch the mentioned left is displayed Downloading is executed when the touched OK button is 4 If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed If touch the OK button the project data is downloaded and the project data in the C drive is overwritten Downloading is canceled when the Cancel button is touched When the downloading is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restarts the GOT 13 11 Operation Log Information Zz Q 8 Zz Ww i f tion log inf ti 13 11 1 Function of operation log information E Operatio
85. Communication driver upporting the test run mode EP 2 MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 O x O Extended function OS Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 09K i O x O Bar code reader Barcode 01 02 connection 5 i onig aD cod 7 337D Extended function OS upporting connection to 2D code reader Pe E Barcode 02 04 O x O Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 22 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX SP Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description i Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Print E rti donto pfni 2a Extended function OS rinter connection upporting connection to printer Ever Printer 02 04 O x x GT15 Standard monitor OS 01 02 Supporting the FA transparent function via USB 2 09K GT11 O x Standard monitor OS 01 02 Boot OS 01 02 C FA transparent 7 p MT Developer via USB MR Configurator and FR Configurator are added as 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O compatible software GX Configuration and PX Developer are f 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x O added as compatible software Multiple GT11 Connection with multiple GT11s 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 x x O connection
86. EO List Touching the List button displays ate File Nane A PROUECT1 OPELOS OPELOG_20060310_0002 810 ow ff A D 2006 the list aon Date Time Screen No Operation Change To A 03 10 12 08 49 Switch applications Honi tor E In the list the following contents can be 03 10 12 08 49 Screen switching Base BASE_1 i 03 10 12 08 55 B 1 Nunerical Input 100 03 10 12 08 58 B 1 Nunerical Input 80 checked 03 10 12 09 02 B 1 Nunerical Input 900 DERS 03 10 12 09 02 B 1 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_2 i i 03 10 12 09 03 Screen switching Base BASE_2 Display items Date 9 03 10 12 09 03 B 2 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_10 i Fra 03 10 12 09 03 Screen switching Base BASE10 Time HWN 03 10 12 09 04 Switch appl ications Utility WEG 03 10 12 09 09 Switch appl ications Monitor 03 10 12 09 09 Screen switching Base BASE_10 Screen No VR 03 10 12 09 11 B 10 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_1 03 10 12 09 11 Screen switching Base BASE_1 Q 03 10 12 09 21 B 1 Numerical Input 5000 Operation type oss 03 10 12 10 00 Switch languages 32767 OLN 03 10 12 10 10 B 1 Numerical Input 32768 y Value after change 03 10 12 10 13 Snitch appl ications Utility Mi 03 10 12 10 14_ Switch appl ications Utility 1 3 A Search zZ T gt i a q To display the details of an operation a File Nane A PROJECT1 OPELOS OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 D ho aw log touch the row for that operation log a Date Time Screen No Operation Change To
87. ES Szo M ha 155 72KB OKB 4F ile cost ty toe Fee 610 gt TXT Del Rename List Q Za sty E E X If touch the Rename button displays the Bice Path Name screen shown left then input the file cham A PROJECT I RECPE1 l p DOH File Name name to be renamed LINE A_RECIPS By touching the following button input text type is changed o gt aa A z English capital peg n 0 9 Numeric Symbol lt a _ oak oto l Enter 2 FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao Q Folder create operation 13 54 Folder to be used in advanced recipe is created PROJECT1 dName in Size Date Time DIR py DIR RECIPE1 03 16 05 15 17 i DIR RECIPE2 03 16 05 15 17 DIR JRECIPES 03 16 05 15 17 i OF i Semel Rae Move ete Execute BIP TxT Del Rename OSRE Path Name A PROJECT1 Folder Name RECIPE HIH i QUWVETRIT YI UY TO P ALSIDIF ISH SIKIL ZUXICIVIBININ Enter Create new folder Process completed 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Q Touch the Create Folder button The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left 4
88. Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side GT15 UCOV For complying IP67 For 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT main unit front side GT11 50UCOV For complying IP67 For 5 7 8 11 2 Installing procedure Fix the USB environmental protection cover to the GOT by tightening its upper fixing screw within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 N m It is advisable to set the USB environmental protection cover along a guiding hole which is provided in the GOT as it will make the installation easier For other than GT1550 For GT1550 Guiding When the USB interface is not used also tighten the lower fixing screw of the USB environmental protection cover within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48 N m IP67 compliant For other than GT1550 For GT1550 p aS Wy 8 11 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 11 1 Applicable USB environmental protecton cover 8 39 SYSTEM PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SPECIFICATIONS DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION 3 When the USB interface is used remove the lower fixing screw of the USB environmental protection cover and connect the USB cable IP67 incompliant For other than GT1550 For GT1550 Ui Point gt Precautions when the USB environment cover is opened Environmen
89. F i LG Yo rel GOT LG Panel grounding Panel grounding Use a short and thick cable as much as possible Ground the system to one end T 4 7 3 Grouding Recommended terminal shape Terminal Solderless Ternak Soldeness 03 2 screw terminal ye 6 2mm Cr J we a A or less a 03 2 6 or less When wiring one cable to When wiring two cables to z one terminal one terminal se fe fe nz as Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A n FE fe T O Irie O uw oO N Q Z lt W n KO 2z RE o O w oye LLO e mede FE O S N Z O Z x Zz O E O 7 3 Grouding T 5 7 4 Power Supply Connection This section provides an example for connecting power cables and ground cables to the power terminals sit uated on the back of the GOT In the case of 100V AC GOT INPUT 100 240VAC 1 DD I LG FG wl 24V DC In the case of 24V DC other than GT155 0 GOT INPUT 24VDC JE DQ LG FG In the case of 24V DC GT155 Ground cables Grounding Point gt Precautions for wiring to the power supply section 1 For 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable use the thickest cable as possible Max 2mm and start twisting them at the position closest to the connected terminals To prevent a short circuit due to loose screws use the sold
90. FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 5 13 1 3 OS version confirmation 13 1 4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location When download the project data confirm the capacity of the user area in the drive to which transferred the transferred project data size the transfer size and buffering area size of the optional function OS in advance to judge whether to carry out the download The capacities can be confirmed by GT Designer2 Refer to the following for details LF GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 1 2 Drive capacity required for data transfer 1 3 lt 6 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 4 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location 13 1 5 Display file z O The display screen and storage destination for each type of data are shown below S The file name and contents of each data can be displayed with property display of the utility 2 gt A Storage destination Item Display screen Drive name folder name 5 Standard CF card A G1BOOT BootOS or Built in flash memory C G1BOOTV2 E Standard monitor OS system screen data Tu Standard monitor OS system screen management Zz information file Sir Standard monitor OS monitor
91. If touch the OK button starts creating folder When creating folder is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog 8 G1P file create operation z Advanced recipe file G1P file is created S When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility advanced recipe file should be created with this z function in advance 3 5 ind lame Size Date Time D Touch the Create G1P button IR PROJECT 1 03 16 05 15 45 B z O a 220 Ee Ozu m j ld S gt IPI Copy Move eae Execute See BIPTxT Del Rerame reate Gaz a aon The screen to select the advanced recipe setting is displayed ecir No 2 f Select the advanced recipe setting to be O ecipe No R used for new file Feo After selecting touch the Next button rn Sap oac oth U o Zz lt z Next ao N a 4 U gt Q O As the input key window is displayed Path Name AN File Name ARPOOOOM Continued to next page 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information input the file name for new file By touching the following button input text type is changed A z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 55 CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION
92. LIST eaa Ws a a e a eet r a Biase a ai Whites tae 8 E a a a a a RS A 23 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 5 1 1 Features 1 4 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 18 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 1 2 2 Component List 2 2 2201 GOT on eters ee ne el ee eo ene wie he eld Seed 2 4 22722 OPUOM er Rah ete dda ak ret aint 2 ee ental dd bn ta tale a at it A eM ee daha tk Mies 2 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 14 3 1 General Specifications 3 1 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 Sal lt GTTS95 X gic 2a Rd Salo Sh Ste Padi a Pee Moe thie Bia alld hie SO ones ad Reagents 3 2 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S zorre eea nents 3 4 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 2 eee 3 6 3 2 47 GI1565 V3 GPT562 VN nn eae Ba oo Al be ee de aed be 3 9 3 2 5 G11555 GT1550 ass 2 stot etal edd E te tae anette teed Rint teeta base sett oy 3 11 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 13 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply 5 3 13 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply 020200 cece eee 3 14 4 PART NAME AND SETTINGS 4 1to4 11 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 4 1 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 4 3 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT1570 4 5 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT1560 4 8 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT1550 4 10 5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5 1to5 18 5 1 Requirements to M
93. Memory card GOT OS file BootOS or standard gt monitor OS installation Yo woh sy e When GOT is remote installed easily aar G OT using the memory card z ma o Memory ma card in GOT GT Designer2 3 GOT Memory card gt GOT OS file BootOS standard Va upload monitor OS installation 7 a5 Install OS from GOT to GOT using GOT lt gt Peso GOT memory card Install the memory Memory card card in GOT Refer to the following for the installation which uses GT Designer2 GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT 37 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 1 9 1 Utility Execution 9 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens Item Functions overview Setting of channel number for the communication interface and assignment of communication driver Zz Qo QO ra u gt m Cc e Sr Setting of communication parameter gt Sequence program protection key word setting When FX series PLC is E 3 Detail settings connected 5 o 9 Sequence program protection key word deleting When FX series PLC is 2 oO connected Su Sequence program protection status cancel When FX
94. O x O x fa 5 check 179 check Z f Self loopback check O x O x 3 a go Monitoring of the LED status display of the MELSECNET H ih NETWK unit status communication unit and CC Link communication unit ei 7 lt 2 display GT15 J61BT13 O x x zg Displaying of error information etc System alarm Displaying GOT errors CPU errors network errors LW display Resetting GOT errors O x O x z z z OF GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time b x 6 x HE accumulated operating hours crs T Zoa E Clean Display the screen to clean the display section O x O x pa O oO Black light maintenance timing setting x x D no 2 Display section maintenance time notification period D e mate f setting O x x w Maintenance timing setting 2 o 6 Z O fre S Setting of touch key maintenance notification count O x x a lt oO Setting of Built in flash memory maintenance notification Z count O x x g g Function to reset the value of the backlight maintenance 8 notification time display section maintenance notification Addition times reset time touch key maintenance notification count built in flash O x x 2 5 memory maintenance notification count which has been u additioned for the maintenance report function To lt x 1 It is necessary to carry out the following items by GT Designer2 Installation of communication driver Allocation of channel number and communicati
95. OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 dialog shown left After LINE A_LOG 610 E If touch the OK button starts 5 Change filename F gt renaming file Ef U While executing Processing message appears on the screen x O W x O 5 ee W Process completed When renaming is completed 5 completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog O So Ze zx 4D oA Z O wg ae E Boe Zur 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 75 13 8 4 Logging information operation Folder create operation An operation log folder is created indName Size Date Time DIR G10 JOPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 G10 JOPELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 p van eR PROECTINPELO Q Touch the Create Folder button A Built_in CF carc 2l 155 72KB OKB 610 gt CSV Copy 610 gt TXT xJ The input key window shown left A appears then input the file name to be alder Ne created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital ee ee ee 0 9 Numeric Symbol ANXICIVIBIN N Enter Create new folder If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts creating folder When creating folder is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog Process completed
96. OS 01 02 O O x Parts Movement memory card as parts 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Panelmeter Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Trend graph Function to collect data only when display N 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O trigger is met is added Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 oO G O value number Line graph Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O G value number Bar graph Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Statistics graph Function to collect data only when display i 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O oO O trigger is met is added Up to 101 points can be set for scale R 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O value number Scatter graph Function to collect data only when display F 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O trigger is met is added Historical Trend Function to display the d
97. OS installation communication setting change 14 10 GOT Start Time 14 10 3 Display of GOT start time 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION Zz O CLEAN Zz ra In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes E Refer to the below for the cleaning procedure 19 3 Cleaning Method 6 z 15 1 Clean Sy siz SE Zz 15 1 1 Display operation of Clean Main menu lt gt 9 3 Utility Display 25 LON Please press top corner buttons simultanec zaz can Aw Fis DEA Lae ame oac oto A Z lt z gt ma Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not zo operates x O W ae O u 7 e O Oo _ Zz O O WwW 2 gt lt 1 Q a CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 15 1 Clean 15 14 15 1 1 Display operation of Clean 15 1 2 Operation of Clean After cleaning the screen touch the screen following the instruction displayed After touching the screen the screen returns to the Main Menu Depending on the GOT to use either of the following screens is displayed e Display pattern 1 p corner buttons simultane e Display pattern 2 ess the upper left of of the screen and the upper right of in turn 15 2 15 1 Clean 15 1 2 Operation of Clean 16 MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING MAINTEN
98. Ong OON Point P Input signal settings Set the input signal as follows according to the output format for the video camera or the like connected E gt Z gt If the settings made differ from these video images may not be displayed correctly Fie HEA Output format for video camera or the like Input signal setting ooz ON NTSC format NTSC PAL format PAL EIA format NTSC z CCIR format PAL z T D O gt wo 10 L O x O W a Oo Ww Lu N e O Zz fo Sf 9 N gt 25 go 2 oA Z O wg 99 Ww Zu 250 moz Zur q SEO 11 9 Video Unit Settings 1 1 31 11 9 1 Functions of the video unit settings 11 9 2 Displaying the video unit settings Main Menu L gt 9 3 Utility Display z GOT setup Video RGB setting Touch GOT setup Touch Touch Video Unit Settings Communication setting Video RGB Setting L gt 10 1 Communication Setting Touch Video Unit Settings Video RGB Input Signal NTSC Resolution 640x480 WARNING Changes are valid after rebooting the GOT Confirm Touch an item to be set 1 1 32 11 9 Video Unit Settings 11 9 2 Displaying the video unit settings 11 9 3 Operating the video unit settings Zz fe When you touch the setting item the Z setting contents change gt Input signal PAL E p gnal NTSC Resolution 640x480 Resolution x 720 x 480 ee ances are valid after
99. Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 Project data can be also downloaded uploaded via Ethernet For download upload of project data via Ethernet BootOS and standard monitor OS should be installed in the GOT in advance so that the GOT and PC can communicate with each other via Ethernet by setting Communication Settings Refer to the following manual for details GT Designer2 Version 1 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Option function board Multi color display board Protective sheet Extension unit Commercially available Personal computer Memory card CF card Commercially available q I 22 Memory card adaptor 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 1 We OVERVIEW O E lt x a 0 m Zz Q 1S Ww 12 gt 2 SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 Component List 1 Expl
100. S ip z Placing Setting objects Overview Detailed i 9 Transferring data to GOT Detailed Z 1 Stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format Zz O e oO O 2 Installing a GOT Connecting to a controller For the operations from installing a GOT to communicating with a controller refer to the following manuals Included GT15 General Description GT15 User s Manual GOT1000 Series Purpose ee GT11 General Description GT11 User s Manual Connection Manual Saas Confirming part names and specifications of the GOT Overview Detailed Confirming the GOT installation method Detailed Confirming the mounting method for SE extension units or option devices Detailed Confirming the PLC connection method Detailed Confirming the utility operation method Detailed Confirming error codes system alarm displayed on the GOT Detailed 1 Stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format 3 Other manuals The following manuals are also available The following manuals are stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 in PDF format a GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Describes functions for more efficient debugging as the ladder monitor function system monitor function and A list edit function b GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Describes how to use the gateway function c GT SoftGOT1000 Version O Operating Manual Describes how to use the GT SoftGOT100
101. TFT SVGA GT1575 S l For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA Backlight GT15 70VLTT GT1575V S GT1575 V z VGA GT15 70VLTN For 10 4 TFT VGA GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT15 60VLTT For 8 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA GT1565 V z GT15 60VLTN For 8 4 TFT VGA GT1562 VN 6 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit USB environmental protection cover Sold separately Product name Model name Description g m Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT GT15 UCOV y A 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 USB environmental main unit front side For complying IP67 protection cover y Environmental cover for USB interface on the GOT GT11 50UCOV i 5 7 main unit front side For complying IP67 7 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main body 6 a 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 17 Attachment Sold separately Model name GT15 60ATT 96 A960GOT GT1565 Attachment For 8 4 attachment GT15 60ATT 97 A97 O GOT GT1565 Product name Description Drawing software Sold separately Product name Description SW O DSC GTD2 J GT Designer2 O indicates the Drawing software for GOT1000 GOT900 series version 8 The O is assigned with an integer 2 or more PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Description For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female GT01 C30R2 9S Cable length 3m and PC D sub 9 pin female For connect
102. Target file A ARPO0001 G1P If touch the Enter button the dialog Do you want to create the file shown left is displayed Touch the button Target file A ARPO0001 G1P When the file whose name is the same Do you want to Overwrite the file exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the creation Touching the OK button overwrites the file If touch the button cancels creating QO When creating is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the button closes the dialog Process completed 1 3 56 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 9 Record load operation Z F r Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller Q ra z rive PROJECT INREU IPE SoS Ths amp Select the recipe file and touch the ARPOOOO 1K 03 16 05 15 17 A button 2 Zz O an 220 ES Szo M 7 1 IEild 1P CS Copy Move ra te Execute BIP TXT Del Rename Cygate 2z lt On Data Cor pe Informatio 3 e Fi le Name A PROJECTINREC IPE TARPO0001 61P As the Advanced Recipe Record List g etting No 2 on Name Recipe No 1 i i Oat re me screen is displayed select the record 2a iy AE i comment to which you want to load the 3 Process 3 setting a F 4 P Process 4
103. Utility Display Touch Program Data control Touch OS information E m Program Data control OS information 0S_ information C lt i ndName Size Date Time DIR G 1B00T 03 02 42 02 49 DIR G1S S 02 27 04 06 33 Operate BootOS and OS file 5058KB OF i Install Up load Property Data check 1 3 8 13 2 OS Information 13 2 1 Function of OS information 13 2 3 Display example of OS information elect drive C Flash Men 1 Program Data control 0S information A Built in CF card IDIR bISis E D 610SQC1R 3 10SQC 1R 1CMAQDR 10SQC1R 2 3 8 9 1E 5058KB Install Upload Property Data check Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected 1 Select drive i sg F When the CF card is not installed A Built in CF Card is not displayed 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder in In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed 3 Name tas When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21th character or after are not displayed 4 Path name The path name of the currently displayed drive folder is displayed 5 Size Displays the size of t
104. applicable for GT1500 Model name GT15 90XLTT Description For 15 high intensity wide angle view TFT XGA Target GOT GT1595 X GT15 80SLTT For 12 1 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1585V S GT1585 S GT15 70SLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA GT1575 S GT15 70VLTT For 10 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT SVGA VGA GT1575V S GT1575 V GT15 70VLTN For 10 4 TFT VGA GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT15 60VLTT For 8 4 high intensity wide angle view TFT VGA GT1565 V GT15 60VLTN For 8 4 TFT VGA 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight GT1562 VN For GT15 90XLTT Power off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the expansion unit cover on the right side of the GOT Remove the expansion unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted 1 9 6 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 1 Applicable backlight Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Expanded figure of part A in ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND Lo STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND m z O O mf a a z QO Disconnect the cable connector of the upper
105. are mounted O A the units are not allowed Zz Check the mounted units and remove unnecessary units a Unit mounted incorrectly a ae Z 5 The unit is not mounted on the GOT in the correct position 1 Ze 484 Move the unit to correct f Re O Wo a Confirm the mounting position of the unit zW position g g Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum Too many units mounted i 485 number of mountable units O on GOT Reduce units ii Check the number of units and remove unnecessary units 9 wn The communication driver set in the Communication Setting aja and the communication unit installed on the GOT do not zes Communication unit not match coe ba lt lt 486 corresponded to set 1 Check whether the communication driver set in the O communication driver Communication Setting is correct 2 Check whether any incorrect communication unit has been installed on the GOT N uu Please turn on the PLC 2 487 Turn the power of the PLC and GOT on again O Z and the GOT again fi oa Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum Too many units mounted 4 488 h number of mountable units Check the number of units and on GOT Reduce units O remove unnecessary units Inactive channel No has been set in the project data Inactive channel has been 1 Check whether any unnecessary channel No has been set 489 selected at in the project data O ii z Communication Settings 2
106. automatically when a file is installed downloaded or uploaded Z gt Zz 3 The folder names and file names can be set at System Settings in System Environment of GT Designer2 T n a L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 1 GOT Controller Type Setting Ze 4 A serial number is automatically added to file names z O wg Be TE a SE woz Zur lt SEG 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 7 13 1 5 Display file 13 2 OS Information 13 2 1 Function of OS information Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS communication driver and optional function OS by which each drive A Standard CF card C Built in flash memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible Function Description Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 13 9 13 10 install All OS files written in the A drive Standard CF card can be installed in the C drive 43 44 nsta Built in flash memory All OS files in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Upload 13 12 Standard CF card Displays the property file name data size type version and creation date of the Property display 13 13 file Data check Data check of files is possible 13 14 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information Main menu LCF 9 3
107. button etc 5 lt gt 13 4 4 E Copy operation x After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation T ath name isplays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed a a 4 Path Displays th th f drive fold hich i tly displayed TA 30 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name gt 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by 5 drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 5 u 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function m Number of fold d O 9 ne eee ee Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders Se ee Zz Point P Display of creation date and time a P ef The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated 9 while displaying the alarm information display screen ZS Ww If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper a5 hierarchy etc and display the screen again the updated contents are displayed Zz Ee O Remark Folders and files displayed Bs Qs For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 250 zz gt 13 1 5 Display file Zur I u i 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 27 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation The display operation of a
108. canceled OK Cancel Zz wk Og Delete is completed When the deletion completes the dialog oe box shown left is displayed ZS Lu If touch OK button the dialog is closed a6 Zz O wg SF lt Zur SEY 13 3 Project Information 1 3 17 13 3 4 Operation of project information Copy operation The file in the A drive is copied to another directory of the A drive Copy to from C drive is disabled Size Da mn K ame te Time A Built in CF card FA PROJECT 1 3K 03 15 05 12 29 C Flash Memory a ISKB 62250KB g Please select a destination Exec Cancel Copy file name PROJECT 1 Copy destination A PROJECT2 Copy now D Install CF card in the PC in which create a folder for the copy destination Set the same character with System Setting of System Environment of GT Designer2 for the folder name lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 1 GOT Controller Type Setting Install the CF card mentioned above to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card C7 8 1 CF Card Open Project Information screen to select the file to copy If touch Copy button the message Please select a destination is displayed in the left bottom of the screen If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the fol
109. confirmation of the project data downloading location 13 6 13 1 5 gt Display Tle cs sites ae tes hoe en eyes Bade dia inde ay ba eas Gale AY Geek 13 7 13 2 OS Information 13 8 13 2 1 Function of OS information 0 000 cece 13 8 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information 0 0020 eee 13 8 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 2220 e eee ees 13 9 13 2 4 Operation of OS information 0 00 0000 cee 13 10 13 3 Project Information 13 15 13 3 1 Functions of the project information 000 60 ee eee 13 15 13 3 2 Display operation of project information 00000 2c eee eee 13 15 13 3 3 Display example of project information 000 002 eee 13 16 13 3 4 Operation of project information 0 000 13 17 13 4 Alarm Information 13 26 13 4 1 Function of alarm information s an aaa aeaaeae 13 26 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information nasasa aaa aeaaee 13 26 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information 000000 cece eee 13 27 13 4 4 Alarm information operation n a aasan aeee 13 28 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 34 13 5 1 The function of hardcopy information saasaa aaaea 13 34 13 5 2 The display operation of hardcopy information 000000 eee eaee 13 34 13 5 3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information 2 200 cee eee eee 13
110. connector cover 4 Install the communication unit in the expansion unit interface of the GOT rear face When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touc the board in the GOT when install the communication unit After the installation tighten the mounting screws 4 places in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 8 28 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 2 Installing procedure O Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 2 places ZI W gt O Z O Ke 20 5E O nO Point P Removing the MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link communication unit 2 a GT15 J61BT13 Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws O lt above fs When installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed refer to the following zZ L377 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers a cto When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed in order to avoid ae receiving electrostatic stick accessory labels to cover the top of mounting screws 4 places o Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the seal stuck as it is O Wu p LLO Siek w gt O Zz fe S z 2 Terminal block socket installation For GT15 J61BT13 only 2 Insert the terminal block socket in CC Link communication unit 8
111. currently displayed z 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 5 O gt 6 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed u a 7 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive o 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 9 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders x D I O N m Point 7 About the displayed file mi The files other than that for operation log are not displayed on the operation log S information screen a Remark Folders and files displayed 7 2 BX Rd z e K O Refer to the following for the details of folders and files displayed 9 D z gt zs 13 1 5 Display file 5 Sa z O wg Q9 TE a 250 moz Zur lt SEG 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 89 13 11 3 Example of operation log information display 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Display operation of operation log information Data Control Operation Log Information A PROJECT 1 OPELOG indName Size Date Time IRJ OPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 OPELOG_20060309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 1 7K 03 09 06 10 38 If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed acd 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of
112. data collection f x N 1 Set a longer cycle for trigger occurrence to each object Review conditions 2 Make the settings so that 257 or more display triggers of objects to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set do not occur simultaneously 320 Specified object does not The part file does not exist exist or out of range Create the part file and download to GOT x a The monitored device No is out of the permissible area of the Dedicated device is out of targeted PLC CPU 322 range Confirm device P aa x Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the range 3 monitored PLC CPU and parameter settings Available memory of the memory card is insufficient Confirm Insufficient memory media the available memory of the memory card 330 capacity Confirm M card The available memory can be confirmed by system x capacity information screen which is described in GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual The memory card is not installed or in the drive access switch 331 Memory card not installed is OFF in drive or M CARD switched OFF 1 Install the memory card in the specified drive x 2 Turn ON the access switch 332 Memory media is not Memory card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly formatted Format the memory card x Unable to overwrite Memory card is write protected 333 Memory card is write f x Cancel the write protection of memory card protecte
113. display of alarm file Advanced Recipe information G1P CSV conversion Convert from G1 of the advanced recipe file to CSV G1P TXT conversion Convert from G1 of the advanced recipe file to TXT Deleting advanced recipe file or folder Copying advanced recipe file Moving advanced recipe file or folder Changing advanced recipe folder name Creating a new advanced recipe folder or file Advanced Recipe Record List Loading record data Saving record data Matching record data Deleting device data Logging information G1L CSV conversion Convert from G1L of logging file to CSV G1L TXT conversion Convert from G1L of logging file to TXT Deleting logging file or folder Copying logging file Moving logging file or folder Changing logging folder name Creating a new logging folder Operation log information G10 CSV conversion Conversion from G10 of operation log file to CSV G10 TXT conversion Conversion from G10 of operation log file to TXT Deletion of an operation log file or folder Copying of an operation log file Moving of an operation log file Changing of an operation log file name Creating of a new operation log folder Displaying and searching of the list of operation logs Hard copy information Deleting hard copy file Copying hard copy file Memory card format Formatting memory card Mem
114. from G1A of the alarm file Oa to TXT O x x x See ae x52 istorica grapi Displaying historical graph of alarm file Zor display p aying grap O x x x ann Tally graph display Tally graph display of alarm file O x x x a Zz G1P CSV conversion Convert from G1P of the a advanced recipe file to CSV O x x x Z 6 G1P TXT conversion Convert from G1P of the O advanced recipe file to TXT O x x x Z 2 SZ Deleting advanced recipe file or folder Advanced Recipe 3 O x O x information Copying advanced recipe file O x O x in lt Moving advanced recipe file or folder O x x x De 20 Changing advanced recipe folder name O x x x Soz road Zz Creating a new advanced recipe folder or file O x x x uga Loading record data O x x x Advanced Recipe Saving record data O x x X A x LW Record List Matching record data x x x z FA W Deleting device data O x x x g G1L CSV conversion Convert from G1L of the logging file to CSV O x x O G1L TXT conversion Convert from G1L of the logging file to TXT O x x O Deleting logging file or folder O x x x x Logging information A Copying logging file O x x x Moving logging file O x x x Changing logging file name O x x x Creating a new logging folder or file O x x x Continued to next page Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 16 Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Sof
115. i x After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation T 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed f a 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name misi 6 Date and time Displays the creation date and time of each file a F Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by O 7 Th fd a o Reena drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 5 u 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function m e Number of fol d Q 9 AA Protfalers an Displays the total number of the files and folders displayed g S Point P Display of the creation date and time 55 The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated gy while displaying the hardcopy information an To display the updated creation date and time close the screen currently displayed Sa by moving to the upper hierarchy folder etc and display the screen again Zz R O f 2 Remark Displayed folders and files rate Qi 7 s pnm For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 259 eZ C 13 1 5 Display file ZuE SEG 13 5 Hard Copy Information 1 3 35 13 5 3 Display exmaple of hardcopy information 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information Display operation of hardcopy information 13 36 indiane Size Date Time A Built in CF card DIR PROJECTI 03 08
116. items you want to change in the video mi ne ae eE display Settings when closing Video 9 Display Preview with the X button the display returns to Video RGB Setting Zz O COS Be j j OD Point f Precautions for setting oY _ __ Zs Incorrect settings may disrupt or stop the video image i a If this happens returning the settings to their default values restores normal display This phenomenon depends on the video camera or other device connected Use setting values that provide proper display wg t Zur SEY 11 10 Video Display Settings 1 1 37 11 10 3 Operating the video display settings 11 11 RGB Display Settings 11 11 1 Functions of the RGB display settings V S V S The RGB clock phase and screen position can be set Item RGB Display Settings Description The RGB clock phase and screen position horizontal direction and vertical direction can be set Setting range ClockPhase 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Display position Horizontal 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Vertical 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Adjust when a noise is displayed along the horizontal direction or characters are blotted or the contours are unclear 11 11 2 Displaying the RGB display settings Main Menu 9 3 Utility Display Touch GOT setup Communication Settings gt 10 1 Communication Setting Touch Vi
117. left appears without starting the conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the file Cancel button cancels the conversion If touch The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed If touch closed OK button the dialog is Delete operation Z Folder and file to be used on operation log are deleted Q ra a aa MSS RARE Touch and select the file folder to delete e pane Size Date Time A G10 JOPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 lh G10 JOPELOG_20060309_0001 06 09 23 S CSV OPELOG_20060309_0001 33 G10 2 6 33 Zz O an 220 ES Szo T ha E155 72KB 0KB 4F ile GIO CSv Coy Hove iiri l 610 gt 7XT Del Renane List a Za Iy r gt EO If touch Del button the dialog mentioned aie Target file left is displayed oak OPELOG_200603 10_0002 G10 i hg f non Are you sure do you want to delete If touch OK button the file folder is deleted While executing Processing o z Z gt message appears on the screen Feo WEA If touch Cancel button the deletion is A a5 canceled Sak JZE Oxun a When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Process completed FILE DISPLAY AND m gt Q O a O W ae O
118. m WwW 03 10 12 08 49 Switch applications Hioni tor E to select it The color of the row is 03 10 12 08 49 Screen switching Base BASE_1 A uw 03 10 12 08 55 B 1 Numerical Input 100 03 10 12 08 58 B 1 Nunerical Input 80 inverted white gt black 03 10 12 09 02 B 1 Numerical Input 900 03 10 12 09 02 B 1 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_2 03 10 12 09 08 Screen switching Base BASE_2 03 10 12 09 03 B 2 Touch switch Screen svi tehing BASE 10 x 03 10 12 09 03 Screen switching Base Y BASE_10 O 03 10 12 09 04 Switch appl ications Utility D 03 10 12 09 09 Switch appl ications Monitor T 03 10 12 09 09 Screen switching Base BASE_10 O 03 10 12 09 11 B 10 Touch switch Screen switching BASE_1 iL 03 10 12 09 11 Screen switching Base BASE_1 i 03 10 12 09 21 B 1 Numerical Input 5000 im 03 10 12 10 00 Switch languages 32767 N 03 10 12 10 10 B 1 Numerical Input 32768 1 03 10 12 10 13 Switch appl ications utility kl fe 03 10 12 10 14 Switch appl ications utility oO Search Zz ean Touching the selected row again 2 poet ion TT 7 g g ve 5 ouch switch Screen switching 5 O Screen No BASE_2 displays the detailed information for the ot Operation 2 gt Setting screen operation log z4 fa i Wi Operator tLevel0 ID 0 gt lt Touch the xxxx button to close the a User ID oa Action No 1 i Data Type dialog Device Change To BASE_10 z Chng From fo wt OO Zi E Zz o9 Ezz ZWF 2
119. manual ies GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Communication setting Detail setting Q BUS D Stage No Zz fe i O Zz O 8 3 LO LZ ite Wu LU Zn Slot No DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Default OK CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 1 0 14 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 1 MELSEC FX Communication setting Detail setting MELSEC FX Transmission Speed 38400 Keyword Regist Delete Clear Protect Default OK Key word registration deletion and protection delete Registration Register key words Touching the key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword Input a keyword and touch the Enter key and the registration completes Up to 8 characters can be set for keyword with using A to F and 0 to 9 x Please input keyword E stration conclition ond M All Protect A K ia Enter Setting PLC connected When registering keyword and 2nd keyword When registering keyword only FX CPU compatible with Registration condition 1 can be selected 2nd keywo
120. occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DANGER Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED flickers green orange and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT w
121. of battery status O O x Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 14 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Applicable X Not applicable Not required Program data control GT Soft Jeni Item Functions overview GT15 GOT GT11 ces Setting 1000 Installing OS O x O x Uploading OS O x O x OS information Property display of OS Kind version and date O x O x Data check of system file OS O x O x Downloading project file x O x Uploading project file O x O x Project file deleting O x O X Project Information j j Copying project file A drive A drive O x O x Property display of project file Date version and screen O x O x title Data check of project file O x o x App 15 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function Continued to next page Applicable X Not applicable Not required Program data control GT Soft ee He Item Functions overview GT15 GOT GT11 E Ag Setting Wess 1000 FEE S29 Deleting alarm log file O x x x Sru 22E Copying alarm log file O x x x Alarm information G1A CSV conversion Convert from G1A of the alarm file to CSV O x x x O 7 Za G1A TXT conversion Convert
122. ogu When mounting an extension unit on the upper stage of MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 aSa GT15 J71BR13 or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5 C against the maximum values described in general specifications 2 When using the MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z or CC Link communication unit GT15 75J61BT13 Z refer to the manual of the communication unit you use Differs with the specification of GOT ie 3 Do not use or store the GOT under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure to a observe this instruction may cause a malfunction o 4 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the z public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 5 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in the environment where the equipment is used O In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to Z condensation 6 The wet bulb temperature is 39 C or less for STN LCDs z O oO fe 3 1 General Specifications 3 1 3 2 Performance Specificatio
123. operation log information screen the file other than that for operation log is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer etc 1 3 102 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 5 Precautions Precautions for operation Z 1 Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Z Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the lt H processing continues to be executed a Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the z folder is created Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF gt card access switch has been turned OFF s ow Zlo ea a ZZ LON Tu atei N Aa Srp Soz D n FILE DISPLAY AND m gt Q ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 1 13 11 5 Precautions 3 Ve 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK The GOT can display the screen for debugging or self checking The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking function Item Description Reference page System monitor Ladder monitor A list editor List editor for MELSEC A Debug intellig
124. or 1 folders The A Standard CF Card is not displayed when CF card is not installed 2 Boot drive empty area size Indicates the empty area size of boot drive specified by the user 1 3 78 13 9 Memory Information 13 9 3 Memory information display example 13 10 Special Data Information z O i 5 13 10 1 Special data information function Z i gt Special data used in the intelligent unit monitor function or others can be copied deleted downloaded or uploaded For details of special data refer to the following manual EF GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual z O 8 1 Data Types and Sizes Transferred to the GOT Tu 50 Function Description Reference page S32 Pie Information display of files A Sen Displays the name data size creation date and time of file or folder 13 81 0Zn and folders Delete Deletes a file or holder 13 82 Property Displays the property of special data 13 83 Data check Copies a file 13 84 2 LON Downloads the special data written in the A drive Standard CF Card to the C gt EO Download j ee 13 85 I2 drive Built in flash memory TuE ao 13 10 2 Special data information display operation n Main menu Program Data control Z4 a C7 9 3 Utility Display meZ ista xng ln O a Sak a otb 4 Touch Program Data A 1 3 control E Touch Special data z information gt 5 oO
125. or to vibrations and impact Failure to do so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration Do not drop chips or wire scraps near the ventilation window of the GOT when processing screw holes or wiring Failure to do so can cause a fire failure or malfunction Tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the unit Make sure to install the connection cable to the connector specified during the power OFF Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to the poor contact 6 1 Mount the GOT onto the control panel while considering the control panel inside dimensions Point P Applicable cable Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as well for installation 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions Make holes in the panel according to the dimensions list below Also ensure 10mm spaces in upper and lower parts of the panel for mounting fixtures B mm inch 282 5 11 12 2 0 08 0 0 228 8 98 2 0 08 0 0 200 7 87 2 0 08 0 0 176 6 93 2 0 08 0 0 121 5 A Panel thickness 2 to 4 m
126. order to ensure the low impedance under high frequency SPECIFICATIONS e The diameter of cable holes in the control panel must be 10cm 3 94in In order to reduce the chance of radio waves leaking out ensure that the space between the control panel and its door is small as possible Attach some EMI gaskets to fill up the space and suppress the leakage of radio waves Out test have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37dB max and 30dB mean measured by 3m method with 30 to 300MHz PART NAME AND SETTINGS 2 Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below a Provide a grounding point near the GOT Short circuit the LG and FG terminals of the GOT LG line ground FG frame ground and ground them with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 18in or shorter The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from ol zI ja Zz T O W w wz LO a o S0 acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency gt O b The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted
127. protective sheet Magnified figure Magnified figure lt For GT1595 X Fix the GOT with 8 mounting fixtures For other than GT1595 X Fix the GOT with 4 mounting fixtures A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment Remove the film when the installation is compelted 6 5 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING m lt DANGER z gt O Before starting wiring always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases Not doing so may cause an electric shock product damage or malfunction 6 A CAUTION 5 z0 Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section by BZ applying Class D Grounding Class 3 Grounding Method or higher which is used exclusively for the ie GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction i Zz O Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal z arrangement of the product 7 Not doing so can cause a fire or failure a Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction E Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Z W n Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so So can cause a fire failure or malfunction an This section describes wiring to the GOT pow
128. screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual Z CF GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Tu 220 Dr 14 9 2 Displaying the system alarm display SvE 828 Main menu Debug amp self check gt 9 3 Utility Display Q ZZ 28 See aida Touch System alarm aon Touch Debug amp self display check N gt S4 FEA HUWA HEA xiL OBE l OSs System alarm display OL Debug self check System alarm display GOT error ChNo 2 Reset a 402 Communication timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules Z CPU error ChNo 1 When touching Reset the z 1600Battery voltage low or equipment fault o nea display on the 5 Network error W No Error r 4 1S W a O 5 Ww N k a 0 Zz O 58 Ze 25 Bio oA Z O we ae t gt 25 oS Zur SEY 14 9 System Alarm Display 1 4 26 14 9 1 System alarm display function 14 9 3 Operating the system alarm display System Alarm display resetting Debug self check System alarm display x PEON ee Eliminate each cause of the system alarm 402 Communication timeout Confirm communication pathway or ed les being occu rred onea E Error causes can be identified by the error Network error code error message and channel No ai displayed on the System alarm display screen Ics 20 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM Touch the LReset button to reset system alarms GOT error ChNo 2 REx 402 Communication t
129. section Delete i lt this section COPY innan C gt this section MOVE in L this section Rename lt gt this section A Create Folder gt this section If touch x button the screen is closed 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Logging information operation 13 68 Operation of G1L CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion Z Logging file G1L file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on 9 personal computer iL rogram Data Control Operation Log Information x i 5 r BAPROJECT INOPELOG a 1 Touch and select the G1L file which is to Kinane Size Date Time i G10 OPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 lA be converted to CSV file or Unidcode eo OPELOG 10309_0001 3K 03 09 06 09 23 610 iE text file 2 O f z Touch the following button in oy A lt O accordance with destination file type sre awe E e CSV file G1L CSV button O20 e Unicode text file G1L gt TXT button T F L 15572KB 0KB 4Fi lel BIO CSy Coy Move l Create o 610 TXT Del Rename List l aor gt EO rogram Data Control Informatio saz elpt briye MERLET lt i Select the target folder puk DIR O GIL L6 00001 1K 06 05 01 13 32 il Selecting a folder is not needed for anu ee Por fF oa l BIL 0600000 1_0002 513K 06 05 01 13 12 outputting directly below the driv
130. series PLC is connected 5x9 Setting of opening screen time Stir Setting of screen saving time SzH Setting of screen saving back light ON OFF Switching message language Japanese English Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Korean German Battery alarm display ON OFF setting A 2a See Human sensor Effective Invalid setting Gaz eee G r158 Grises KEE 12 Display O00 Sensor detect level setting cit m GT1595 Graas GT1585 N gt Z gt 4 Displaying sensor detect time Fug as baie 211585 WEA ME a5 OSs Sensor off delay setting OLn 2 Grga Srana GTS 2 Brightness contrast Liquid crystal intensity a O Setting of buzzer volume a a l Window move buzzer Operation a x Key sensitivity setting a Key reaction speed setting 2 z Security setting 2 Security level change security password input of each object B 5 Utility call key Setting of the menu call key e Touch panel adjustment Touch panel coordinates adjustment x D pe E aa O Q QnA ladder monitor 3 Setting of data storage location for the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitoring function A n Transparent mode settings Channel No setting for the communication target device in using the FA transparent 2 function 2 Video RGB Setting Video Unit Settings Setting of the video input signal and resolution Video Display Settings Setting of the captive area size for each video channel the color tone contrast z brightness and color intensity 2 7 7 TT gt i oO RGB Display Settings
131. specifyng of background color 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O e Japanese 12dot Japanese 16dot Gothic 2 04E Standard monitor OS 01 01 O O O e Japanese 16dot Mincho Japanese supporting Europe 12dot Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Gothic Standard font Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Mincho Chi Simplified 12dot 2 97D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Chinese Simplifie o i Boot OS G O O O Chinese Simplified 16dot Mincho Chinese Simplified supporting Europe 12dot Chinese Simplified supporting Europe 16dot Mincho Standard monitor OS 02 02 Option OS KANJI Region Supporting Chinese Traditional 2 18U Standard font Chinese O O x Traditional 02 02 System alarm information printer status GOT internal devi information and GT SoftGOT1000 end 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Oo O Oo evice device are added Supporting vertical installation type GOT Type i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x x O display Station No Designation of the channel No for which oe cas i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo x x Switching Function station No is switched is possible Language paa 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x ne Language switching device can be used Switching Device 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 o o o Password can be set for the connection of Password Setting 2 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo x O motion controller and ser
132. system alarm the message that notifies that the maintenance time is near or it is already maintenance time is displayed For the display of the system alarm refer to the following 20 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM For the display of the system alarm refer to the following K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting 16 2 16 1 2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting Zz O S Main menu Maintenance time notification settings 2 gt 9 3 Utility Display iL gt Maintenance report setting z Maintenance report time setting z a 2 Comunication setting GA oot setup Back light 0 x 1000 H KEJ Tire setting amp disolay C Prosran data control Display 0 x 1000 H E bebe amp sett check L clean laintenance report times setting eed ac Dine Touch key O x 10000 Times Z Flash memory O x 1000 Times F ow Touch Maintenance Zlo timing setting SLZ SET LU 02H Q 2a sty SSE mi Ont aon For the addition times as power on addition time refer to the following N ius O z lt 17 1 Addition times reset Z4 Fug HES xiL oak Zz OZh o Z lt z Si pE o o gt wo 20 EO x W ae 8 u Lu Yn O A O wk On 2 n Sz lt x Mi oO amp oa ez z O a O m E e 2 Ww 2 uw 6 Zz lt
133. the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment 6 When using multiple extension units and a bar code reader the total current of the extension units and bar code reader must not be greater than the total current that the GOT can supply For current values of extension units and bar code reader and the total current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 3 10 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN 3 2 5 GT1555 Q GT1550 Q ian Specifications GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD TFT color liquid crystal i oe STN monochrome liquid Type LCD of high intensity and STN color liquid crystal i wide angle view ci Screen size 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240dots Display size 115 4 53 W x 86 3 39 H mm inch 16 dot standard font 20 characters x 15 lines Display character Display 12 dot standard font 26 characters x 20 lines section Display color 65536color 2 4096color mene me 16 level Left Right 70 degrees Left Right 55 degrees Left Right 45 degrees Display angle Top 70 degrees Top 65 degrees Top 20 degrees Bottom 50 degrees Bottom 70 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Intensity of LCD only 400 cd m 380 cd m 220 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level a
134. the display section as shown below When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C or less the mounting angle should be in the range 60 to 105 degrees OVERVIEW GOT CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Display section Control panel etc e The GOT will be deteriorated earlier if it is used at the mounting angle other than the above Therefore the temperature inside the control panel should be within 40 C SPECIFICATIONS When mounting an extension unit on the upper stage of MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 the operating ambient temperature must be reduced 5 C against the maximum values described in general specifications 6 5 Installation Procedure PART NAME AND SETTINGS The GOT mounting procedure is as follows For the panel cutting dimensions of each GOT refer to the following gt Section 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions Insert the GOT into the panel opening from the front side EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE GOT ez ka 6 z pi z n z D pard opening WIRING OPTION 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 4 Place the mounting fixtures included with GOT on the mounting fixture attaching part of the GOT and fix them by tightening the mounting screws in the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m Failure to do so may distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the
135. to CSV 4 If touch the Excute button the dialog z Source file ARP00001 G1P shown left is displayed u Change to ARPOOOO1 CSV zs Touch the OK button While executing Processing Change file format message appears on the screen ws D T O u N e O 0 Example Dialog if the G1P gt CSV button is touched O wk Continued to next page 2 D pag On Zz 25 go a2 oa z O wg Be TE lt SE ioe Zur lt SEQ 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 47 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation File conversion from GIP to CSV Source file ARPOOOO1 GIP Change to ARPOOOO1 CSV Do you want to Overwrite the fi le Process completed When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the file Cancel button cancels the conversion If touch Q The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed If touch closed OK button the dialog is 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 48 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Delete operation z Folder and file to be used on advanced recipe are deleted Q m Program Data Control Information X x elect UKIN
136. turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regurated units Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation REVISIONS Print Date Oct 2004 Manual Number SH NA 080528ENG A The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision First edition Mar 2005 SH NA 080528ENG B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 09K Partial corrections Chapter 6 Section 7 3 2 8 2 to 8 6 8 2 to 8 4 8 4 3 Section 9 1 to 9 3 gt 9 1 to 9 2 Section 10 1 to 10 6 10 1 to 10 5 Section 12 1 to 12 6 12 1 to 12 5 Section 13 1 13 2 to 13 6 13 3 to 13 7 Section 14 1 to 14 2 14 1 Section 15 1 to 15 2 15 1 Section 16 1 to 16 2 16 1 Chapter 18 Section 18 6 18 3 18 3 to 18 5 18 4 to 18 6 Section 19 1 19 2
137. uses file E lt O INT Recipe device upload Loading recipe is about to be executed to the record of which aeS 590 error Recipe device value recipe device value is not set x 20 does not exist Specify the record of which recipe device value is set Advanced Recipe error The advanced recipe setting is not correct l 9 591 Confirm the advanced recipe setting of the project data and x lt Check recipe data P w download it to the GOT again Qs go Logging file error a5 595 Logging file error When collecting data again delete logging files and x Z a management files SZ Logging setting does not The logging setting specified in the historical trend graph setting does not exist 596 exist or setting value eo cas F x at ae Review the historical trend graph setting and specify a logging 9 i setting that exists De s5 The version of OS installed in the GOT is not compatible with wes 600 Unsupported version of the printer unit coe printer unit Install the extended function OS Printer with the latest GT x uaa Designer2 The printer unit is installed incorrectly The built in flash memory of the printer unit is broken or the guaranteed life has a been elapsed a 601 Printer unit error Check that the printer unit is installed correctly x a When the printer unit has been installed correctly the built in a flash memory is broken or the guaranteed life has been lt elapsed Replace the printer unit with new one 602 Video RG
138. version indicated below it will be 256 colors when the multi color display board is not installed For how to confirm the function version refer to the following Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards Model Function version GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment When using multiple extension units and a bar code reader the total current of the extension units and bar code reader must not be greater than the total current that the GOT can supply For current values of extension units and bar code reader and the total current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual KE GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN ro Specifications GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD TFT color liquid crystal LCD of high A Type TFT color liquid crystal intensit
139. version of BootOS standard monitor OS 18 8 18 5 CoreOS 18 11 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS 6 teens 18 11 18 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 0 0 ee 18 14 19 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 19 1 to 19 16 19 1 Daily Inspection 19 2 19 2 Periodic Inspection 19 2 19 3 Cleaning Method 19 3 19 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 19 4 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement 19 5 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 19 6 1 Applicable backlight 0 00200 eee 19 6 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 2 20 ccc eee eee 19 6 20 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 20 1 to 20 17 20 1 Error Contents Display 20 1 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 3 20 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 14 20 3 1 Locating error positionS 0 0 ea n e e E eae 20 14 20 3 2 Further locating error positions 0 0 0 eee 20 15 20 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting 200 20 e eee ee eee 20 16 20 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring 20 17 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 1 to App 30 App 1 A 16 Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed standards App 12 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 13 Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions App 19 Appendix 4 1 Relevant models 00000 c eects App 19 Appendix 4 2 Transportation guidelines
140. with GOT User s manual of the QCPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU CPU and QnACPU connected Value of SD0 for QCPU QnACPU GS263 with GOT Servo User s manual of the servo 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier amplifier amplifier connected to GOT 1 For details of GOT special registers GS262 to 264 refer to the following manual BE GT Designer2 Version o Screen Design Manual 2 9 1 GOT internal devices 2 The assigned error code for FXCPU is 100 to 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the error code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description 3 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code Hexadecimal displayed on the servo amplifier to the decimal number and adding 20000 to it When referring to the manual of servo amplifier by the error code displayed as a GOT system alarm subtract 20000 from the GOT error code and change its lower three digits to the hexadecimal number Example When GOT system alarm is 20144 the error code of servo amplifier becomes 90H 4 Channel No will not be stored depending on the error code For channel No storage availability for each error code refer to the following L gt 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 1 Error Contents Display 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm a Bas Wels The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below 20
141. zZ If touch button closes the dialog 2 On On Bio oA Z O wg Zit Zur SEY 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 31 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Graph operation Displays the selected extended alarm log file in a graph When the extended alarm watch advanced user alarm advanced system alarm is set in history mode the selected extended alarm log file is displayed in historical graph C gt gt 1 Historical graph display When set in accumulation mode displayed it in tally graph gt gt 2 Tally graph display Refer to the following for details related to setting of the extended alarm watch C gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM ee aT Touch and select the G1A file to display in indiName ize a Ime DIR ey GIA Ooooh A a graph G14 ALARMS 1K 06 17 04 16 11 C Flash memory G14 JALARM4 1K 06 17 04 16 11 y If touch Graph button displays the historical graph or tally graph according to the setting of the extended alarm watch T 440KB 623 15KB 4F ile 1A csvp1A gt TXT Del Copy Graph Program data control Alarm information Histrical graph Occur ACK O Repair a ow When move a graph operate as follows ine A stop oun 6 aterial shortage in Tan L 0 Major error in Conveyang ou 0 If touch A Yy button moves the Equipment B failire no graph up down line by line
142. 0 0 79 or more E 100 39 4 or more 20 0 79 or more Unit mm inch 1 For GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL or GT15 75ABUS2L only 2 For GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS or GT15 ABUS2 only 3 This value differs depending on the cable used Please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The value indicated in the table is a reference value 4 This value is for use of the coaxial cable 3C 2V JIS C 3501 C MODEL GT15V 75V4R1 Video RGB Input Unit MODEL GT15V 75V4 Video Input Unit MODEL GT15V 75R1 RGB Input Unit User s Manual Section 2 4 1 Specifications of the cables coaxial cables used when displaying video images 5 This value differs depending on the cable used If the bending radius of the cable used is greater than the value specified above apply the value of the cable used The values enclosed in parenthesis apply to the case where no other equipment generating radiated noise such as a contactor or heat is installed However keep the ambient temperature of the GOT to 55 C or lower even in such a case The required lead in allowance for cables may be larger than the size of A above depending on the unit or cable used For the lead in allowance for cables at the bottom of the GOT refer to the following gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions 6 23 6 3 Mounting Position 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar set
143. 0 and various functions d GT Simulator2 Version O Operating Manual Describes how to simulate the created project data with the GT Simulator2 e GT Converter2 Version O Operating Manual Describes how to use the GT Converter2 1 1 Features 1 1 Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices e Using of TFT color liquid crystal display high intensity wide angle view and high definition type provides clear full color display and displays small characters clearly Displays digital images of BMP and other formats in 65536 colors e Provides multi language display function based on Unicode2 1 True Type font and high speed drawing of beautiful text e High speed monitoring through high speed communication at maximum of 115 2kbps e High speed display and high speed touch switch response OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works e 9MB user memory is included as standard Memory capacity can be expanded up to 57MB by increasing the option memory e CF card interface is included as standard e Font installation is available to increase the system fonts Combined use of 4 types of alarms system alarm user alarm alarm history alarm popup display realizes more efficient alarm notification e Maintenance timing report function is available that measures the backlight energization time and notifies of m
144. 00 Series Connection Manual Lox e No missettings of parameter 10 2 Communication Detail Settings If touch button in the dialog After confirming the result returns to I O check 1 4 17 14 7 I O Check 14 7 3 I O Check Operation Self loopback Zz If touch Self the hardware check of RS 232 interface is carried out 5 Zz For preparation for the self loopback communication check insert the connector for self loopback check 2 Customer purchased shown in the diagram right in the oye ee J gt RS 232 interface eee For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins and 4 87 6 ue and 6 pins respectively Display unit rear face 2 Sui Seo RS 232 interface Sen 020 Q Zz 8g See OWT 2 After selecting Self the transferred data and received data aon are verified through the self loopback connector If data can Rosaa comnunication check not be received during data transmission the dialog shown Error n s s gi The following cause gt right is displayed which notifies the self loopback connector 2 g p ay p Connect ion error H W error ram failure self loopback connector communication error or RS parameter setting error ma 232 interface hardware failure Restart lt 5 oak otin Q Z lt z During check the dialog shown right is displayed z RS232 communication check a Executing now Ww x O W pa O Wwe l W op E O 0
145. 00R4 8P Cable length 10m GT01 C200R4 8P Cable length 20m GT01 C300R4 8P GT01 C30R4 25P Cable length 30m Cable length 3m GT01 C100R4 25P Cable length 10m GT01 C200R4 25P Cable length 20m GT01 C300R4 25P Cable length 30m Description For connecting FXCPU MINI DIN 8 pins connector and GOT For connecting FXKCPU communication function extension board MINI DIN 8 pins connector and GOT For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller CPU A series FX FX1 FX2 FX2c and GOT For connecting FA CNV O CBL and GOT For connecting computer link module serial communication module and GOT Computer link connection cable GT09 C30R4 6C GT09 C100R4 6C Cable length 3 m Cable length 100 m GT09 C200R4 6C Cable length 200 m GT09 C300R4 6C Cable length 300 m For connecting computer link module serial communication module and GOT 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 9 OVERVIEW zZ O lt x ao D Oo m zZ Q Oo SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION RS 232 cable 2 10 Product name QCPU direct connection cable Model name GT01 C30R2 6P Cable length 3m Description For connecting QCPU and GOT FX communication function extension board connection cable FX communication function adapter connection cable data transfer cable
146. 03 06 13 33 155 72KB OKB 61008 Copy 610 gt TXT XJ Path Name A PROJECT 1 OPELOGS Folder Name SEE LIXICIVIBININ Enter Create new folder Process completed 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation Q Touch the Create Folder button The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts creating folder When creating folder is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog List displa z 8 p ay Displays operation logs in an operation log file in a list 9 T E PRO ECT NOPELOGN Touch and select a file for displaying the 3 Name Size Date Time 2 IR 2 list O JOPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 i any OPELOG_20060309_0001 3K_03 09 06_09 23 G10 JOPELOG_20060310_0002 4K 03 10 06 13 33 Zz e xt Su Zz ane EE ol O5 u 02H m ki P4KB 15600KB 4Fild eiscsv Copy ove ise 610 TXT Del Rename List amp Q 28 N gt
147. 04 04 51 s DIR G1SPC 02 27 04 06 29 DIR CIRDAT 02 27 04 21 09 A C Flash Memory F 5058KB OF ile Del Copy 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information in the touched folder is displayed If touch a name of the folder of the information in the folder of one higher hierarchy is displayed If touch A button of the scrollbar scrolls up down line by line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected Refer to the following for the operation of delete and copy Delete n LC this section COPY n LCF this section If touch x button closes the screen Delete operation Deletes the selected file S R gt Touch and select the file to delete B 5 pelete fite nme 2 If touch Del button the screen mentioned SNAPOOO1 BMP left is displayed Delete nout If touch OK button deletes the file 6 If touch Cancel button cancel the Sui ZQo deletion siz Sui Szo OK Cancel Q tant 26 Delete is completed When me eetan compieted the zee completion dialog is displayed ae If touch OK button the dialog is closed atel N A a5 oak Doth FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie
148. 0m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable GT09 C30R20302 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module RS 232 GT09 C30R20301 9P Cable length 3m cable Connection cables for Allen Bradley PLCs Sold separately GT09 C30R20701 9S Cable length 3m Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately GT09 C30R20801 9S Cable length 3m RS 422 conversion unit Sold separately Product Peat Description name For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley PLC Product Description name For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter Product name Model name Description RS 422 conversion GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 side connector 9 pins unit GT15 RS2T4 25P conversion unit RS 422 side connector 25 pins Bus extension connector box Sold separately Product name Model name Description Bus extension For QCPU Q Mode Motion controller CPU Q series long distance A9GT QCNB connector box 13 2m or longer bus connection Bus connector conversion box Sold separately Product name Model name Description Bus connector For QnA ACPU Motion controller CPU A series long distance bus conversion A7GT CNB connection For conversion from large type connector to small type box connector 2 14 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option CF card Sold separately Prod
149. 1 8 10 1 8 10 2 Section 10 2 1 Section 11 2 1 11 3 3 Section 13 1 5 Section 14 1 1 Section 19 2 19 4 19 5 19 6 1 19 6 2 Appendix 1 3 Additions Section 3 2 1 to 3 2 4 3 3 1 3 3 2 Section 4 1 Section 8 5 3 Section 11 6 11 8 Section 13 8 13 9 13 10 Section 18 5 Section 4 1 to 4 3 Section 4 2 to 4 4 Section 11 6 Section 11 7 Print Date Revision Manual Number Jan 2006 SH NA 080528ENG E Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 27D Partial corrections SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 Section 2 1 Section 8 1 1 8 5 to 8 11 8 6 to 8 12 Section 9 2 9 3 Section 10 1 3 Section 11 1 11 7 2 Section 13 7 4 13 10 4 Partial additions Section 2 2 Section 6 3 Section 13 1 5 13 2 4 Chapter 14 Section 19 4 Section 20 2 Appendix 1 3 5 Additions Section 8 5 Section 14 8 14 9 Jun 2006 SH NA 080528ENG F Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 32J Partial corrections Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 1 2 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 5 3 1 5 4 2 8 4 8 5 2 8 9 9 3 11 2 2 11 3 2 11 4 2 11 5 2 11 7 2 11 8 2 12 1 3 13 1 5 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 3 1 13 3 3 13 4 2 13 4 3 13 5 2 13 5 3 13 6 2 13 6 3 13 7 2 13 7 3 13 8 2 13 8 3 13 9 2 13 10 2 13 10 3 14 3 2 14 4 2 14 5 2 14 6 2 14 7 2 14 9 18 3 1 18 4 18 5 2 Partial additions Chapter 1 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 3 2 4 3 3 1 3 3 2 5 3 2 5 3 3 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 4 8 1
150. 10 gt TXT Del Rename List 25 gt E See Select me target TOARN bik OPELOG_20060308_0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 I Selecting a folder is not needed for OPEL oG 20000300 0001 K ooo 10 38 f outputting directly below the drive GPEC o6 20000310 0002 ak 06 10 06 13 35 puing y N 2 gt Fra Fug WEG Bae dzi T 3 155 72KB OKB 4File Please select destination Ecce Taai If touch the Excute button the dialog shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing File conversion from G10 to CSV Source file OPELOG_20060310_0002 G610 Change to FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao Q OPELOG_20060310_0002 CSV message appears on the screen Change file format O E Oo u LU o al O Oo 6 Example Dialog if the G1O gt TXT button is touched fi 5 Q on Z gt Zs Continued to next page i D oa z O we a SE fig Zur lt SEG 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 13 91 13 92 File conversion from G10 to CSV Source file OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 Change to OPELOG_20060310_0002 CSV Do you want to overwrite the fi le OK Cance Process completed 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog shown
151. 1000 6 4 2001 Test standard EN55011 Radiated noise Test details Electromagnetic emissions from the product are measured Standard value 30M 230MHz QP 30dBuV m 30m in measurement range 2 9 230M 1000MHz QP 37dBuUV m 30m in measurement range gt 3 EN55011 Conducted noise Electromagnetic emissions from the product to the power line is measured 150k 500kHz QP 79dB Mean 66dB 2 500k 30MHz QP 73dB Mean 60dB 2 EN61131 2 2003 EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic immunity EN61000 4 3 Radiated field AM modulation Immunity test in which static electricity is applied to the cabinet of the equipment Immunity test in which field is irradiated to the product 4kV Contact discharge 8kV Aerial discharge 80 1000MHz 10V m 1 4 2GHz 10V m 80 AM modulation 1kHz EN61000 4 4 Fast transient burst noise Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal lines Power line 2kV Digital 1 0 24V or higher 1kV Digital 1 O 24V or less gt 250V Analog I O signal lines gt 250V EN61000 4 5 Surge immunity Immunity test in which lightening surge is applied to the product AC power type Power line between line and ground 2kV Power line between lines 1kV Data communication port 1kV DC power type Power line between line and ground 0 5kV Power line between lines 1kV EN61000 4 6
152. 2 8 3 1 8 7 8 8 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 9 2 9 3 1 10 1 3 Chapter 11 Section 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 5 1 11 7 1 11 8 1 Chapter 14 Section 14 1 1 14 2 1 19 6 1 20 2 Appendix 1 3 5 Additions Section 3 2 5 4 5 5 3 4 8 6 11 9 11 11 13 11 14 8 Japanese Manual Version SH 080507 H This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS tere art sata erertu tho aNia a tered Seiad ae Ale od ina eee wie gee aes A 1 REVISIONS erg Pee a S E een ee S E AA ae hee ee A 7 INTRODUCTION aigne tete are ERTA aoe Give doh Ra Wee EEEE EEE EEA A eee baa eaves A 9 CONTENTS sip scetespeecna Gao tata ede de ale catch aa Ge states aa Paha ata ede ea a a ett Beate Sed ants elect S A 9 ABOUT MANUALS e 2526 8 carats rE aa dee Ea a E te OAE EE Doh EE OT EA A 18 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ooohhh A 19 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 0 00 te roan kn e E EE EE EERE EAEE EE A 22 PACKING
153. 2006 Ethernet connection GT15 J71E71 100 Version B or later Mar 2005 Microcomputer connection Third party PLC connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version D or later Jan 2006 Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan 2006 Temperature controller The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when it is used with the following unit Product name MELSECNET H communication unit GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE Version D or later Jan 2006 Model name GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 G15 75J61BT13 Z 5 11 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used 5 3 4 When the option unit is used The following shows EMC Directive compliance of option units O Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive Product name Model name EMC Directive n O Printer unit GT15 PRN Version B or later Feb 2006 Video input unit GT15V 75V4R1 x RGB input unit GT15V 75V4 x Video RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 x RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT x For the printer to be connected configure the system in accordance with the EMC Di
154. 232 interface of GT1595 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Mode name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent product 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GI1585 SONILLAS ANY SWVN Lavd 6 GOT rear face AAILOAYIG ASVLIOA MOI ANY OWS O NIXIM 13 12 3 4 2 Part Names and Settings of the GT1585 No Name POWER LED Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 4 4 2 Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen 4 For installing the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit or RGB 4 Video RGB interface output unit For connecting a personal computer 5 USB interface Connector type MINI B For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 6 RS 232 in
155. 3 101 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 13 11 5 Precautions Precautions for create delete 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in memory card for GT15 t characters 1 wh Extension 4 characters Drive name 1 character FS Max 78 characters Remark If folder is assigned the hierarchy Bs The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b Character strings that cannot be set The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used e COM1 to COM9 LPT1toLPT9 AUX CON e NUL e PRN e CLOCK In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used e The folder name which begins with G1 e Folder name and file name which begin with period e Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods 2 For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the
156. 3 10 12 09 09 4 5 6 bl n 03 10 12 09 11 B 10 1 03 10 12 09 11 i 03 10 12 09 21 B 1 1 S 3 La 03 10 12 10 00 03 10 12 10 10 8 1 1 0 Enter 4 ls 03 10 12 10 13 ty 03 10 12 10 14 Switch appl ications utitity T 03 10 12 10 15 _ Switch appl ications Operation Log lz Search File Name A PROJECT1 OPELOG OPELOG_20060310_0002 610 A D 2006 Date Tine Screen No Operation 103 10 103 10 103 10 103 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 03 10 12 08 Screen switching Base Numerical Input Conditions Do you want to search Switch applications Switch applications 03 10 2006 12 09 m hE File Name A D 2006 03 10 1 03 10 1 03 10 1 03 10 1 04 03 10 1 09 03 10 1 09 03 10 1 11 B 10 03 10 1 ms 03 10 1 21 B 1 03 10 1 0 03 10 1 10 B 1 03 10 1 3 03 10 1 4 03 10 1 E 03 10 1 420 o 03 10 1 43 o 03 10 12 10 44 detected d Is processing continued d Switch appl ications Screen switching Base Conditions 03 10 2006 12 09 ic hE Search 13 100 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 9 Touching Search in the list enables searching of a log using the following items Item Date Time Q Input
157. 3 Utility Display ern one ode oto Self check ae Touch A I O check Z Debug amp self check lt x eee Debug a a 3 m 1 1 O check Debug self check Self check 1 0 check Please select check channel ii CPU Self x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 7 I O Check 14 1 14 7 1 I O check function 6 14 7 3 I O Check Operation Connecting target confirmation If touch CPU button the connecting target confirmation communication check is carried out After the CPU communication starts normally the dialog mentioned right notifying that it is on checking untill the connecting target ea a confirmation communication ends normally 2 When the connecting target confirmation communication ends its result is notified by dialog all e If the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally the dialog notifying of the normal termination mentioned right is displayed If touch OK button after confirming the result returns to I O check T If the dialog mentioned right is displayed after selecting connecting target confirmation or during CPU communication check confirm the CPU a check following The following cause s Connection error H W error No misconnection with CPU parameter setting error GOT1000 Series Connection Manual No hardware error lt GOT10
158. 30 m RS 232 bl GT09 C30R21201 25P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable Connection cables for SHARP PLCs Sold separately Product nn Model name Description name GT09 C30R40601 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C200R40601 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40601 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40602 15P Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40602 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C200R40602 15P_ Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40602 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40603 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40603 6T Cable length 10m 7 For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit GT09 C200R40603 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40603 6T Cable length 30m RS 232 GT09 C30R20601 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C30R20602 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs Sold separately Product at Model name Description name GT09 C30R40501 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40501 15P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C200R40501 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40501 15P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R40502 6C Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40502 6C Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C200R40502 6C Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40502 6C Cable length 30m G
159. 35 13 5 4 The operation of hardcopy information 0020 cece eee eee 13 36 13 6 Memory Card Format 13 39 13 6 1 Function of the memory card format 0 0 0 0 aaua aaau 13 39 13 6 2 Display operation of memory card format 0 000 eee 13 39 13 6 3 Operating the memory card format 0 0 00 eae 13 40 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 42 13 7 1 Function of advanced recipe information a assas aaaeeeaa 13 42 13 7 2 Operation of advanced recipe information display n saaana eaae 13 43 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information display 000002e ee eee 13 44 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 0 000 0c eee eee 13 46 13 4 5 Precautions asce wae pou ae cares aad eh og algae Deda ate Bea Sea Ad Bee be ans 13 63 13 8 Logging Information 13 65 13 8 1 Function of logging information aaa aaaea 13 65 13 8 2 Display operation of logging information a sasaaa aaaea 13 66 13 8 3 Example of logging information display o n aaan aaae 13 67 13 8 4 Logging information operation 0 0 0 0 eee eae 13 68 13 9 Memory Information 13 77 13 9 1 Memory information functions 0 00 00 c eee 13 77 13 9 2 Memory information display operation 1 0 2 0 000 eae 13 77 13 9 3 Memory information display example 0 00 eee eee 13 78 13 10 Special Data Information 13 79 13 10 1 Special data information function
160. 56 in PLC Confirm file register name x ii register 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC Z memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name error occurred in PLC CPU drive i 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the Error in specified PLC f 357 j specified PLC CPU drive x drive Confirm PLC drive 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer 20 5 20 6 Channel Error TOR Error message Action No storage When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the 358 PLC file access failure specified PLC CPU drive file register name When you z Confirm PLC drive specify drive 0 execute the recipe function again after changing to other drives 2 Confirm whether the memory card is write protected and execute the recipe function again When the recipe function is executed specifying the file Processing from another register name other peripherals carry out the process to the 359 peripheral device file register x Execute it after Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe function again 0 divisor division error Zero division occurred by the data opera
161. 5632KB i BIL csV Copy Move pias BIL TXT Del Rename Program Data Control elect Drive lame Size Date Time R B LOGOOOO1 1K 06 05 01 15 26 i L0G00002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 a LOGOO001_0001 1K 06 05 01 15 18 T ha P20KB 15632KB 3Eile Please select destination Execute Cance Target file ARPOOO01 G1P Do you want to copy the fi le Target file ARPOOOO1 G1P Do you want to Overwrite the fi le on Cancel Continued to next page 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 50 amp Touch and select the file to copy Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Excute button the following dialog shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy Fa Process completed When the copy is complet
162. 65 49 9 1 97 75 0 2 95 Figs 081 55 3 2 18 0 24 oe 8 N 3 SI qh g m 2 2 0 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed D standards nee Uga 5a rbs QZ Rating plate The GOT hardware version function version and the standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed at the rating plate on the GOT rear face 5 Zol Eze 508 De Aa MITSUBISHI 295 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL pga MODEL GT1575 VTBA an IN 100 240VAC 50 60Hz Hadivarewersion POWER MAX 90VA _ EN SERIAL 0000470 AAt000 By _ B gt S a ge ce a E rae ee gt x Function version a 2 Z be a a a ee H Conformed standard g2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC _ _ _ MADE IN JAPAN fi G BACKLIGHT GT15 70VLTT _ Back light model The applicable back light model Z a is described g Z Packing box m lt The standards conformed by a GOT can be confirmed by the label on the packing box Bs Note that the position of the label differs depending on the model or shipment date wes MEg N LH Q A S DA The conformed standards such as CE are described g x lt W A z Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed standards App 12 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Functi
163. 7 Communication Unit 8 29 8 7 2 Installing procedure 8 30 Fasten the terminal block by tightening the terminal block fixing screws 2 places with the tightening torque of 0 20 to 0 25 N m Extended figure of part A Point P When attaching or removing a communication cable When attaching or removing a communication cable to from the terminal block socket detach the terminal block socket from the connector When extension units are installed in multiple layers the units do not have to be removed from the GOT main unit 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 2 Installing procedure 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers This section describes how to install another extension units on the extension units that has been installed on the GOT When no extension units is installed on the GOT apply the steps in this section after installing an extension units fi e Printer unit lt 37 8 5 2 Installing procedure Q Video RGB unit lt 37 8 6 2 Installing procedure Communication unit lt _3 8 7 2 Installing procedure Z E Remove the connector cover and seal from the installed extension units 5 fe fe nz O Connector cover DO Seal wn Zz O z O m O a N m zZ lt W n a0 2z a aw O sow 282 LLO Siek w gt O 6 amp After installing the unit fasten it by tightening the mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of z 0 36 to 0 48N m z Z 9 zZ ac OPTIO
164. 75ABUSL eee 73 5 2 89 36 1 42 123 4 84 GT15 RS2 9P 2 72 5 2 85 GT15 RS4 9S 2 30 1 18 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 2 21 0 83 24 0 95 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 4 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 0 30 1 18 GT15 J61BT13 47 1 85 0 28 1 1 GT15 75J371LP23 Z 4 4 4 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 130 5 12 45 5 1 79 80 3 15 50 1 97 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 0 0 GT15 PRN 52 2 05 123 4 84 21 0 83 18 0 71 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Unit mm inch App 6 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX App 7 b GT1585 Model name A GT15 QBUS 95 3 74 GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS 73 5 2 89 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL 95 3 74 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL 73 5 2 89 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P 2 72 5 2 85 GT15 RS4 9S 2 GT15 RS4 TE 2 33 5 1 32 GT15 J71E71 100 38 1 5 2 GT15 J71LP23 25 4 GT15 J71BR13 87 5 3 44 GT15 J61BT13 47 0 1 85 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 3 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 80 3 15 GT15 75J61BT13 Z GT15 PRN 52 2 05 GT15V 75V4 5 132 5 2 GT15V 75R1 5 77 3 03 BNC 182 7 17 GT15V 75V4R1 5 RGB 77 3 03 GT15V 75ROUT 5 77 3 03 Appendix 1 External Dimensions 64 2 52 R a 2 bending radius of the cable 28 1 1 55 2 17 18 0 71
165. 8U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O Function to execute scripts in unit of Option OS Object Script i 2 18U O x object Object Script 02 02 Key codes for increment key and i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O Oo Oo decrement key are added Key code for historical trend graph is 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O x added Key Code Key code used for Kana Kanji conversion i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O x is added Key codes for user ID ascending descending order movement of cursor are 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O added Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 28 Other functions added KER Version of GT R GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Displays details in OS information project 7 information alarm information hard copy i Utility j i f 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo x Oo information and advance recipe information properties Function to display the status of Network unit Eaa MELSECNET H communication unit and 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O x status display wie CC Link communication unit Unlimited installation of Extended function OS and option OS can extended function be installed unlimitedly 2 18U BootOS 02 02 E O x x OSs and option Conventionally the limit was 10 OSs Functio
166. A HWD HEA xiL Sok O2H FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao O GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 61 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Device value delete operation The device value of selected record is deleted without value and changed to record only for reading The record name is not deleted rive PROJECTI RECIPE1 indName Size Date Time Select the recipe file and touch the ARPOOOO K 03 16 05 15 17 I Excute button 1 eee Copy Move eles te Execute File Nane A PROECTY RECPET P0001 61 a As the Advanced Recipe Record List etting No P ene Hees l screen is displayed select the record a EAIA I comment to be deleted 3 Process 3 setting A 4 P Process 4 setting If the data of which attribution contains P can not be deleted Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT PLC PLC gt G0T GOTSPLC Value If touch the Pee Dvice button the dialog Value Record No 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting shown left is displayed 4 If touch the Ok button starts deleting device value The Processing message is displayed on the screen Are you sure you want to delete OK Cancel When deleting is completed
167. A touching the following button according to 6 Destination file E AAMO0001 CSV the file type to convert to ow Convert now 220 e CVS file G1A gt CSV Button 2K E TXT file TXT gt CSV Button 828 OK Cancel Q Za SOR Example Dialogue when G1A gt CSV azz button is touched owe aon File is already exist Touch OK button Overwrite now When the file whose name is the same 2 exists in the destination folder the dialog ram Lu showed at left appears without starting the BEA conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the ozn i file 13 ok Cance If touch Cancel button cancels the 7 conversion z z TSE a COREL SGeCeSS til D The message of completion is displayed a in dialogue when conversion is uo wo completed If touch OK button the dialog is closed x O W x O W F 5 Oo Zz O So On ae fe oa Zz wg E Boe Zur Seu 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 29 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 13 30 Deletion operation Deletes selected files Delete file name AAMOOOOO G1A Delete now o Delete is completed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Touch and select the file to delete If touch Del button the dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button the file is deleted If touch Cancel canceled button the deletion is When the deletion is completed the completion dial
168. ANCE TIMING SETTING Energization time touch count and writing times used as standard for the maintenance time are set When use the maintenance timing function battery and option function board are required Refer to the following below for details of battery and option function board gt 8 OPTION UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF o gt DISPLAY SECTION Zz O we Oo Ze zZ mo ez Zw lt F SETTING 16 1 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting When use maintenance time notification function battery and option function button are required When setting the maintenance notifying time refer to the life descrived in Section 3 2 Performance Specifications as a guide to set time or count The maintenance time notification is output by the following two methods e Outputs to GOT special register GS680 e Outputs as system alarm For details of the GOT special register and system alarm refer to the following lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Point gt Switching OFF the maintenance time notification output The maintenance time notification setting which has been set once is not switched OFF even if changing its setting Switch OFF the maintenance time notification by t
169. B unit not 1 Check if the video RGB input unit is installed mounted 2 Check if the GOT used supports video RGB input x 20 13 INDEX 20 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection and the cause is not clear in 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm execute the following troubleshooting Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection K gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 20 3 1 Locating error positions Explanation regarding the method of specifying the error part Please refer to User s Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register 1 20 14 How to locate error positions a Use of peripheral devices Using the peripheral devices such as GX Developer check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and based on the error message on the PLC CPU check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses b Error timing Check the timing of errors 1 An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset The error may be detected by the initial processing of the PLC CPU In this case because the faulty module may not be identified use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed the module may be causing the error
170. Backlight replacement varies with the hardware version of the applicable GOT Before replacement please confirm the hardware version C Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed standards Type Hardware version Reference GT1585V STBA A March 2006 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 B April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 GT1585 STBA C March 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1585 STBD A Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575V STBA A March 2006 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 B April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 GT1575 STBA C March 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 STBD A Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 D April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 GT1575 VTBA E March 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 VTBD A Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 VNBA A Sep 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1575 VNBD A Sep 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1572 VNBA A Sep 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1572 VNBD A Sep 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 1 Replacement 1 7 Power off the GOT B Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel 1 9 8 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 3 Remove the expansion uni
171. Battery GT 15BAT lithium battery Option Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C 3 2 Performance Specifications Continued to next page 3 9 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 n Zz O x O wL O wW Q n PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Specifications bec GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male RS 232 Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation and FA transparent function USB Full Speed 12 Mbps 1ch jek Connector shape Mini B Built in USB interface Application For communicating a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation and FA transparent function Compact flash slot 1ch CF card Connector shape TYPE 1 Application Data transfer data storage Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch Multi color display board For multi color display board mounting Cannot be used Even installed 65536 ich colors will not be displayed Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Buzzer output Si
172. C T V O x Oo connection 01 02 JTEKT PLC Communication driver f Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2 32J x O connection JTEKT TOYOPUC PC 03 00 Communication driver HITACHI PLC S HITACHI HIDIC H 01 02 Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 09K O x Oo connection HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 01 02 Communication driver Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLG 2 09K MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP O x Oo MATSUSHITA 01 02 PLC connection Communication driver Supporting connection to FP 2 18U MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP Oo x Oo App 21 02 02 Continued to next page Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Wer Version of GT s GT GT Soft GT Item Description f Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Communication driver YOKOGAWA PLC F Supporting connection to STARDOM 2 32J YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 Oo x O connection 03 00 Allen Bradley PLC Can use L device by MicroLogix 1000 9 48U Communication driver connection 1200 1500 series i AB MicroLogix 02 02 O as O SIEMENS PLC Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 9 418U Communication driver connection 200 series SIEMENS S7 200 02 02 O X O Microcomputer Supporting XON XOFF control Communication driver 2 32J O x Oo connection Supporting interrupt extension Computer 03 00 OMRON i Communication driver temperature Supporti
173. Check whether channel Nos set in the project data are set in the Communication Settings Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT Simultaneous mounting of f 4 490 i simultaneously are mounted Check the mounted units and O the units are not allowed remove unnecessary units Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum Too many units mounted 4 491 number of mountable units Check the number of units and O on GOT Reduce units remove unnecessary units 500 Warning Built in battery The voltage of the GOT built in battery is decreased voltage is low Replace the GOT built in battery x 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 9 Error code 502 Error message Warning Backlight needs replacement soon Action The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached 80 or more of the set time The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time Channel No storage 503 Warning Display section needs replacement soon The dedicated GS is notifying that the display section power on addition time has reached 80 or more of the set time The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replaci
174. Compact flash slot 1ch 3 CF card Connector shape TYPE Application Data transfer data storage z Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch F Multi color display board For multi color display board mounting 1ch ra Extension unit 6 For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch D Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable z Inside the enclosure IP67 5 Protective structure Outside the enclosure IP2X E External dimensions 2 Excluding USB environmental 316 12 44 W x 242 9 53 H x 52 2 05 D mm inch gt 2 protection cover zz Panel cutting dimensions 302 11 89 W x 228 8 98 H mm inch lt m Weight 2 8 kg mounting fixtures are not included Compatible software package i 2 32J or later 2 04E or later 2 17T or later GT Designer2 Version 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics 5 It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of Que display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product On defect aoe 2 With the hardware version indicated below it will be 256 colors when the multi color display board is not installed For how to confirm the function version refer to the following Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards a GT1585 STBA A d GT1585 i
175. Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT156L is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or corresponding product 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156 4 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM A SPECIFICATIONS Q Zz lt x w Zv qe ZZ bE Fam an EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GI1550 8 GOT rear face ms 9 7 10 O 12 15 Tir Q 11 4 10 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155 No Name POWER LED Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in red Screen saving Blinks in red Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen For connecting a personal computer 4 USB interface Connector type MINI B For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 5 RS 232 interf
176. DING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
177. Definition of ChNo 0 None 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK 1 FA device connection 9 PC connection we On On ah oa Zz wg oF Sales io Zur Sen 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 1 0 12 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions The screen switches to the communication detail setting screen Set communication parameters from this screen Refer to the following for the setting change operation 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Communication setting Detail setting BUS Communication parameter Stage No Lo Slot No Default OK Point P Communication parameter setting by Designer2 Set the communication parameters for each communication driver at Communication Settings in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication setting 1 0 13 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings The contents of Communication Detail Settings varies according to driver type This section explains setting items different from the communication detail settings of the GT Designer2 For setting items other than described in this section refer to the following
178. E AND SYSTEM ALARM This chapter describes the error message and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT controller or network there are two kinds system alarm and advanced system alarm The error code can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information function In addition the channel No at which error has occurred can be confirmed with the GOT special register GS262 to 264 For details of system alarm advanced system alarm system information and GOT special register refer to the following gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 20 1 Error Contents Display This section describes the example for displaying error code and error message on GOT with advanced system alarm Popup displaying the error code and error message If an error occurs the error code and error message can be popup displayed on the front of the monitor screen As alarms are popup displayed regardless of the screen type the error occurred will not be overlooked QO A 1254 B 343 pl I ANDI 04 6 1 13 20 Power mod Pop up generated alarms regardless of the screen Displaying error code and error message in a list If error has occurred error code and error message can be displayed on the list set with the screen Multiple errors can be displayed or the history of di
179. E L Touch and select the file folder to delete 000001 1K 06 05 01 15 26 in LOG00002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 GIL MEET 06 01 15 18 ra O an Zo Ee Ozu T 16KB 15632KB Fil BIL CS Copy Move _preate BIL gt TXT Del Rename Q Zz LON If touch Del button the dialog mentioned 32 Target file ARP00001 CSV pee Del g aise Are you sure do you want to delete left is displayed 2a iy If touch OK button the file folder is deleted While executing Processing o z Z gt message appears on the screen Feo WFA If touch Cancel button the deletion is A a canceled Sak JZE OLN a When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Process completed FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao Q a O W ae O 5 W ere e iwa D When it cannot be deleted the dialog 2 ee showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder gt and execute the delete operation again mi on _ 13 7 5 Precautions 2 35 oa Zz O wg lt OS Ze SEY 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 49 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Copy operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is copied Size Date Time R L0G00001 1K 06 05 01 15 26 L0G00002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 L i 06 05 01 15 18 T gt Pha 16KB 1
180. ELDAS dedicated display A drive standard CF card memory check Memory check 7 TEA C drive Built in Flash Memory memory check Liquid crystal missing bits check color check drawing check display check and Drawing check K overlapping display check Font check Installed fonts check Pe Touch panel check Touch panel operation check check I O check Connecting target check Self loopback check Network unit status display Monitoring of the LED status display for the MELSECNET H communication unit and CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Displaying of error information etc System alarm display GOT start time Clean Displaying GOT errors CPU errors network errors Resetting GOT errors Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating hours Display the screen to clean the display section Maintenance timing setting 6 Black light maintenance timing setting Display section maintenance time notification period setting Setting of touch key maintenance notification count Setting of Built in flash memory maintenance notification count Addition times reset Maintenance timing setting Clean Addition times reset Function to reset the value of the backlight maintenance notification time display section maintenance notification time touch key maintenance notification count built in flash memory maintenance notification count which has b
181. ELOG 200603 10 0002 4K 03 10 06 13 33 moving directly below the drive Oy wo Ego TO x O W T U i 5 g D PKBZ15600B Jild E Please select 2 destination EPT Ba gt O Continued to next page z 5 Lu Qo gt zs to aD oa z O we Qo SE O ears Zur eam 2Eo 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 95 13 11 4 Operation log information operation 13 96 Target file OPELOG_200603 10_0002 610 Do you want to move the fi le on Target file OPELOG_200603 10_0002 610 Do you want to overwrite the fi le ox Process completed 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 4 Operation log information operation If touch the button the dialog shown left is displayed Touch the button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the Ok button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels moving When moving is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog g Rename operation Z An operation log file is changed S ra Program Data Control Operation Log Information x p CER NA sa ae TE amp Select the file to be renamed by 2 DIR
182. ET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION Remove the expansion unit cover on the right side of the GOT Remove the expansion unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND Lo STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND m z 0 8 pri a 7 Z Lu O I Pi Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder 0 Expanded figure of part A in 4 ez mi a Gi T lt x lt a zZ 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 15 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight Q Disconnect the cable connector of the en from the GOT side connector Ex Dusa Remove the cables from the 2 slits black Expanded figure of part B in 6 N TA Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal When connecting the cable connector of the backlight to the GOT side connector connect by it as shown below Also attach the case in the reverse procedure of removal Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m When attaching the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT 1 9 16 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 20 ERROR MESSAG
183. For GT15 COBS iu e Cut the connection wire protruding from both ends of the cable to the lengths shown below Zo e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the ground zE awn wire into the ferrite core e Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 Ferrite Core GOT side ZCAT3035 1 30 PLC GOT side a ol m fa Z lt 8 Ww w w gt OF LO a ox gt a 60 or less 60 or less 2 36 Ground wires 2 36 A 360 or less 40 280mm 11 0 inch 40 360 or less 14 17 1 57 1 57 14 17 Unit mm inch z Z x Ss Zz O E O 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 14 5 4 2 Processing connection cables c For other bus connection cables e Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material with the length shown below e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below and insert the braided wire for grounding into the ferrite core a ZORTS0G5 1800 n PLC side Cable shield material Grounding braided wire 200mm 7 87 inch Grounding braided wire 50mm 1 97 inch Unit mm inch 2 CPU direct connection and computer
184. GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying Class D Grounding Class 3 Grounding Method or higher which is used exclusively for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0 5 to 0 8 N m Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the
185. GOT2 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2 GX Developer GX Simulator Document Converter Abbreviation of SWOD5C GPPW E EV SWLOID5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviation of SWOD5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions Abbreviation of document data conversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series E License for GT SoftGOT 1000 License E License for GT SoftGOT2 License Abbreviations and generic terms Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P Description A9GTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC License FD E Others Abbreviations and generic terms Omron PLC SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module Description Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation KEYENCE PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE Sharp PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SHARP Corporation JTEKT PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation Toshiba PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION HITACHI PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Matsushita PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Yaskawa PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa El
186. GT01 C30R2 9S Cable length 3m For connecting FXKCPU communication function extension board D sub 9 pins connector FXCPU communication function adapter D sub 9 pins connector and GOT For connecting personal computer Drawing software D sub 9 pins female and GOT D sub 9 pins female FX communication function adaptor connection cable data transfer cable GT01 C30R2 25P Cable length 3m For connecting FXCPU communcation function adaptor D sub 25 pins connector and GOT For connecting personal computer Drawing software D sub 25 pins male and GOT D sub 9 pins female Computer link connection cable GT09 C30R2 9P GT09 C30R2 25P 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Cable length 3 m Cable length 3 m For connecting computer link module serial communication module and GOT Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately Product a Model name Description name GT09 C30R40101 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication GT09 C200R40101 9P Cable length 20m module serial communication board RS 422 GT09 C300R40101 9P Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40102 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40102 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit GT09 C200R40102 9P Cable length 20m communication board GT09 C300R40102 9P Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC
187. GT1550 the extension interface relay board is not needed Remove the connector cover 8 20 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 2 Installing procedure 4 Install the communication unit in the expansion unit interface of the GOT rear face When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit a gt O Z fe Ke 2 20 5E A 9 After the installation tighten the mounting screws 4 places in the specified torque range 0 36 a to 0 48N m z O m O a N Q zZ lt W n cto 2z g E o 6 Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 2 places O sow 282 LLO Sgr w gt O Zz O S z 2 Point gt Removing the GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws I gt above 2 8 OPTION 8 7 Communication Unit 8 21 8 7 2 Installing procedure When installing an extension unit on the outer layer refer to the following 37 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer cover the top of mounting screws 4 places with accessory labels in order to avoid receiving static electricity Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the seal stuck as it is 3 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBU
188. H communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 2 Installing the GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L These cannot be installed on the back stage of a video RGB unit For bus connection use the GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS or GT15 ABUS2 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers 3 Removing video RGB unit bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface board fixing screws Video RGB unit gt 8 6 2 Installing procedure e Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 8 7 2 2 GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 MELSECNET H communication unit C 8 7 2 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 3 8 7 2 K MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 8 7 Communication Unit 8 33 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION 8 8 RS 422 Conversion Unit The RS 422 conversion unit is inserted to the GOT RS 232 connector to enable the RS 422 communication by RS 232 RS 422 conversion Refer to the following for the details of connection statuses
189. K CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 81 13 10 4 Special data information operation 13 82 Delete operation Deletes the selected file Program Data control Special data information IG peleckier ive Size Date Time 4 5 ind Name A Built in CF card 03 08 04 Q 1 al C 154K 02 27 04 06 29 ICIRDAT 02 27 04 21 09 bO58kKB IFile Property Data check Delete Download Delete special data G1SPC Do you want to delete Delete is completed 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 4 Special data information operation Touch and select the file to delete If touch the Delete button the screen mentioned left is displayed Check if the deletion target file is specified correctly Touching the ok button deletes the file Touching the Cancel button cancels the deletion When the detection is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch the button the dialog is closed Property display operation Zz F O Displays the property of selected special data 5 Zz Program Data control Special data_information Property r Pate 09 01 05 Author D Touch the Property button after selecting a rawing S W version 6T Designer Version 15R A Q68ADV Q68ADI Q644D Op Monit
190. MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Toop GT15 Users Manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION I A DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous I conditions resulting in death or severe injury i I Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous I I I I I UN CAUTION conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage egg KKK KK Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection
191. Move econ 5 gt this section Rename oo lt this section A Create Folder gt this section CreateG1P lt this section E Execute gt gt this section to If touch x button the screen is closed G1P CSV conversion operation G1P TXT conversion operation Z Advanced recipe file G1P file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited S on personal computer z z rc ata C ol ion Log Information 5 5 RAFROJECTINOPELOG S E Ties 1 Touch and select the G1P file which is to 10 OBELOs_ 200608080000 3 08 06 11 WV be converted to CSV file or Unidcode eio OPELO PoE a reve text file 5 O f 7 Touch the following button in So accordance with destination file type aiz awe CSV file G1P gt CSV button 824 e Unicode text file G1P gt TXT button T L 15572KB 0KB ror BIO CSy Coy Move l Create o 610 TXT Del Rename List aor gt E EN nformat io xi lt z et Gidene Size Date Time Select the target folder BoE a Ge00001 1K 06 05 01 13 32 fil Selecting a folder is not needed for aen GIL L0G00002 2K 06 05 01 13 32 a A BI 060000010002 513K 05 05 01 13 12 outputting directly below the drive N 2 Fam WEG DED OAS a5 T G 13 ROS6KB 15632KB ile Please select a destination Eee lescenl Z gt Bare i z File conversion from GIP
192. N 8 7 Communication Unit 8 31 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When installing another extension unit on the unit that has been installed implement the above operations of 8 32 Y to When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed in order to avoid receiving electrostatic stick accessory labels to cover the top of mounting screws Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the seal stuck as it is Accessory labels Connector cover Point gt 1 Installation position for a communication unit that occupies two extend I Fs Install a communication unit that occupies two extend I Fs such as the following directly to the GOT main unit It cannot be installed on the back stage of another communication unit If a video RGB unit has been installed install the communication unit on the back stage of that video RGB unit e Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUS2L only C 8 7 2 M Bus connection unit e MELSECNET 10 communication unit 3 8 7 2 Ki MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link communication unit e CC Link communication unit 3 8 7 2 3 MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit CF7 8 7 2 MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 e CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 A 8 7 2 Fl MELSECNET
193. O O o a ODO O A Wh GT15 J71BR13 NETWK No a b check Self check NETWK unit 1 ST 2 lt Loop Info gt lt Transient Status gt Floop Rloop FLoopBK Sta RLoopBK Sta Loop Back lt D Link Info gt o 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 9 h 9 h 1 LED status Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit operation status LED No Item A Lit Not lit color RUN Green Data link normal Data link error Operating other than as control MNG Green Operating as control station station Operating other than as sub S MNG Green Operating as sub control station control station E D LINK Green Data link being executed Data link stopped a T PASS Green Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed SW E Green Switch setting error Normal Duplicate station number and M S E Green Normal control station error PRM E Green Parameter error Normal GOT R W Green Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT CRC Red Code check error Normal OVER Red Data entry delay error Normal AB IF Red All reception data 1 Normal TIME Red Time limit exceeded Normal b DATA Red Reception data error Normal UNDER Red Send data error Normal Forward reverse loop reception LOOP Red Normal error SD Green Sending data RD Green Rec
194. OPELOG_20060308_0000 OPELOS_20060309_0001 OPELOG_200603 0 fi 4 OPELOG_200603 10_0002 1K 03 10 06 13 33 Operate Operation log file E15560KB 0KB GIDCSY Copy rage G10 TXT List 1 3 88 13 11 Operation Log Information 13 11 2 Display operation of operation log information 13 11 3 Example of operation log information display z O rogram Data Control Operation Log Information Drive R L gt A Built in CF card Jal 5 3 09 06 09 23 il 5 03 09 06 _ 10 38 4k 103 10 06 13 33 3 10 06 13 33 z O lt 4 ou ane sre a Szo 7 8 9 u 9 G0 gt csv Copy Hove ele 28 Z 610 gt TXT Del Rename List agf Doty aon Number Item Description 1 Drive A Built in CF card is displayed Even if CF card is not installed this message appears N Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder O 2 2 Kind ner Zz In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Emig DEZ Displays the file name or folder name A oo For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed One oss 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button etc CAD C 13 8 4 IJ Rename operation 1 3 After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation z 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is
195. OT restarts automatically after the installation is completed z ua 26 iG Reboot Sw 2 lu z After confirming that GOT restarted normaly switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT Confirm the a CF card access LED is not lit remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT rae Zo EZ W lt lt M O a fi lt A A z 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 1 8 7 18 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor OS 1 BootOS installation When installing BootOS GOT compares the version of the BootOS to be installed with the version of BootOS which is already installed If the major version of BootOS to be installed is old execute the following operations to prevent it from being rewritten When installing from GT Designer2 a message is displayed on the personal computer screen Follow the instructions in that message a When only BootOS is stored in the CF card The message indicating disabled installation is displayed Boot OS has been already installed Existing OS Ver 01 01 B Expected 0 Ver 01 00 A Because of version down GOT aborts installing ok Touch the OK button to cancel installation After canceling installation restart the GOT b When BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS are stored in the CF card Skip the BootOS installation and inst
196. OT utility menu 1 a an 2 NO System Information function System Signal 1 is set YES The bit of Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal may be ON Confirm the bit status When ON set the bit to OFF 2 Ww 0 lt gs aja Zy RT o Xz wc a lt a lt NO YES Backlight bulb is blown n GOT POWER LED blinks Replace the backlight with a new one O i orangeigreen C 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and 2 c W Replacement Eo 19 6 Backlight Replacement z NO The possible cause is a GOT hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem A 1 For utility menu refer to the following S L gt 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 For the details of the forced screen saver enable signal refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 20 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring 20 17 APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions 1 GT1595 397 15 6 T i gt N ge 320 12 6 281 11 1 296 11 7 320 12 6 10 0 39 0 20 fo 800000000000000000000 880000000000000000800 fo m HUUOGUUU 382 15 0 Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 1 GT1585 2
197. OTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 10 GOT Start Time 14 10 1 GOT start time function 1 4 28 14 10 3 Display of GOT start time Item Start Time GOT Start Time Start Time 05 THU 15 59 20 Current Time 1 10 2005 THU 16 02 20 Operating hours Oh 02m 58s Description Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change Current Time Displays the current time Operating hours Point SA Remark g y K 5 14 29 i Displays operating hours of the GOT The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared To display correct time Set the clock of GOT 3712 1 Time Setting and Display When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time Time displayed at Operating hours Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted
198. PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 Component List 2 a7 2 2 2 Option QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable Sold separately Product name Small size CPU extension cable GOT to GOT connection cable Model name GT15 A1SC07B Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B Cable length 3m Description For connecting QnAS AnSCPU Motion controller CPU A series and GOT GT15 A1SC50B Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and GOT GT15 A1SCOS5NB Cable length 0 45m GT15 A1SC0O7NB Cable length 0 7m GT15 A1SC30NB Cable length 3m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A series and A7GT CNB GT15 A1SC50NB Cable length 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and A7GT CNB Large size CPU extension cable GT15 C12NB Cable length 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller GT15 C30NB Cable length 3m f CPU A series Extension base and GOT GT15 C50NB Cable length 5m GT15 AC06B Cable length 0 6m GT15 AC12B Cable length 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller GT15 AC30B Cable length 3m CPU A series Extension base and A7GT CNB GT15 AC50B Cable length 5m GT15 A370C12B S1 Cable length 1 2m GT15 A370C25B S1 Cable length 2 5m For connecting Motion controller CPU A series Extension base and GOT GT15 A370C12B
199. PU Bus Q 01 02 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver 2 09K O x O Q173HCPU A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 Di i Communication driver irect connection Supporting connection to FX3U series 2 18U O O O MELSEC FX 02 02 to CPU Supporting automatic system switching Communication driver 2 32J A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 O O O for QCPU redundant system MELDAS C6 03 00 Computer link Supporting connection to Q172HCPU 209K Communication driver connection Q173HCPU AIQNnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 a O MELSECNET H 2 25B x o x connection PLC Supporting connection to MELSECNET H PLC to PLC network 232J Communication driver to PLC network MELSECNET H 03 00 O Oo x Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 20 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX ee Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Supporting connection to MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC connection Communication driver 9 MELSECNET 10 2 09K m x i Supporting connection to Q172HCPU MELSECNET 10 01 02 connection PLC x Q173HCPU to PLC network Supporting automatic system switching Com
200. Parameter setting is enabled for F i 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O x x Zo Q172HCPU Q173HCPU lt 2 CNC monitor Function to monitor the MELDAS that is Option OS 2 18U O x x function connected to the GOT CNC monitor 02 02 Standard monitor OS 02 02 a i f f Communication driver a Multi channel Function to monitor multiple controllers tas i ne i 2 18U Use the communication driver O x x we function with a single unit of GOT Zy 02 02 or later for each xoz connection coe megeg Option OS Function for monitoring each controller Gateway function Mail from one GOT PC or sending a mail from 2 09K 01 02 O x x GOT Gateway function Server Client n Gateway function 01 02 re Option OS m Supporting the FTP server function 2 18U Oo x x i Gateway functionFTP 02 02 a Enables transfer of binary data by the FTP Option OS lt j 2 32J O x x server function Gateway FTP 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 00 Document display i Zdnet Function to display document on the GOT 2 32J Option OS O O x unction Document Display 03 00 INDEX Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 30 INDEX A Alist editors a a a aa 14 1 Addition times reset for maintenance time notification 17 1 Addition times reset function neseeeeeaeeea 17 1 Display operation of addition times reset
201. RAM DATA CONTROL Point gt Precautions on writing BootOS standard monitor OS in memory card When writing BootOS standard monitor OS etc in the memory card be sure to execute by the utility of other GOT or GT Designer2 The installation is not executed properly with the memory card to which uploaded from the utility of GOT or copied by softwares other than GT Designer2 Note the available capacity of the memory card The available capacity of BootOS and standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To Memory Card of GT Designer2 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM Communicate with Memory Card Memory card wite Boot OS write Core OS write GOT Type GT15 V 640x480 7 OS d monitor OS 02 04 00 mation 02 04 00 ta 02 04 00 Boot Drive Project Data C Built in Flash Memory al Font 02 04 00 APPENDICES Intelligent module monitor data 19 mation monitor data Servo amplifier monitor data Project Data 0 kbyte 6s 3499 kbyte Capacity of standard monitor OS Attention 0 kbyte Project data Special data is only valid for the supporting OS therefore it is recommend to write the correct t version of the 0 kbyte Memory cad C x 68816012 kbyte INDEX 18 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 18 3 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card There are the following two typ
202. S2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Power OFF the GOT Remove the expansion unit covers I F 1 side and I F 2 side of the GOT rear face 8 Install the communication unit in the expansion unit interface of the GOT rear face When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the communication unit 8 22 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 2 Installing procedure 4 After the installation tighten the mounting screws 4 places in the specified torque range 0 42 to 0 57N m MaAIAYSAO NOILVYENSISANOO WALSAS 9 Paste the provided seals after tightening the mounting screws in order to avoid receiving electrostatic SNOILVOISIDSdS SONILLAS ANY AWVN LHYd Unit installation The following explanation uses the Ethernet communication units as an example The serial communication unit can be installed with the same procedure 1 Serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit o Power OFF the GOT Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT JAI L03H1A ASVLIOA MO ANY OWS NOILVTIVLSNI 8 Fit the communication unit along the groove of the GOT case ONMIM feo NOILdO m N I co w Z gt 3 23 59 oO os Q gs Ss Es 56 2 Os NN oN 4 Fasten the communication unit by tightening its mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 N m 9 When installi
203. SB interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface HOS er 2run 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 2 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 4 Channel number specification menu BOX Set channel No to use with standard interface or extend interface Refer to this section 5 for driver that can be assigned to each channel 0 Set when the communication interface is not used 1 to 4 Set when connecting to a controller Bar code reader is excluded 8 Set when connecting with bar code reader 9 Set when connecting with PC GT Designer2 For USB and RS 232 interface the simultaneous setting is possible However when either interface is during communication communication is not possible for another interface Set when using gateway functions when non Ethernet connections are used for controllers Ethernet download function printer video display RGB display or RGB output 5 to 7 can not be set Fixed to 9 for the USB interface 5 Driver display BOX The name of communication driver assigned to the channels or the driver set with the Communication Setting of GT Designer2 is displayed The displayed names are shown below Corresponding Driver name Compatible connection type Displayed interface channel No Q BUS Q Extend interface display meses Bus connection BOX an gt This section 3 Direct CPU connection computer link Standard interface A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24
204. STEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION Link communication unit CC MELSECNET 10 communication unit D Power off the GOT Remove the two extension unit covers of the GOT Fit the GT15 751F900 along the groove of the GOT case 4 Fasten the GT15 75IF900 by tightening its mounting screws 3 places with tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48 N m 75IF900 then fasten them with to GT15 Attach the communication unit fixing brackets 3 places tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 N m 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 2 Installing procedure 8 26 QO Mount the network unit A9GT QJ71LP23 or A9GT QJ71BR13 or CC Link communication unit A8GT J61BT13 to GT15 75IF900 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61B13 1 Unit installation D Power OFF the GOT EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE D Remove the expansion unit covers I F 1 side and I F 2 side of the GOT rear face INSTALLATION foe WIRING OPTION 8 7 Communication Unit 8 27 8 7 2 Installing procedure 3 Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I F 2 side of the GOT After the installation detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board For GT1550 the extension interface relay board is not needed Remove the
205. Setting of the RGB clock phase horizontal screen position and vertical screen O i position g Selection of base clock z Ti ttina amp display 4 Display current time of clock a 2 ime setting Spiay Set current time of clock Display of battery status 1 It is necessary to carry out the following items by GT Designer2 e Installation of communication drivers Allocation of channel numbers and communication drivers ne 2 It is necessary to set the security level by GT Designer2 jm 3 This is not supported by the GT1555 Q or GT1550 Q Z59 4 If necessary please install the battery b zzu P 9 2 Utility Function List 9 2 Program data control Item OS information Functions overview Installing OS Uploading OS Property display of OS Kind version and date Data check of system file OS Project Information Downloading project file Uploading project file Project file deleting Copying project file A drive A drive Property display of project file Date version and screen title Data check of project file Program data control Alarm information Deleting alarm log file Copying alarm log file G1A CSV conversion Convert from G1A of the alarm file to CSV G1A TXT conversion Convert from G1A of the alarm file to TXT Historical graph display Displaying historical graph of alarm file Tally graph display Tally graph
206. Single tone tone length adjustable z Inside the enclosure IP67 5 Protective structure Outside the enclosure IP2X 5 External dimension Z a Lu Excluding USB environmental 397 15 6 W x 296 11 7 H x 61 2 40 D mm inch 28 protection cover z x Panel cutting dimensions 383 5 15 1 W x 282 5 11 1 H mm inch ae a Weight 4 9kg mounting fixtures are not included Compatible software package 2 17T or later 2 32J or later GT Designer2 Version 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics O i It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of gyz display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product On Soe defect USA 2 With the hardware version indicated below it will be 256 colors when the multi color display board is not installed For how to confirm the function version refer to the following Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards 2 R 5 3 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life Z 4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interfac
207. T Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 5 8 Security function Password setting ceseeee GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 5 Set Password Point P Restrictions on screen display a The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT 11 4 2 Displaying the security level change Main menu GOT setup Operation settings lt _3 9 3 Utility Display Touch j Touch NV X Touch GOT setup Operation Security setting Security setting Security level change ESRR GOT setup Operation Security level change D Touch Please input password Security level change Ess 7 8 9 Al BI 415 6 0 0 AEA 10 Del Enter Input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer2 1 1 18 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions 11 4 3 Security level change operation Password input operation GOT setup Operation Security level change By touching o to 9 d A to F key the N D i password of the changed security level is lease input password m input When correcting the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and input the password again Security level change success After inputting password touch the Enter key When th
208. T09 C30R40503 15P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40503 15P Cable length 10m i For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC GT09 C200R40503 15P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40503 15P Cable length 30m RS 232 GT09 C30R20501 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C30R20502 15P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC 2 12 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product woe Model name Description name GT09 C30R40401 7T Cable length 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40401 7T Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to HITACHI intelligent serial port module cable GT09 C200R40401 7T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40401 7T Cable length 30m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC intelligent serial port RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P Cable length 3m module cable GT09 C30R21103 3T Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC Connection cables for MATSUSHITA PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable Model name GT09 C30R20901 25P GT09 C30R20902 9P Cable length 3m Cable length 3m Description For connecting GOT to MATSUSHITA RS422 232C conversion adapter For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of MATSUSHITA PLC computer communication unit GT09 C30R20903 9P Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of MATSUSHITA PLC GT09 C30R20904 3C Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to the RS232C po
209. T15 PRN 52 2 05 1 The depth dimension is as follows when units allowing multiple stages are installed 16 2 0 64 GOT model name 2 stage 3 stage GT1595 42 5 1 67 64 5 2 54 GT1585 39 5 1 56 61 5 2 42 GT157 O 42 5 1 67 64 5 2 54 GT156 O 44 5 1 67 66 5 2 62 GT155 O 44 5 1 67 66 5 2 62 2 For cables prepaired by the user the dimensions are different 3 This dimension is applied when the external dimension of cable connector is 21 5mm Refer to the following fig ure The dimension varies depending on the connector used Unit mm inch GT15 J71E71 100 Cable connector C D R bending radius of the cable 78 8 3 1 55 2 17 23 0 91 57 3 2 26 36 1 42 78 8 3 1 55 2 17 10 0 39 57 3 2 26 36 1 42 56 3 2 22 soe 17 3 0 68 21 8 0 86 24 0 95 3 23 0 91 rs 71 3 2 81 30 1 18 30 8 1 18 28 1 1 35 8 1 41 18 0 71 Unit mm inch 4 For cable details of GT15 75J71LP23 Z Optical loop unit consult the local office of Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd 5 GT1585V S 6 GT1575V S Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 10 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX 7 App 11 External dimensions of the communication cable External dimen
210. Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen Remark Estimation of processing time S 13 64 3 The process may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file to be operated The more number of blocks increases the longer it takes to process advanced recipe folder file Reference value Direct connection to QCPU and CPU device point 32767 points setting transmission speed 115200bps e When the block setting number to1 about 17 seconds e When the block setting number to 2048 about 4 minutes For executing the saving loading of device value with advanced recipe file which has been moved or whose name has been changed Adjust Recipe File setting of advanced recipe setting with GT Designer2 to file which has been moved or whose name has been changed After the setting has been changed download the advanced recipe setting to GOT 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 5 Precautions 13 8 Logging Information Zz O O Zz 2 13 8 1 Function of logging information S H z 5 Logging files created with the logging function can be copied deleted or renamed etc Without using a personal computer you can manage logging files on the GOT For details of the logging function refer to the following manual Z O lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 11
211. Utility Display Touch Self check Touch NETWK unit status Debug amp self check display NETWK unit status display STL 2 lt LED status gt Loop Info gt lt Transient Status gt RUN E Norma Transmission Err 0 Norma ErrCode 1 o Sta No per 2 RLoopBK Sta No per 3 Loop Back No per 4 5 D Link Info gt 6 7 Com Status 8 D Link in prog 9 Cause of Ssp Normal Comm Cause of Stop Norma Aa Sees 9 DHT COAYOOG Dy DURUP 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 1 4 20 14 8 1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY m4 FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W e O Wwe l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display MELSECNET H communication unit MELSENCNET H communication unit 14 21 GT15 J71LP23 25 lt LED status gt F LOOP R LOOP De self check Self check NETWK unit GT15 J71LP23 25 NETWK No 1 Ix ST 2 lt Loop Info gt lt Transient Status gt Floop Rloop FLoopBK Sta RLoopBK Sta Loop Back lt D Link Info gt o e 0 U1 E O M
212. V2 N3A Zz Applicable tightening torque z Terminal block terminal 0 5 to 0 8 Nem screw Zz O a 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 13 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply Specifications GT1575 STBD taa GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VNBD GT1595 XTBD GT1585 STBD 51157 2 VNBD GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VNBD Input power supply voltage 24VDC 25 20 57W or less 43W or less 41Worless 18W or less 17W or less 15W or less Power consumption 2380mA 1790mA 1710mA 750mA 710mA 620mA 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 32W or less 30W or less At backlight off 1330mA 13W or less 540mA 24VDC 1250mA 24VDC 24VDC 100A or less 4ms 115A or less Inrush current 60A or less 1ms maximum load maximum 1ms maximum load load Permissible instantaneous f 10 ms or less power failure time Nacer it 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width when measuring with a noise simulator oise immuni E under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10MQ or larger by insulation resistance tester Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm Applicable solderless terminal Solderess terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Applicable tightening t
213. Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1575 VTBA Version E or later May 2005 GT1575 VTBD Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1570 GT1575 VNBA Version K or later Jan 2006 GT1575 VNBD Version B or later Mar 2006 GT1572 VNBA Version K or later Jan 2006 GT1572 VNBD Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1565 VTBA Version E or later Apr 2005 GT1565 VTBD Version B or later Nov 2005 GT1560 GT1562 VNBA Version J or later Nov 2005 GT1562 VNBD Version B or later Mar 2006 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 1 GOT 5 3 2 Connection method Use the following methods to connect with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive O Compliant with EMC Directive x Not compliant with EMC Directive it Connection method GT15 i Bus connection O gt Direct connection to CPU O Computer link connection O MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network P 2 g MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network E m CC Link connection intelligent device station x 8 CC Link connection via G4 x Ethernet connection O g Other connections o2 1 For details about each connection method refer to the GOT1000 Series 5 Connection Manual a 2 When connecting the GOT to other controllers as a PLC manufactured by a other company create the cable by the user and configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected device 5 4 2 4 PLC
214. W VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE Fix the attachment to the control panel with four clamp screws in the torque range of 0 82 to 1 10N m INSTALLATION 4 Place the GOT into the attachment from the front and fix it by tightening the mounting screws included with the GOT in the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m Point gt Precautions when the attachment is installed e The attachment can be used when the mounting panel thickness is 1 2 to 3mm If the installation panel thickness exceeds 3mm the GOT cannot be replaced by using the attachment e Replacing GOT with the attachment does not compliant with the standard IP65 IP67 NEMA4 of the waterproof and dustproof 8 13 Attachment 8 43 8 13 1 Applicable attachment 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and controller screen display and operation method settings program data control and self check etc Refer to the following for the utility function list lt 9 3 Utility Display 9 1 Utility Execution For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the C drive built in flash memory There are following three types for the installing BootOS and standard monitor OS methods 1 GT Designer2 gt GOT Via USB interface or m RS 232 interface AES GT Designer2 e Installed directly from the GT Designer2 BootOS or standard OS installation 2 GT Designer2
215. a Transfer Manual Screen Design Manual Refer to Chapter 7 WIRING Refer to Chapter 8 Option When transfer data via the memory card RS 232 cable Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable or Insert the memory card in the PC Install and download the OS program project data installed in the PC to the GOT 1 Install standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS to the GOT After installation is completed the GOT automatically restarts 2 Download the project data created by the PC in the memory card Write the OS program project data installed in the PC 1 Write the standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS project data in the memory card Refer to GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Refer to Chapter 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS in this manual for the operations of GOT Install the memory card to the GOT to install and download the standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS project data to the GOT Check the Communication settings Connect the GOT and controller with a cable Turn on the power supply of GOT and the system of the connection destination Start the monitor End Mount units to GOT Refer to Chapter 8 OPTION
216. a controller r The following gives the instructions to ensure the machinery comply with the EMC Z Directive However the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how Zg to make it comply with the EMC Directives if it is actually compliant with the EMC ee Directives o 5 0 sow oye ILO Sgr w gt Q Zz O 2 O zZ a Zz fe a O 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 16 5 4 2 Processing connection cables a For RS 422 485 cable e Each signal wire excluding SG and FG should be made into a two power wires and connected then twisted SoA prices RDA i aon p RDA j SDA e Se gt e Make the SG wire more than two wires and connect e Peel the sheath with the length shown below of the created cable to expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side PLC side 230 or less 40 9 06 1 57 Unit mm inch b For RS 232 cable e Use a twisted pair style for each signal wire except SG FG with SG eee SD war lt D ee RD eee DSR DSi er DTR sG t SG e Peel the sheath with the length shown below of the created cable to expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 GOT side PLC side O mi m i 230 or less 1 9 06 Unit mm inch
217. ace Connector type D sub 9 pin 6 Power terminal Power input terminal FG terminal 7 Extension unit interface For installing an extension unit 8 CF card interface For installing a CF card Lit CF card accessed 9 CF card access LED Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT ON CF card being accessed 10 CF card access switch a CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board 11 For installing the optional function board interface Hardware reset switch 12 Reset switch PN P Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 13 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 14 Battery holder Houses the battery 15 Protective ground terminal For earthing E 4 Remark f D Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1550 is as follows Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or corresponding product 4 5 Part Names and Settings of the GT155 4 11 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM A SPECIFICATIONS m Z lt x Ww n L0 ZZ bE Fam an EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE For the products s
218. ading can be used for downloading project data to another GOT Point Before setup operation The project data cannot be uploaded to the A drive when the project data of the A drive is set up Execute setup cancel 2 Setup cancel operation before uploading the project data Uo load TTouch A Standard CF Card in Select Do you want to upload drive If touch the Upload button the screen mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button executes uploading The project data is already existed 4 If any project data with the same name If upload is done the project data exists in the A drive the screen shown left is deleted Do you want to execute is displayed without starting uploading In this case touching the OK button overwrites the project data of the A drive with the project data with the same name of the A drive cance Touching the Cancel button cancels uploading Upload is completed When the uploading is completed the dialog mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restarts the GOT 1 3 24 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information 2 Setup cancel operation By setup cancel setup is canceled 6 ra gt f E Disable set p Touch A Standard CF Card in Select 2 Execute now drive gt If touch the Upload button t
219. advanced recipe verifies weather its contents are reflected ipe_Information PROJECT I RECIPE1 ndName Select the recipe file and touch the Size Date Time DIR G1P 200001 i Excute button m ha bee T IFile 1P Copy Move mae Execute BIP TxT Del Rerme Crate Data Co 7 P File Nane A As the Advanced Recipe Record List etting No 2 i des cla screen is displayed select the record P Process 2 setting i comment for matching the device value i 2 3 Process 3 setting 4 P Process 4 setting ui F Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT gt PLC PLC gt 60T GOTSPLC Value If touch the PES button dialo Record No 1 GOT PLC g Record Comment Process 1 setting shown left is displayed Execute record matching If touch the OK button starts matching record OK Cancel Continued to the next page 1 3 60 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation eG Matching progressed When matching is completed 6 completion dialog is displayed 9 If touch the button closes the T i dialog S ZS O an 30 2tz Suit Maiching errar If selected record does not match to the Siy device value of controller the dialog shown left is displayed Zz lt 2 See oor aon N OS 2 FE
220. aintenance time e The USB connector is positioned on the GOT front This enables the system startup to be performed more efficiently using FA device startup tool and eliminates the necessity of indirect works opening and closing the control panel cable replacement cable rewiring in order to improve the working efficiency e The blown backlight bulb can be confirmed even during screen saving with the blinked POWER LED at backlight shutoff detection SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS 3 Enhanced support of FA device setup tools e Transferring or monitoring the sequence programs using the personal computer connected to GOT during direct connection to Q QnA A or FX series PLC CPU or computer link connection to A QnA or Q series FA Transparent function EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 1 The specifications differ depending on the GOT to be used For the specifications refer to the following 3 2 Performance Specifications INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 1 1 Features 1 4 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown When transfer data via a cable Install GT Designer2 in the PC Wire for the GOT power supply Mount the option function board or multi color display board As necessary Create project data Refer to GT Designer2 Version Refer to GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Dat
221. al System Signal 2 b5 i Sensor Sensor OFF delay OFF delay Screen saving mode released Screen saving Screen saving mode active i Li i L I Screen save time When there is no operator around the GOT for the time set as Sensor OFF delay the Human Sensor Detection Signal turns OFF When the time set as the Screen save time elapses after the Human Sensor Detection Signal turns OFF the GOT enters the screen saving mode Refer to the following manual for the Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 b5 lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 6 Setting System Information 5 When setting the human sensor to invalid Specific to GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S Even if setting the human sensor to invalid by the utility the Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 b5 turns ON when the human sensor detects human movement Unintended operation may result therefore if controlling the Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal System Signal 1 1 61 and Human Sensor Detection Signal associating them with each other by a sequence program etc When setting the human sensor to invalid review the related sequence program etc 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting z O o Main menu GOT setup Z L 3 gt 9 3 Utility Display m 5 Touch Touch GOT setup Display 6 a 220 S Zy Displa SEn play
222. all Upload Property Data check aon 2 z Emio 4 When the installation is completed the HES Install is completed dial h left is displ d xag Restart Pai ialog shown left is displayed Sok GOT restarts if touch OK button oqo FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao O GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 2 OS Information 1 3 11 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Standard CF card The CF card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT c 18 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS D Install the CF card used as the uploading destination to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card C 8 1 CF Card Touch A Built in CF Card of Select Size Date Time 09 02 03 18 46 09 02 03 18 46 lame Is 1BOOT G1SYS ge l drive C Flash Memory Touching Upload starts the uploading AIE 15048KB 15600KB OFil Install Upload Property Data check When the upload is completed the dialog shown left is displayed Touching closes the dialog Upload is completed 1 3 12 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information
223. all standard monitor OS and other OS If the standard monitor OS is already stored on the GOT the following message is displayed Boot OS has been already installed Exsisting 0S Ver 01 01 B Expected OS Ver 01 01 B Exsisting basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install OK Cancel Touching the OK button executes installation Touching the Cancel button cancels installation After executing or canceling installation restart the GOT 1 8 8 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor OS c When the version is the same or newer regardless of the data stored in the CF card conditions a and b above ane xO The version information and a dialog for selecting whether or not to continue installation are 22E e displayed FEE oOg9 Ezz ax Ae 00S Boot OS has been already installed TIE Exsisting OS Ver 01 01 B 1 8 Expected OS Ver 01 01 B Exsisting basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install u a 4 aad am z n z 26 Z lt 9 De Og 5z of an OK ae a lt GOT screen when BootOS is installed from memory card gt Z ua Qa go If touch OK button installation is executed o zZ If touch Cancel button installation is canceled lt 5 2 Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when inst
224. alling standard monitor OS ff Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match z 20 When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed vzg Standard monitor OS 1 O O Standard monitor OS 2 O O ee Communication driver 2 O O Communication driver 2 O O Optional function OS 2 O O Optional function OS 2 O O v S ul 2 Zz W Please match the number g x lt W Q z 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor 1 8 9 OS Point gt Checking method of BootOS standard monitor OS version 1 Check the version of BootOS or standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details 13 2 OS Information 2 Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face 4 MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1575 VTBA IN 100 240VAC 50 60Hz POWER MAX 90VA SERIAL _00004701AA00001 A LAA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN BootOS BACKLIGHT GT15 70VLTT version 1 8 10 18 4 When installing the different version of BootOS standard monitor OS 18 5 CoreOS Install CareOS only when the GOT will not be the status of factory shipment even when BootOS is installed Normally the CoreOS has not to be installed Point gt Precautions for installing CoreOS When executin
225. anation of the GOT model name GT1575V 100 to 240VAC Power type 2AVDC Panel color type Black TFT color High intensity Wide angle view Display device type ce aes STN color STN monochrome 1024 x 768 XGA 800 x 600 SVGA 640 x 480 VGA 320 x 240 QVGA Resolution Video RGB compliant None 65536 4096 256 colors 1 16 colors Monochrome White Black 16 gray scale 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 pOJ GOT 1000 series GT15 GT11 Video RGB Model type Screen size type aoartoolonall lt l lo lt o xl F oza wlos 1 For GOTs that can display 65536 colors refer to the following L 3 2 Performance Specifications 2 Explanation of the option model name GT kk k 90 Dedicated for 15 80 Dedicated for 12 1 75 Common for 15 12 1 10 4 8 4 Partially common for 5 7 1 70 Dedicated for 10 4 60 Dedicated for 8 4 50 Dedicated for 5 7 15 Dedicated for GT15 11 Dedicated for GT11 Partially common for GT15 GT11 2 09 05 Common for GT15 GT11 01 1 The bus connection unit GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBU2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L can also be used with GT1550 2 The USB environmental protection cover GT11 50UCOV can be used for both the GT15 and GT11 2 2 2 2 Component List 3 Third party PLC connection cable GTO9 Cx kx kk kx N P Plug male S Socket female T Solderless terminal C P
226. anne aaa 11 30 11 9 Video Unit Settings 11 31 11 9 1 Functions of the video unit settings saaana aaua aaea 11 31 11 9 2 Displaying the video unit settings 0 0 eae 11 32 11 9 3 Operating the video unit settings 00 0 2 eee 11 33 11 10 Video Display Settings 11 34 11 10 1 Functions of the video display settings 0 000 c eee eee 11 34 11 10 2 Displaying the video display settings 0 cee eae 11 35 11 10 3 Operating the video display settingSs 0 0 eee eae 11 36 11 11 RGB Display Settings 11 38 11 11 1 Functions of the RGB display settings 0 0 0 cece eee 11 38 11 11 2 Displaying the RGB display settings anana cee eee 11 38 11 11 3 Operating the RGB display settings 0 0 eb e ae 11 39 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1to12 5 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions 000 0 eae 12 1 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting 0 0 c eee eee 12 1 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display 0 0 cea 12 2 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 13 1 to 13 103 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 13 1 1 Drive name allocation 0 000 eee 13 1 13 1 2 Data type and the storage location 2 0 0 13 2 13 1 3 OS version confirmation a na aaaea e 13 4 13 1 4 Capacity
227. applicable to GOT series Sold separately 1 SH 080532ENG 1D7M26 SH 080544ENG 1D7M32 GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Describes specifications system configurations and setting method of the gateway function Sold separately i 1 The manual in PDF format is included in the GT Works2 and GT Designer2 products A 18 SH 080545ENG 1D7M33 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are described as follows E GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585 GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GOT1000 Series GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD RRR GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT1500 GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 GT1155 Q Abbreviation of GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBD Hand
228. at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products ae MELFANSweb website http Awwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html Zoe Sgr gt a Point gt The flash PC card of the GOT A900 series In the GT1500 the flash PC card for GOT A900 series cannot be used Use the CF card which is described in the above aul x ip Zz 0 zZ x Z O amp fe 8 1 CF Card 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable CF card 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Install remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF Installing Q Turn the CF card access switch of the GOT off When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 Open the cover of the CF card interface Insert and install the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside When using other than the GT1550 When using the GT1550 CF Card top face CF Card top face Point P CF card eject button For the following GOTs after installing the CF card turn the CF card eject button to 90 degree while being pulled e GT1585 S GT1575 S Hardware version B April 2005 or earlier e GT1575 V GT1565 V Hardware version D April 2005 or earlier 8 2 8 1 CF Card 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Close the cover of the CF card interface Set the CF card access switch to
229. ata collected by io 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 01 O O x Graph the logging function in trend graph format Standard monitor OS 02 02 Function to collect and accumulate device Logging Function 2 18U Option OS Oo O x App 27 values Logging 02 02 Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page nae Version of GT i GT GT Soft GT ra Item Description Version of OS N Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 ros nZe Number of devices settable for one recipe Standard monitor OS 02 04 22S in GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 2 27D Option OS O O Oo ZZE Up to 8192 devices Recipe 02 04 Eza 252 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Some i Function to save recipe data of GT11 in i Recipe function f 2 27D Option OS O O O CSV file format Recipe 02 04 w Standard monitor OS 02 04 O Function to save recipe data to the A drive 3 Zol 2 27D Option OS O O O OZO standard CF card for GT11 E lt Q Recipe 02 04 Jo 2100 a Standard monitor OS 01 02 Koz The extended function of the existing Lor Advanced Recipe i 2 09K Option OS O O x Enn recipe function Advanced recipe 01 02 Standard monitor OS 02 04 9 Report function Function to print the colleted data 2 27D Extended function OS O O x a Report 02 04 9 z go Standard mon
230. atus of the PLC and the transmission SIO status error Confirm Speed of the computer link 403 communication pathway Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message O or modules in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in error Ce GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Description of Checking for normal monitoring of each connection type _ 1 Station numbers other than master local station are Specified station access is specified at the CC Link connection via G4 406 out of range Confirm O f 2 A PLC CPU other than QCPU is accessed station no Confirm the station number of the project data A other network other than MELSECNET 10 when the unit is Accessed other network connected to is accessed MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC 407 by NET 10 unit Change network O network setting Confirm Network No of the project data in order for not accessing other networks Cannot perform operation The operation which could not be performed during RUN of 410 because of PLC run PLC CPU was performed O mode stop the PLC Stop the PLC CPU Memory cassette is write The memory cassette installed in the PLC CPU is EPROM or 411 protected Check the E PROM and it is in a protected status O memory cassette Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU Cannot read write device The key word is set in PLC CPU 412 protecte
231. aving the finger from the touch panel o lt For menu call key setting refer to the following Zy Lu lt 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting lam 3 When touching special function switch utility If you touch the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed o The special function switch utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created 28 screen by GT Designer2 agf Oo aon Main menu N A olp oak otb Special function switch 9 Utility For the details of the special function switch refer to the following a o gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual HS wO a Remark Locking the utility display by password e Bs When you try to display the utility main menu while the password is set to the GOT i O by GT Designer2 the display for password input will be appeared m The password setting of GT Designer2 is in the common menu D Main Menu zZ Please input password O a 5 On Ss i3 Sa 6 W3 Zu Zur SEY 9 3 Utility Display 9 8 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu When the password is not matched displays the error message The password is wrong Eas When touching OK the screen returns to the monitor screen 1 Input operation of password 1 Input the password after touching 0 to 9 A to LF key 2 Define the password by touching Enter
232. ay Advanced recipe record list screen z TER O Touching the Excute button on the advanced recipe information screen after selecting the 5 Z advanced recipe file this screen appears E gt Records selected in each advanced recipe file can be displayed or saved loaded File Name A PROJECTI RECIPE1 ARPO0001 G1P Setting No 1 Name Recipe No 1 z gt rocess se 2 Process 2 se i T Process 3 setting a oT Process 4 setting 329 Z SmE aml m O20 1 2 3 4 5 Q 28 6 gt EO T asz arr i Oot aon Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT PLC PLO GOT GOT PLC Value 9 z Number Item Description Zea wi 1 No Record No of advanced recipe file is displayed BEA no Attribution of record is displayed OAS Q Attribution of record can be changed with GT Designer2 az V Record can be loaded saved Record whose value is selected 1 3 VP Record only for loadin 2 Attr y 9 9 Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed Blanc Record only for saving Si Record whose value is deleted or not selected D O P Record unusable reserved area M a Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed Lo 3 Record Comment Record Comment is displayed File Name Path and name of recipe file are displayed Z 4 Setting No Recipe No is displayed D I Name R
233. ay lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in the GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or better Pollution level1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution level3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment 5 2 4 Grounding The following ground terminal is applicable Use it in the grounded status Be sure to ground the grounding for the safety reasons and EMC Directives Functional grounding d N Improves the noise resistance 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 2 3 Control panel 5 2 5 External wiring 1 External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the GOT select a model which complies with the Low Voltage Directive s requirements for isolation between the primary and secondary circuits OVERVIEW 2 Insulation require
234. ay setting 0 0 0 ce eee 11 15 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation 20 00 cee eee 11 16 11 4 Security Level Change 11 18 11 4 1 Security level change functions 0 2 0 0 ee te ee 11 18 11 4 2 Displaying the security level change 000 02 c eee 11 18 11 4 3 Security level change operation 0 assas aaaea 11 19 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 20 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 0 0 eee 11 20 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation a na 0 00 ce eae 11 20 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation 0 2 eee 11 21 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting 11 23 11 6 1 Touch panel calibration setting function 11 23 11 6 2 Touch panel calibration setting display operation 0 02000055 11 23 11 6 3 Touch panel calibration operation 0 0000 ee 11 24 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 26 11 7 1 Q QnA ladder monitor setting function 2 0000 cee ee 11 26 11 7 2 Display operation of Q QnA ladder monitor 2 000 0c eee 11 27 11 7 3 Q QnA ladder monitor setting operation 02020 e eee 11 28 A 12 11 8 Transparent Settings Transparent Mode Setting 11 29 11 8 1 Function of the transparent mode 0 0200 ee 11 29 11 8 2 Displaying the transparent mode 00 eae 11 29 11 8 3 Operation the transparent mode naasa a
235. ber set by the GT Designer2 Ethernet setting the station number of the PLC side Ethernet module or by the Same sta on GOT amp project data 404 project data Review Confirms the following contents so that the multiple station communication numbers should not be the same O parameter 1 Confirm the station number of GOT by the utility of GOT 2 Confirm the station number set by the project data 3 Confirm the station number set by the Ethernet setting Set by the parameter of GX Developer A device outside the range of QnACPU file registers and the PLC cannot handle as j buffer memory was specified 448 requested Correct O Correct the monitor device by setting file register of the PLC devices CPU The path has been switched or timeout occurred in the redundant system 1 Check the PLC CPU to know if the path has been switched 2 Check the cable connection status the communication unit installation status and the PLC CPU status Path has changed or 3 This error may occur when the load of the PLC CPU 450 timeout occurred in becomes heavier when accessing other stations In such a O redundant system case transfer the data of the other stations to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host 4 Perform one of the following operations if the PLC scanning time is long COM instruction Extension of END processing Setting of the number of processing times for general data Data update batch processing Q redu
236. board mounting 1ch Cannot be used i Even installed Multi color display board For multi color display board mounting 1ch 5 65536 colors will aa not be displayed 225 Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch Sog Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Outside the enclosure IP67 5 Protective structure Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions a Excluding USB environmental 303 11 93 W x 214 8 43 H x 49 1 93 D mm inch z protective cover x Panel cutting dimensions 289 11 38 W x 200 7 87 H mm inch 2 2 3 kg 2 3 kg mounting 2 4 kg Weight mounting fixtures es fixtures are not mounting fixtures are not included are not included included GT1575 STBA GT1575 VTBA Compatible software package GT1575V STBA 2 04E or later 2 04E or later 2 17T or lat o or later GT Designer2 Version 2 32J or later GT1575 STBD GT1575 VTBD z 2 17T or later 2 17T or later 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect Zz fe a fe 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 7 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 2 3 4 5 6 With the hardware
237. bout the displayed file mi The files other than that for logging are not displayed on the logging information S screen a Remark Folders and files displayed 7 2 BX koa N O D For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 9 D z gt 25 13 1 5 Display file 5 oa z O wg Q9 TE a 250 moz Zur lt SEG 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 67 13 8 3 Example of logging information display 13 8 4 Logging information operation Display operation of logging information elect Drive Ix 2 PROJECT1 indName Size Date Time TRT L co0001 0600002 0600002 1K 06 05 01 13 36 2K 06 05 01 13 36 2K 06 05 01 13 36 513K_06 05 01 13 12 4K 06 05 01 13 35 acd If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is u displayed 68KBZ15632KB E Fild BIL gt CSV Copy Move Folder bint vel Rename 4 If touch A Y button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch amp R button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected For operation of operating switches refer to the following GIL gt CSV GIL TXT this
238. cation setting If an error is displayed confirm the combination of the communication driver and communication unit Refer to the following manual for the combination GOT1000 Series Connection Manual System Configuration in each chapter oO UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Zz O x 9 Zz Q 1S LO Zz YE m He LU ZN DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 6 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation Channel Driver assign operation The following describes how to operate the Channel Driver assign The example of changing to direct CPU connection Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 for the GOT of computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24 is used Point gt Before the operation The GOT automatically restarts after executing this setting If project data has been downloaded the GOT starts monitoring of the controller after restarting Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety Comunication Setting Q Install communication driver A QnA Standard I F Setting Channe Dr iver assign QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 to GOT Download of Communication Setting from GT Designer is not required Extend I F Setting Afte
239. ceeeecceeeeeeeerteeeeeeeeneeees 13 1 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location 13 6 Data type and the storage location 0 13 2 Display file sinrin AT 13 7 Drive name allocation erene 13 1 OS version Confirmation ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 4 FONLCHECK aeinn oe ae nad i oceceiatts 14 12 Display operation of font check 05 14 12 Font check fUNCtiOn ecenin a 14 12 Font check operation c ceeeeeeeeeeeetteees 14 13 G General specifications c eseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 GOT self check zimna aa aae naaa iiae aaa 14 1 GOT Set Upik a nah tiene 11 1 GOT Start Time niena er e 14 22 Display of GOT start time eee 14 23 Display operation of GOT start time 14 22 GOT start time function ee 14 22 GOT to GOT connection cable ccceee 2 5 GOT to GOT long distance connection cable 2 5 GT Designer anora a G a aa 2 15 H Hard copy information s s s 13 36 The display operation of hardcopy information 13 36 The function of hardcopy information 13 36 The operation of hardcopy information 13 38 I VO check enrera na eta ae A 14 16 Display operation of I O check n 14 16 WO check function 2 0 eee ee eee eeeeetteteeteees 14 16 I O Check operation cccceeeceteeeeeeeeeeees 14 17 Installation of boot OS and standard OS 18 1 Boot OS and standard OS ins
240. check of memory f Point When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure A A i 4 P or memory type with reference to the folowing C WCI cates the items in which the detailed CF card inserting removing method lt gt Section 7 1 CF Card explanation is described manual chapter When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen section item of the manual Replace the CF card or built in flash memory For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 0 0 The followin example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory 0 For the 0 card memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash A mory Indicates the operation steps Select built in flash memory in the Memory check setting screen Internal Flush memory area write read check If select OK button the numeric keyboard window is displayed Execute now Menu and items are differentiated with parentheses If select Cancel button returns to the initial menu refers to the menu of GOT utility refers to the button in the dialog box of GOT utility 2 Touch to input password fe A0 and touch Enter Please input password If touch Enter executes read write check for t
241. completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog Process completed 1 3 62 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation 13 7 5 Precautions Zz fe 5 Precautions for create delete S E 1 When creating folder file E a Number of characters set for folder or file name GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters 5 Users only can rename folder or file name Su Other than folder file name is automatically printed Szo Suir Example CSV file Path in memory card for GT15 aam p erer Za i characters 1 da Extension Seg 4 characters See Drive name owe 1 character tote Max 78 characters o Zr Aa EN xag Remark If folder is assigned the hierarchy o2 R LN The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file 4 3 name The mark is also counted as one character z 3 b Character strings that cannot be set z 7 The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small ao characters of those cannot be used pal COM1 to COM9 LPT1toLPT9 AUX e CON e NUL PRN e CLOCK In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used F e The folder name which begins with G1 4 LU e Folder name and file name which begin with period z e Folder na
242. compulsorily switch the controller to the screen saving status Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal or disable the screen save time Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal set with Utility GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 6 Setting System Information Screen save backlight When Screen save backlight is set to ON using the system information function Backlight OFF output signal can switch the backlight OFF from the controller When Screen save backlight is set to OFF the above signal has no effect on the screen save backlight L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 6 Setting System Information 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 3 11 1 1 Display setting functions COMMUNICATION MEY INTERFACE MEY SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION a Zz Tog gt E lt s2Z Qi Ooty AON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 11 4 4 Display control by human sensor Specific to GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S The human sensor is a function that releases the GOT from the screen saving mode without the necessity to touch the GOT This function releases the GOT from the screen saving mode when the operator has come closer to the GOT Approach Go away Approach Go away Operator motion _ Sensor detect Human Sensor Detection Sign
243. ct information A Built in CF card Size Date Time 3K_03 08 04 04 51 02 27 04 21 09 ane KPROJECT Pha l 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 v Property Data check Download Up load Number Item Description The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected 1 Select drive a 5 When the CF card is not connected A Built in CF card is not displayed The project data Project Folder in the selected drive is displayed When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not 2 Name displayed The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 3 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 4 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 5 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed i Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by 6 The size of drive f a Ea drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive T Displays the execution switch of functions download upload etc which can 7 Operation switch a be carried out in Project information Number of folders and 8 fi Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders iles Remark Qo Displayed folders and files For the folders and files displayed ref
244. cted record is verified to the device value of controller 13 60 GOT PLC Delete Device 3 The device value contained in selected record is deleted 13 62 Value 13 42 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 1 Function of advanced recipe information 13 7 2 Operation of advanced recipe information display z O O Z 5 m Main menu Program Data control Z gt 9 3 Utility Display flun ka fa a z Touch Program Data i a Touch Advanced control aa iz Recipe Information ay 50 Zz ane sre He O5 u 02H Advanced Recipe Information PROJECT KindName DIR DIR RECIPE 03 15 05 o DIR RECIPE2 03 15 05 Zz DIR RECIPES 03 15 05 LON GIP ARPOOOO1 5 EO CSV ARPOOOO1 3 15 05 lt 32 TXT ARPOOOO 1 1K 08 15 05 ate eel Yow oon Operate advanced recipe file n ONE raem FEA TEZ ista n 5 x5 10KB 62250KB File eae IPCs Copy Move ers Execute z Ze BIP TXT Del Rename teate FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 43 13 7 2 Operation of advanced recipe information display 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information display Advanced recipe information screen rogram Data Control Advanced Recipe Information Size Date Time A Built in CF card E
245. d 334 Memory media error Memory card is faulty Replace memory media Replace the memory card x Memory card battery The battery voltage of the memory card is low 335 voltage low Replace x Replace the battery of the memory card battery Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been Printer error or power turned on 340 i x failure 1 Confirm the printer 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer Printer is faulty or the printer power supply has not been f turned on 341 Printer error x 1 Confirm the printer 2 Turn on the power supply of the printer 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No to code uz storage xOO 35 Error occurred at the external I O interface module Eur 2Ze KBF module fuse blown 1 If an external power supply 24VDC is not supplied supply e2 Dow 342 Check the module or the external power supply x Q92 external power source 2 If an external power supply is supplied replace the external I O interface module LL KBF module status error 2 The external I O interface module is not installed correctly 520 343 Load KBF module i x EAA Install the external I O interface module correctly Ju properly 206 FOZ Any value that cannot be converted to a BCD BIN value is 20 345 BCD BIN conversion error being displayed input Correct data 1 Change the
246. d by keyword O Cancel the key word Remove keyword ae ASCII code is selected in Ethernet operations of the PLC E71 specification is 420 side setting O ASCII Select Binary code Ant E71 is set as read only The Ethernet module on the PLC side is set in read only Clear setting Set the Ethernet module on the PLC side to write enabled O oe PLC CPU error Communication between PLC CPU and the Not communicating PLC side Ethernet module impossible 422 between CPU and E71 O Confirm CPU error Confirm whether there is error in PLC CPU by GX Developer etc Confirm buffer memory 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 7 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Ww 0 1 gs ae Zy T o Xz wc a lt a lt APPENDICES INDEX Channel Error Error message Action No code storage The station number set in the project data does not exist in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 Insufficient network table Add the station number set in the project data to the Ethernet 423 information Add station setting of GT Designer2 O no Set the station number so that it becomes the same as the station number of the PLC CPU side Ethernet module set by the parameter of GX Developer The station number set in the GOT s utility is the same as the station num
247. d window move buzzer volume by GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data 11 14 lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 11 3 Operation settings 11 3 1 Operation setting functions 480ms 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup 11 3 2 Display operation of display setting z O Main menu GOT setup 5 PRERE Z 9 3 Utility Display 5 gt LER z 5 ae Touch Touch GOT setup Operation z O a SO Zz siz Operation settings Swe OF GOT setup Operation o2 Buzzer volume 1 1 Window move buzzer ON Security setting Setting Utility call key Setting Touch an item to change settings Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms a Zz S29 gt E 432 Qi Ooty OON N 2 Ero Mare ea a5 oak oto S lt Point f Restart after setting change If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the gt lt button after the a gt setting of each item excluding the security setting is changed and touch the x h button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without th
248. deo RGB Touch Video RGB Setting RGB Display Settings ClockPhase 000 E Display Position Hor izont 14000 E Left Right Fi Vertical 000 E Video RGB Setting Touch RGB Display Settings Up Down 1 1 38 11 11 RGB Display Settings 11 11 1 Functions of the RGB display settings Default Confirm Touch an item to be set 11 11 3 Operating the RGB display settings zZ O 2 The clock phase and screen display fr a gt position horizontal direction vertical c direction can be changed 5 Display Position t Rino E F Horizont 14000 IEJ g E i Z Up Down E Vertical 000 E sme if Su Z KS A So z Changes the Changes the Changes the T Defaut _Contira number a number to the number a ZNE certain amount touched certain OE in the position amountin the Ozo direction direction 11 When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined a Zz Tog gt E lt s2Z Qi Ooty OON If you touch the X button without Changes are discarded if you close the window before pressing Confirm touching the Confirm button the dialog box Do you want to proceed on the left is displayed o gt 2 EFKA DES oieta xng oak oto A A 4 After completing all the items to set if you z touch the X button the display returns to a Video RGB Setting ma TO x
249. der of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Next button the dialog mentioned left is displayed 13 3 Project Information 13 18 13 3 4 Operation of project information Delete special data Touch button G1SPC If there is no file of the same name in the BO you want tonglete copy destination folder starts to copy Z When there is a file of the same name in x the copy destination folder the dialog 2 mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy ok cance If copy in this case the copied file is 5 overwritten to the project data in the copy gt destination folder 305 If touch OK button starts to copy Zune If touch Cancel button cancels to copy Gal Copy is completed 8 When copying completes the dialog of completion is displayed If touch button closes the dialog a 33 Q N 225 HES a2 3 Cae Property display operation aZ8 Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder 4 3 Draving S N version If touch Property button after selecting z B2 System Hon tor il the project data to display the property z the property is displayed as shown left 5 In property display the following f a information is displayed LO Item Description Date Displays the creation date of the file
250. device data to be displayed to the BCD value O A 2 Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer lt The contents of the recipe file are not normal Z 351 Recipe file error Confirm 1 Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the memory card O content of recipe file 2 Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the memory x Z H card format Recipe file make error Failed to generate recipe file ii 352 Reboot GOT after x 0 Reboot the GOT after installing the memory card 3 inserting memory card De E Failed to write in the recipe file z2 Unable to write Recipe f i ovg 1 Confirm the write protection of the memory card rog 353 file Confirm memory card x megea 2 Confirm the contents of the memory card is inserted PP 3 Do not pull out the memory card while recipe is operating n Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 354 Recipe file write error PANE x Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating g2 Error occurred while writing in the recipe file a ote 1 Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating a 355 Recipe file read error at x lt 2 Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the memory card Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe function by specifying the file register name File system error occurred 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file 3
251. dged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic characters etc 0 x 0000 to 0 x 04F9 From basic Latin to Kirill x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 Hangul characters 0 x ACOO to 0 x D7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Kanji 0 x 4E00 to 0 x 9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis ra 2 If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be installed Sa Install the standard monitor OS again Z z 5 Sa Zz fa we oy Zi Zur SEY 14 5 Font Check i 14 5 1 Font check function 14 la 14 5 3 Font check operation Font check starts by touching Font Check in the Display check screen The character data of the built in font in the built in flash memory can be checked visually to confirm the font drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check I Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Upper left touch position O Z Upper right touch position The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen Font data Point gt Option fonts TTT To display optional fonts the followings are required e The option font installation e Option function board installation The option fonts a
252. display z O O rogram Data Control Z elect Drive T C gt A Built in CF card E 5 6 05 01 13 36 i 5 06 05 0113 6 05 01 13 z 5 6 E 2 3 4 5 6 z Zo aml m O20 7 8 9 T 7768KB 19632KB el 9 stg e SRE Qo AOD Number Item Description 1 Drive A Built in CF card is displayed Even if CF card is not installed this message appears n Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder O 2 2 Kind ner Zz In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Emig DEZ Displays the file name or folder name A oo For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed One oss 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button etc CAD C 13 8 4 IJ Rename operation 1 3 After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation z 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed z 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 5 O gt 6 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed u a 7 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive o 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 9 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders x D I O N m Point 7 A
253. djustment Contrast adjustment None 16 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube nonreplaceable backlight shutoff detection Backlight function is included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 58 000 h or longer Approx 75 000 h or longer Time when display Life 2 Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the luminance reaches 50 at operating ambient temperature of 25 C the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Numbers of touch key 300 objects screen Matrix structure of 15 lines x 20 columns Key size Minimum 16 x 16 dots par key Touch Number of objects that panel can be simultaneously Maximum of 2 objects touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length None Human Detection range None iaa Detection delay time None Built in flash memory 9Mbytes C drive 3 for string project data and OS Memory Life Number of on 100 000 times write times Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Option Backup target Life Clock data and maintenance time notification data Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C 3 2 Performance Specifications Continued to next page 3 11 3 2 5 GT1555 Q GT1550 Q OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM OO n Z O q O m O Mr a o PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Item
254. e Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 90mm or less b 24VDC GOT power section INPUT Jn DD a LG FG Boece Ferrite core ZCAT3035 1330 90mm or less 5 13 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 4 1 Power and ground wires wiring method 5 4 2 Processing connection cables Process the cable used with the GOT with the following method When processing the cable ferrite core cable clamp and shielding material are required it The cable clamp used by Mitsubishi Electric for the EMC specification compatibility test is shown below ce e TDK corporation brand ZCAT3035 1330 Ferrite Core e Mitsubishi Electric Model AD75CK cable clamp e Japan Zipper Tubing Co Ltd Zipper tube SHNJ type 1 BUS connection cable a For GT15 QCOB GT15 QCOBS e Peel the sheath with the length shown below at both ends of the cable and expose the g shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 26 GOT side PLC GOT side 2 fe m O a N 360 or less 40 40 360 or less gt 14 17 1 57 1 57 14 17 Unit mm inch m zZ b
255. e If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the lt lt button after the setting of each item is changed and touch the x button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected EB Display kr O QnA ladder toni tor OP videosRes Setting Operat ion Transparent mode SS If touch X the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 7 2 Display operation of Q QnA ladder monitor 11 27 COMMUNICATION MEY INTERFACE MEY SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION a Zz eo gt E 432 Qi Ooty AON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 11 7 3 Q QnA ladder monitor setting operation 11 28 GOT setup 0 QnA ladder monitor Data save location C Flash Memory With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Cancel 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 7 3 Q QnA ladder monitor setting operation Setting items are changed if setting item is touched C Flash Memory Standard CF card Not store By touching the button the
256. e N OS z gt FEA Fua BES xng oak eran T G 3 Bo56KB715632KB ile Please select destination Eee lescenl D If touch the Excute button the dialog File conversion from GIL to CSV shown left is displayed Source file LOGO00001_0002 G1L Change to L0G000001_0002 CSV Pee LORE Change file format While executing Processing message appears on the screen FILE DISPLAY AND m gt Q O GOT SELF CHECK Example Dialog if the G1L gt CSV button is touched Continued to next page CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 69 13 8 4 Logging information operation File conversion from GIL to CSV Source file LOGOO0001_0002 G1L Change to LOGOOGOO1_0002 CSY Do you want to overwrite the fi le OK Cance Process completed When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the file Cancel button cancels the conversion If touch The message of completion is displayed in dialogue when conversion is completed If touch closed OK button the dialog is 13 8 Logging Information 13 70 13 8 4 Logging information operation Delete operation Folder and file to b
257. e take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT 2 Replacement 2 Power off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the expansion unit cover from the right side of the GOT Remove the expansion unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted 4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws 8 pcs with a screwdriver and remove the case Screw A must be tighten in the torque range of 0 186 to 0 245 N m as it is made of plastic 1 9 10 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight Pull up the backlight drive board and disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the backlight drive board ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION w e 96 QO Press the backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left Be When pulling the backlight press the packing with your finger so that the backlight will not be hit with the 226 packing 208 9 When replacing GT15 80SLTT When replacing GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT or GT15 70VLTN AA MAINTENANCE AND m z O O mf a a z Lu O Bs r Packing uct Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly T
258. e after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which t
259. e backlight refer to 19 6 Backlight Replacement ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION LL 1 Life of backlight 20 The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility Ezo of GOT GOT set up 334 Refer to the following for details TE lt mo lt 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 9 2 Replacement time of backlight The backlight replacement time can be set by the utility of GOT Maintenance timing setting with reference to the life of backlight Refer to the following for details C7 16 MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING MAINTENANCE TIMING SETTING MAINTENANCE AND m z O O mf a a z Moreover when system alarm is used the message that notifies of the backlight replacement time can be displayed on the GOT screen Bs ug System alarm oe YZ W lt lt 502 Warning Backlight needs replacement soon Y 2 fi lt Refer to the following for the system alarm display L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Point Precautions for the backlight shutoff status m z In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement 1 9 5 19 6 Backlight Replacement This section explains the backlight replacing methods 19 6 1 Applicable backlight The following backlights are
260. e only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment 6 When using multiple extension units and a bar code reader the total current of the extension units and bar code reader must not be greater than the total current that the GOT can supply 9 For current values of extension units and bar code reader and the total current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function z O e oO 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 3 3 2 1 GT1595 X 3 2 2 GI1585V S GT1585 S Display iiem Specifications GT1585V STBA GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD Type TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view Screen size 12 1 Resolution 800 x 600 dots Display size 246 9 69 W x 184 5 7 26 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 50 characters x 37 lines 12 dot standard font 66 characters x 50 lines Display color 65536color 2 section Left Right 60 degrees Display angle Top 40 degrees Bottom 50 degrees Intensity of LCD only 350 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 50 000 h or longer Life 3 Tim
261. e password matches the normal completion message is displayed When the password does not match an error message is displayed If OK button is touched it returns to the password input screen again Password error B If x button is touched it returns to security setting screen Remark About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily Qs A When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return the security level to the original level 11 4 Security Level Change 1 1 19 11 4 3 Security level change operation COMMUNICATION MEY INTERFACE MEY SETTING a Zz Tog gt E 432 Qi Ooty AON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified For the key position 1 or 2 points can be specified from 4 corners on the screen When specifying 1 point a setting to switch the screen to the utility by keeping pressing the key position is available This prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation The number of key positions that can be set differs depending on the GOT type Model name The number of settab
262. e procedure above the o setting contents are canceled without reflected F u F e E Display TA Operation 2 If touch X the GOT restarts H anA tadder monitor Transparent mode and the changes are reflected BB vi deorRes Setting Z fae On On it oa Zz fa wg ZE Zur Seu 11 3 Operation settings 1 1 15 11 3 2 Display operation of display setting 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Buzzer volume window move buzzer Buzzer volume OFF Window move buzzer ON D Security setting Setting Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Security setting Refer to the following for the security setting operation 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key Refer to the following for the utility call key operation 3 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 1 1 16 11 3 Operation settings 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation 4 Setting items are changed if setting item is touched Buzzer volume SHORT TONG OFF Se FN Window move buzzer OFF 7 ON 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched If touch lt button without touching OK button the dialog mentioned left is displayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with g
263. e target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Excute button the following dialog shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy Fa Process completed When the copy is completed the dialog 6 of completion is displayed Q If touch button closes the dialog m g m Zz an 220 Zy 828 Move operation An operation log file is moved P ate JE on Los Information P x te AEROLECTINOPELO SG SET D Select the file to be moved by touching it Za Reese o fl uae CSV JOPELOG x K 310 Touch the Move button ag G10 a Oo aon N OS 2 FEA ma GEO y 508 z oak 155 72KB OKB 4F i le Ban 10 05 Copy Move Forder BOTT Del Renate List 3 a TE Select the target folder Rea Tein Cr card ae 7 y a E z 610 GPELO6_20060908 _0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 T E k aa N E 5 G2 T 09 i 3 r 610 oP
264. e used on logging are deleted lame Size Date Time R LOGO0001 L LOG 2 1K 15 18 1K 06 05 01 15 26 K 0115 26 T hd BBA Fil piL csy Copy Move Create BIL gt TXT Del Rename Target file LOGO00001_0002 G1L Are you sure do you want to delete Process completed The folder is invalid Touch and select the file folder to delete If touch Del button the dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button the file folder is deleted While executing Processing message appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled When the deletion is completed the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed D When it cannot be deleted the dialog showed at left appears Only when deleting folder is executed Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute 13 11 the delete operation again 5 Precautions 13 8 Logging Information 1 3 71 13 8 4 Logging information operation COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND m CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION st STATUS DISPLAY gt ao Q GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Copy operation Folder to be us
265. e when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C 1 900 objects screen Number of touch keys Matrix structure of 38 lines x 50 columns Touch Key size Minimum 16 x 16 dots 16 x 8 dots for the last line only per key Number of objects that panel can be simultaneously Maximum of 2 objects touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max aman Detection length 1 39 37 m inch ee Detection range Left Right Top Bottom 70 degrees Detection delay time 0 to 4s C drive Built in flash memory 9Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory a uy i 100 000 times write times Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Option Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Continued to next page 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S hee Specifications GT1585V STBA GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps z RS 232 6 Conner shape D sub 9 pin a z Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload download OS installation transparent function Z USB Full Speed 12Mbps 1ch z Built in uen Connector shape Mini B g interface Application PC communication screen data upload download OS B2 installation and FA transparent function 58
266. ecipe file writing Advance recipe file save p 584 aftor Do not pull the memory card out while the Advanced Recipe x is operating F An error has occurred during the advanced recipe file reading Advanced recipe file j 585 Do not pull the memory card out while the Advanced Recipe x upload error 3 is operating Specified Advanced The advanced recipe of non existing number is about to be 586 recipe number does not executed x exist Execute advanced recipe of existing number The advanced record of non existing number is about to be Specified record number 587 executed x does not exist Execute record of existing number 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 4 When an error occurs FFH is stored to the channel No 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No ta code uz storage xOO se Saving recipe is about to be executed to the record of which u2 Zz CanmotsaveredBe data recipe device value cannot be edited S29 588 toreadoni sas Make the recipe device value of the record editable with x ans y Advanced Recipe Setting of GT Designer2 or specify the aon record of which recipe device value can be edited p Saving recipe is about to be executed to the advanced recipe m Recipe device save error ae o 589 j setting that is set for not using file x Zol Recipe file does not exist f OZO Specify the advanced recipe setting that
267. ecipe name is displayed 2 m 5 Date and time Date and time when record comment is updated are displayed m 6 Operating switch Execution switch of each function G z O og Ze 25 go amp oa z O wg Q9 TE a 250 woz Zur lt SEG 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 45 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information display 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Display operation of advanced recipe information 13 46 PRI ndName Rje RECIPE1 REC PE2 RECIPES ARP00001 CSV ARPOO001 TXT FST 1812KB IP Copy Move Greate Execute Create BIP gt TXT Del Rename GIP 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation D If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed If touch a button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch amp R button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected QO For operation of operating switches refer to the following G1A CSV G1A TXT gt gt this section Delete i K this section COPY nn CF this section
268. ective objects in grouped objects Enables global replacement of channel Batch Edit 2 18U Oo O x No Enables checking for security level Screen Preview switching and language switching in 2 18U O O Oo image after switching Wizard for setting the GOT type controller Wizard type and communication settings when 2 18U O O O creating a new project S Settings on the Script Edit dialog are Screen script ilable f randode 237D available for screen script and projec project script Prel O O x script Setting of maintaining screen numbers of 7 the screens being displayed System Auxiliary setting i H 2 27D O Oo O Information during screen switching is added Expansion Supports expansion reduction when i 2 32J O O O Reduction multiple objects and shapes are selected Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 24 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STANDARD OS APPENDICES INDEX Added common settings object functions ie Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Figure JPEG file reading enabled 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x i Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O C O ext Enables
269. ectric Corporation Yokogawa PLC Allen Bradley PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Allen Bradley SIEMENS PLC Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by SIEMENS OMRON temperature controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON FUJI temperature controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd YAMATAKE temperature controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by YAMATAKE RKC temperature controller Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC GOT server Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT client Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are Intelligent function module mounted to the base unit A 21 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Functions This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer2 Version2 32J For the added functions by the product version upgrade refer to the list of functions added by GT Desiger2 version upgrade in Appendices Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual Point P Refers to the information ck operation required a Remark Refers to the supplementary amp explanations for reference Carries out write j ad
270. ed the dialog 6 of completion is displayed Q r If touch OK button closes the dialog x 5 Zz O a Zo Zy 824 Move operation Files to be used in advanced recipe are moved P ate JE on Los Information P x ts AEROLECTINOPELO SGT D Select the file to be moved by touching it Za eiline sown ono acces ee fA aa CSV JOPELOG x K 310 Touch the Move button ee G10 fia Oo aon N OS 2 FEA DES GEO y 508 oak 155 72KB OKB 4F i le Ban 10 05 Copy Move Forder BOTT Del Renate List 3 a TE Select the target folder Rea Tein Cr card ae 7 y a E z 610 GPELO6_20060908 _0000 1K 03 08 06 11 18 T E k aa N E 5 G2 T 09 i 3 r 610 oPELOG 200603 10 0002 4K 03 10 06 13 33 moving directly below the drive Oy wo Ego TO x O W T U i 5 g D PKBZ15600B Jild E Please select 2 destination EPT Ba gt O Continued to next page z 5 Lu Qo gt zs to aD oa z O we Qo SE O z Zur eam 2ro 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 51 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Target tiie ARPOQ001 G1P 4 If touch the Execute button the dialog Do you want to move the file shown left is displayed Touch the button While executing Processing message appears on the screen Target file ARPOOOO1 G1P When any file with the same name exists Do you want to Overwrite the file in t
271. ed in logging is copied Size Date Time R L0G00001 1K 06 05 01 15 26 L0G00002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 L i 06 05 01 15 18 T gt Pha 16KB 15632KB BIL csV Copy Move pias GIL gt TK Del Rename Program Data Control elect Drive lame Size Date Time Rfi LOGOOOO1 1K 06 05 01 15 26 lal L0G00002 2K 06 05 01 15 26 a LOGOO001_0001 1K 06 05 01 15 18 T ha 820KB 15632KB SFile Please select dest ination Execute Cance Target file LOGO0001_0001 G1L Do you want to copy the fi le Target file LOGOO001_0001 G1L Do you want to overwrite the fi le Continued to next page 1 3 72 13 8 Logging Information 13 8 4 Logging information operation amp Touch and select the file to copy Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Excute button the following dialog shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button
272. ed to 75 65 55 or 45 When installing multiple units to the GOT use the stand with 75 or 65 degrees for securing lead in allowances for cables at the bottom of the GOT 2 Once the angle is determined insert the angle adjustment fitting s fixing hook into the hook insertion section on the bottom of the stand RA ee 9 Securely tighten the fixing screw 4 Insert the GOT from the front of Stand and install it to Stand Refer to the GT15 User s Manual for details on installing the GOT After the installation perform wiring etc 8 12 Stand 8 12 2 Installing procedure 8 13 Attachment The attachment is used to replace A960GOT AC97OGOT to GT1560 8 4 If use attachment when replace A960GOT or AC97OGOT to GT1560 there is no need of additional processing as mounting hole of the inside control panel etc which is used for A960GOT A97OGOT OVERVIEW 8 13 1 Applicable attachment The following attachments are applicable for GT1560 Description CONFIGURATION SYSTEM GT15 60ATT 96 A960GOT GT1560 Attachment for 8 4 GT15 70ATT 97 A970GOT GT1560 8 13 2 Installing procedure SPECIFICATIONS Hang the two upper hooks on the upper part over the mounting holes in the control panel PART NAME AND SETTINGS 2 While lifting the attachment upward hang the two lower hooks on the lower part of the control panel EMC AND LO
273. een additioned for the maintenance report function 5 It is necessary to install the RS 232 connector for the test 37 14 7 I O Check 6 It is necessary to install the option function board and the battery 9 2 Utility Function List 9 4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING zZ Q S ra Ww gt m STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 9 3 Utility Display To display setting screens fot each utility the main menu has to be displayed first Main Menu Communication setting Cal GOT setup Se Time setting amp display Program data control Debug amp self check ra Clean Maintenance timing setting braj Addition times reset 2 1 Main menu The menu items that can be set at the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item In this manual with a few special exceptions explanations are given primarily using the GT1575 V screens 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility or system alarms When touching the Language button the Select Language screen is displayed gt B RE English PRA PXD E Deutsch o 1 Touch the butto
274. eet EMC Directive 5 1 S1 EMO drcV esse serenan EEEn eee hers ate be eh the ee eed ae eee 5 2 5 1 2 Control panels cafe des aaa de Oa ee eal ean Vda weal La ee oh eG ees ee Be 5 4 5 1 3 Noise filter power supply line filter 2 2 eee 5 5 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 6 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT 2 tenet eee 5 6 52 2 Power Supply sue 4 ate aha tae Bea ae ee eee hee ee eee aia eae ee Ag 5 6 523 Control PAmel ssp te ate hen tes ae ek ade Bo ea es Dew gb Ae ae ety Re Bee aes aden Da Ane 5 7 O24 GROUNGING eaa daphne a a dle dgh aver doped E A aed aaa 5 7 9 220 JEXternal WINNG oe 256 banete a eal oe Ae es Bl ee WG ee 5 8 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 9 Did OU ato wee E E cat Meier etna tan aun ean wera aerate deka aetna eters 5 9 5 3 2 Connection method 0 00 ene 5 10 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used 0 eee 5 11 5 3 4 When the option unit is used 2 00000 eee 5 12 335 CADES sisiran aie ae ppi a a a prontep are thetebsedeadwed whee hes onde 5 12 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 13 5 4 1 Power and ground wires wiring method 0 0 cee eee 5 13 5 4 2 Processing connection cables 0 0 00 eee 5 14 54 3 Grounding the cable 0 2 eens 5 18 6 INSTALLATION 6 1to6 5 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 1 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 1 6 3 Mounting Pos
275. eiving data For monochrome display it is displayed as W lit or O not lit 2 Loop information Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit loop status No Item Description F loop Displays the status Normal NG of the F loop R loop Displays the status Normal NG of the R loop Displays the F loopback station execution status No per Number of the FLoopBK Sta F station at which loopback is executed Displays the R loopback station execution status No per Number of the c RLoopBK Sta station at which loopback is executed Displays the loopback status No per Perf No per Loop normal forward loop error reverse loop error Loop Back data link not possible Perf During loopback For the GT15 J71BR13 is displayed 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 14 22 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY m9 FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww p E ie O DISPLAY SECTION 3 Data link information Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit data link information communication status cause of communication suspension cause of communication stop No Item Description Displays the communication status of the host D Link i
276. en the human sensor OMin 10Sec to 60Min OSec detects no human movement until the Human lt At factory shipment OMin Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 b5 GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 10Sec gt X V S S turns OFF can be set 1 If setting 0 the title screen is not hidden The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data contents 2 The monitoring time corresponding to the sensor detect level 0 to 10 is as follows As the sensor detect level becomes greater the sensitivity of the human sensor becomes higher Sensor detect level 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Monitoring time s 0 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 3 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual Cs GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters Point 1 3 Display setting by GT Designer2 Set title display period screen save time and screen save backlight at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup Screen save time Using the system information function can
277. ent module monitor Network monitor Q motion monitor servo amplifier 14 1 monitor and CNC monitor Memory check Drawing check Font check Touch panel check I O check Self check 14 3 NETWK unit status display System alarm GOT errors CPU errors network errors 14 26 display GOT start time Time when the GOT was started 14 28 14 1 Debug In this manual the overview of the debugging function and the operation procedure until displaying the screen are described For display contents and operation procedure of debuggings refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual 14 1 1 The Debug function The Debug function is designed to confirm the device status of PLC CPU and to make the response for PLC system trouble more efficient The following shows the functions that can be performed with the Debug function Item System monitor Description The device of PLC CPU and buffer memory of intelligent function module can be monitored or tested Ladder monitor A list editor FX list editor The program of PLC CPU can be monitored in ladder format The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited The sequence program of FXCPU can be list edited Intelligent unit monitor Buffer memory in the intelligent function module can be monitored or the data can be changed on the dedicated screen And the signal status of I O modules can be monitored Network monitor T
278. er off the GOT 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel Remove the expansion unit cover on the right side of the GOT Remove the expansion unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted 4 Remove the GOT rear fixing screws 8 pcs with a screwdriver and remove the case Screw A must be tighten in the torque range of 0 186 to 0 245 N m as it is made of plastic Disconnect the cable connector of the upper H01 backlight and the cable connector of the lower H02 backlight from the GOT side connectors Press the upper backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left Similarly press the lower backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the following torque range Screw A 0 186 to 0 245 N m Other screws 0 36 to 0 48N m When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT 1 9 14 19 6 Backlight Replacement 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 3 Replacement 3 1 Power off the GOT 2 Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel ADDITION TIMES RES
279. er supply section For the connection to a controller refer to the following manual C gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual O For external dimensions of connection cable refer to the following Que lt gt Appendix 1 External Dimensions Onn mSa Remark General preventive measures against noise en There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and Zz Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines 2 Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to S the following 3 points 7 Z 1 Protecting against noise 7 a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high power drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated noise a Use a noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit WIRING 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its impedance c Ground the power system and the control system separately OPTION 7 1 Power Supply Wiring Point P Wiring the power section of the GT1550 when using an extension unit Be sure to wire the power section before connecting a cable to the extension unit If connecting a cable to the extension unit before wiring the power section the terminal block of the power section will be blocked by t
280. er to the following C gt 13 1 5 Display file 1 3 16 13 3 Project Information 13 3 3 Display example of project information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Zz fe o 5 Display operation of project information gt Touch the drive in Select drive The Ki Size Date ime Ea Aonar e a project data in that drive will be displayed D Touch the project data It is then selected and highlighted Sus Zgo Refer to the following for operation of SmE delete copy property data check O20 download upload ul Delete n L this section bO58KB 2F ile A Ese COPY eee C gt this section oz Delete Copy Download Up load 28 Property oe lt gt this section See why Data check lt gt this section n00 Download setup A E K gt this section ee 2 Upload setup cancel Feo WEoO EET L gt this section Do oak D Touching lt lt button closes the screen Ob Delete operation This operation deletes the selected file Touch and select the file to delete FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao Q Delete project data Screen mentioned left is displayed if PROJECT 1 Delete button is touched Do you want to delete Confirm the deletion targeted file is 5 specified correctly E If touch OK button the file is deleted al If touch Cancel button the deletion is K
281. erless terminal with insulation sleeve 2 When connection is made between LG and FG terminals be sure to connect them to the ground Otherwise the system becomes susceptible to noise Since the LG terminal has potential equal to a half of the input voltage touching the terminal may lead to an electric shock 3 When grounding the GT1550 ground it with the ground terminal equipped at the lower left corner on the GOT main unit back face Refer to the above Use the FG power terminal for connecting the FG wire of the bus connection cable 7 4 Power Supply Connection 8 OPTION a S fiz W 8 1 CF Card 5 The CF card is used to transfer the OS or project data and to save data of the alarm history function or other functions 5 Refer to the following for details lt K gt 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL fa 2 nz 8 8 1 1 Applicable CF card 2 The following CF cards are applicable for GT1500 2 lt Mode Description E GT05 MEM 16MC Flash ROM 16MB a GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB Q GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB Z W GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB g Commercially available CF card a 7 E aw 1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference
282. erm repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not availabl
283. es for the BootOS standard monitor OS installation 1 Installing when starting the GOT c 18 3 1 All the OS and project data stored in the memory card are transferred to the GOT when powering on the GOT This installing method is effective in the following cases e The GOT utility cannot be displayed e The standard monitor OS is not installed 2 Installing using the Program Data control function Utility gt 18 3 1 By operating the utility select OS or project data stored in the memory card and transfer them to the GOT Point f Precautions on installing BootOS standard monitor OS 1 Installing both BootOS and standard monitor OS After completing BootOS installation install standard monitor OS When installing BootOS the built in flash memory in the GOT is initialized and goes to the status at factory shipment All OS and project data are erased BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when not upgrading it 2 Copying project data using a CF card After installing BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS download the project data At this time match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created 3 When OS and project data are in the CF card when using GT Designer2 For a 2 point press installation after the OS installation is complete the project data is downloaded Whe
284. es the set contents The displayed language will not be changed until is performed With do not push OK button If touch gt lt button without touching OK if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is displayed 6 value will be canceled 5 0K 5 5 Zz O a 529 If close the display setting and GOT setup Shr F O5 u screens after completing the setting of all 020 items to change with x button GOT 11 restarts and reflects the setting contents 1 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual a Zz Tog gt E lt s2Z Qi Ooty AON K7 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters Brightness Contrast 6 z gt Refer to the following for brightness contrast setting Feo WEG N L gt 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment lt a o9z Oxun A Z lt z a a O gt wo 30 EO x O W a O z Lu N e O Oo Zz O So Ze 25 Bio oA Z O wg ae Zu gt 25 oS Zur SEY 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 9 11 1 3 Display setting operations Human sensor a a GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X V S S Setting item is changed if setting item is Language English nia TA to
285. escribes how to install a communication unit on a GOT 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers Bus connection unit NOILVYENSISANOO WALSAS GT15 QBUS GT15 ABUS 1 Power OFF the GOT SNOILVOISIDSdS Remove one of the extension unit covers of the GOT SONILLAS ANY AWVN LHYd Fit the communication unit along the groove of the GOT case JAI L03H1A ASVLIOA MO ANY OWS li 4 Fasten the communication unit by tightening its mounting screws 2 places with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48 N m ONMIM feo O Mpa Li co x Z gt 3 23 59 oO os Q gs Ss Es 56 2 Os NN oN 5 When installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed refer to the following 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When not installing an extension unit on the unit that has been installed in order to avoid receiving electrostatic stick accessory labels to cover the top of mounting screws 2 places Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the seal stuck as it is Accessory labels Connector cover 2 GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 D Power OFF the GOT Remove the expansion unit covers I F 1 side and I F 2 side of the GOT rear face Install the extend interface relay board on the Extend I F 2 side of the GOT After the installation detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board For
286. eset switch 14 Reset switch a _ Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 15 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 16 Battery holder Houses the battery 1 Itis provided for the GT1575V S only 2 For the multi color display board refer to the following 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 Remark Connector used for the RS 232 interface _ oc The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT157 0 is as follows A GOT model name Hardware version Connector u O GT1575 STBA A March 2006 or later Manufacturer DDK Ltd Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent GT1575 STBD A March 2006 or later product z Manufact Honda Tsushin K Co Ltd B April 2005 or before anufacturer Honda Tsushin ogyo O e GT1575 STBA Model name GM C9RMDU11 or equivalent product T C April 2005 or later Manufacturer DDK Ltd 2 Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent 5 2 GT1575 STBD A July 2005 or later product 9 D April 2005 or before Manufacturer Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd GT1575 VTBA Model name GM C9RMDU11 or equivalent product E April 2005 or later e O GT1575 VTBD A July 2005 or later E o GT1575 VNBA A July 2005 or later Manufacturer DDK L
287. etighten connector fixing connectors screws 19 2 19 1 Daily Inspection Continued to next page No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Replace with new battery when the current battery has reached the specified life span even if battery voltage low is not Check GOT internal battery voltage status 5 Battery in Time setting amp No alarm appears display of the Utility Refer to 13 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION displayed w 1 19 3 Cleaning Method 208 Eta Use GOT always in a clean condition 592 To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent or ethanol zan 9 Clean S lt x s 26 GS simultaneously 5 a 2 Lu O vA SG De ae 24 wut C J n uw 8 a Zz W a lt Point gt Precautions for cleaning Do not use solvents such as acetone benzene toluene and alcohol since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices ii Zz 19 3 Cleaning Method 1 9 3 19 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement The battery is used for backing up the present time or the maintenance time notification data It is recommended that you replace battery periodically Refer to the followin
288. f Display check the screen for drawing check is Touch displayed Drawing check Point gt Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases 1 There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color 2 There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn according to the layout and procedures described in Section 13 3 3 Display and Operation of Drawing Check When missing bits occurs contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 1 4 z7 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 1 Drawing check function 14 4 3 Drawing check operation The screen for drawing check can be displayed by touching Drawing check on the Display check menu Before execute drawing check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during drawing check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Missing bit Color Check Upper left touch position Upper right touch position O r By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order black red gt purple green light blue yellow gt white Check missing bit and color visually Light blue To 2 Basic figure check screen If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen the following 2 Basic figure check screen is displayed 14 4 D
289. file BootOS or standard 200 monitor OS installation we 25 When GOT is remote installed gt a GOT easily using the memory card 4 ee the cor Z i ua GT Designer2 Memory card card in GOT Qs go Ze GOT Memory card gt GOT u Q 2a OS file upload BootOS standard lt 2 A monitor OS installation Va 24 ane Install OS from GOT to GOT GOT gt on 3 GOT using memory card 4 the e inf Memory card card in GOT Q p we For details of the installation using GT Designer2 refer to the following x es O PETE KA lt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transmission Manual vzg Point f CoreOS In 18 1 to 18 4 of this chapter only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described For CoreOS refer to the following 2 Zz lt gt Section 18 5 CoreOS a lt x lt W A zZ 18 1 18 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location Requied for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT Installed at factory shipment BootOS can be installed from GT Designer2 or the CF card When installed Built in flash memory poe from GT Designer2 or the CF card GOT is initialized to be the factory shipment C G1BOOT status Standard monitor OS must be pre installed in the GOT when installing the BootOS again Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring f
290. file on the personal computer refer to the following manual Specifications and operating procedure are described L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 13 1 Advanced Recipe Function Function of advanced recipe information For the advanced recipe file used in advanced recipe function copy delete file output are available In addition it is possible to writing reading into from a controller by using this function without creating the screen to operate the advanced recipe Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer2 is required Function Description Refer to Displaying file i The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 44 13 46 folder data G1P gt CSV G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to CSV file 13 47 conversion G1P TXT eet Sia A Advanced G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to Unicode text file 13 47 conversion Recipe Information Del File or folder is deleted 13 49 screen Copy File is copied 13 50 Move File is moved 13 51 Rename File name is changed 13 53 Create Folder New folder is created 13 54 Create G1P New G1P file of advanced recipe file is created 13 55 Load record Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller 13 57 GOT gt PLC Save record elvan The device of controller is saved in selected record 13 58 Recipe PLC GOT Record List Match records i pi Scheer Sele
291. force 0 98N max Human Detection length 1 39 37 m inch Detection range Left Right Top Bottom 70 degrees PS Detection delay time 0 to 4s C drive Built in flash memory 9Mbytes for storing project data and OS Memory Life Number of 499 000 times write times Battery GT15 BAT lithium battery Option Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambiant temperature of 25 C Buzzer output 3 2 Single tone tone length adjustable Continued to next page 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 1 GT1595 X Kai Specifications GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD RS 232 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps gt m Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male S RS aae Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer Project data upload doxnload OS installation transparent function z USB Full Speed 12Mbps 1ch Built in USB Connector shape Mini B interface Application PC communication screen data upload download OS E L installation and FA transparent function Do Compact flash slot 1ch 3 CF card Connector shape TYPE I Application Data transfer data storage g Option function board For option function board mounting 1ch z Multi color display board For multi color display board mounting 1ch g Extension unit For communication unit option unit mounting 2ch a Buzzer output
292. function SzH Standard monitor 6 x 8 dot font ASCII characters OS information os 24 dot numerical HQ font screen Standard CF card A G1SYS 2 32 dot numerical HQ font or Q TrueType numerical font Built in flash memory C G1SYS 2 25a 12 dot standard font az Sa uaa 16 dot standard font Sai Extended function OS Option OS Communication driver o ONE Project data hae LD User created screen data eee WEG Project Standard CF card A PROJECT1 3 VO Comment data l oLa information or oak 12 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic ne 1983 ozh screen Built in flash memory C PROJECT1 16 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic 1 3 TrueType Mincho Gothic x Qa Advanced alarm log file CSV file 4 a R gt Advanced alarm log file TXT file 4 Alarm Si z information a Advanced alarm log file binary file screen Oy P w Alarm log file CSV file I0 wo Hard copy file BMP file 4 Hard copy information Hard copy file JPG file Reales Sandara CE card eh Resource data With GT Designer2 any folder name or file name can 5 Advanced recipe file CSV file Advanced be specified 2 z recipe Advanced recipe file TXT file 4 p S information a Advanced recipe file binary file 4 screen 5 z oO Operation log file CSV file 4 Operation log Operation log file TXT file 4 information Operation log file binary file a SIEEN 5 we The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data On S P ia aT On 2 Each folder is created
293. g 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Point gt Precautions on executing program data control function When execute program data control function standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance Thus this function cannot be used for the initial installation of BootOS standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods 1 GT Designer2 2 Installing when starting the GOT Operation procedure Power OFF the GOT After CF card access LED is off install the CF card in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT Display the program data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS from the CF card to GOT C i Flash memory caa 2934KB 02442K5 Ti instant Uptoad Proverty Data check Touch Install 1 8 6 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function 4 CF card access LED is lit during install execution Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the CF card access card is lit ADDITION TIMES RESET m FOR MAINTENANCE eve TIME NOTIFICATION Install now cL a 4 aad am z n z 26 Z lt 3 De OQ 5z of an G
294. g for the replacement procedure _ 8 9 Battery The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility and system alarm Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility lt 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT To display the following message on system alarm set Battery alarm display to ON C 11 1 1 Display setting functions System alarm 500 Warning Built in battery voltage is low Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display C gt gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Point f Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for 14 days after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that C gt gt 8 9 4 Battery life 1 9 4 19 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 19 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection and Replacement The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight When replace th
295. g information operation If touch the button the dialog shown left is displayed Touch the button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the the file If touch the moving OK button overwrites Cancel button cancels When moving is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the dialog OK button closes the g Rename operation z sii An operation log file is changed Q R Program Data Control Operation Log Information x p r E o amp Select the file to be renamed by IR a im E S10 opeLoe pooposoaLooo SK 03 00 06 09 23 A touching CSV OPE 7K 03 38 G10 Mae 33 2 O a 30 A M ha 155 72KB OKB 4F i le sony toy owe pA 610 gt 7XT Del Rename List Q Zz Sg xI If touch the Rename button displays the Bice Path Name reen shown left then input the fil cham A PROJECT 1 OPELOG re ee en ee AOD Ere rs name to be renamed LINE A LOS By touching the following button input text type is changed O Zz A Z English capital me N 0 9 Numeric Symbol lt a Soe LIXICIVIBINJM Enter 32h If touch the Enter button displays the A Before Z
296. g the CoreOS installation once it cannot be canceled on the way Do not attempt the followings to cancel the installation on the way The GOT may not operate e Powering the GOT off e Pressing the GOT reset button If the GOT does not operate please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative If the GOT does not recover even when installing the CoreOS the error may be caused by a hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS Before installing the CoreOS 1 Installing procedureThe CoreOS can be installed only when using a memory card Installation via USB RS 232 Ethernet is not available 2 Memory card to be used Memory card of 32MB or more is required 3 Boot OS When installing the CoreOS the latest BootOS is also installed automatically Operation by the user is not required 18 5 CoreOS 18 11 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS ADDITION TIMES RESET ey FOR MAINTENANCE eve TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES INDEX Installing the CoreOS Write the CoreOS from GT Designer2 to the CF card For details of GT Designer2 operation refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Communicate with Memor
297. h Installation will be canceled The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT Installation will be canceled Confirm the version of OS The GOT type selected at Core OS write of the GT Designer2 is not correct Confirm the GOT type and perform Core OS write again Install CoreOS from the latest GT Designer2 Memory card access switch is off Turn on the switch and restart the GOT Installation will be canceled 18 5 CoreOS The CF card access switch is off Turn the switch on and restart the GOT 18 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 19 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION lt DANGER ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire These may cause the buttery to burst or fire e Do not touch the terminals while the power is on 5 Doing so can cause an electric shock 596 e Before starting cleaning or retightening the terminal screws always switch off the external power Soe supplies used in the system in all phases 229 Cleaning or retightening the terminal screws while the power is on may cause an electric shock 208 e Before changing the backlight always switch off the GOT power externally in all phases when the GOT is connected to the bus the PLC CPU power must also be switched off externally in all phases and 9 remove the GOT from the control panel Not switch
298. he PLC Y Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on PLC CPU Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Y Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2 at IN side to further locate the error positions Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on the GOT 2 bus connection unit Yy Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1 at OUT side to further locate the error positions Y Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error will not occur The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1 to the GOT 2 is judged faulty Replace the faulty bus connection cable with a new one End 20 16 20 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting 20 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring This section describes the countermeasures when GOT does not display the monitor screen GOT does not display the screen ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION w YES Zag POWER LED of GOT is off Turn on the power supply of GOT a Iu he Doe Zan NO Q YES Backlight OFF during screen saving is set m GOT POWER LED is lit in orange The setting of screen saving can be set 2 in the G
299. he built in iy flash memory which is completed in around 10 seconds eroras sielen ETEA 3 eb FI 10 Dell Enter 13 2 Memory Check 13 2 3 Memory check operation The above is different from the actual page as it is provided for explanation only A 22 PACKING LIST After unpacking confirm that the following parts are included Model Description Quantity GOT 1 GT1595 X Installation fitting 8 GT15 General Description 1 GT1585V S GT1585 S GT1575V S GOT 1 GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT1565 V GT1562 VN Installation fitting 4 GT1555 Q GT1550 Q GT15 General Description 1 The following products are included a spare for the plastic fixing screw of the GOT e GT1585 S Hardware Version B or earlier Apr 2005 e GT1575 S Hardware Version B or earlier Apr 2005 GT1575 V Hardware Version D or earlier Apr 2005 GT1565 V Hardware Version D or earlier Apr 2005 A 23 1 OVERVIEW About GOT GOT is installed on the panel surface of control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC in the control panel GOT carries out switch PLC operation lamp display data display and message display etc For display screen two kinds of display screens user created screen program and utility screen are available 1 2 User created Screen User screen is a screen drawn by GT Designer2 GOT The objects of Touch switch Lam
300. he cable and the power section cannot be wired e Make wiring connections to the power supply I O equipment and power equipment separately by system as shown below When frequent noise is identified connect an isolation transformer Wiring diagram for power supply GOT Isolation k transformer Main power power oS oN e O Oo s O O 3 GOT I O power ZS Oo oO Main circuit power oy Oo 0O gt Main circuit equipment gt I O equipment e Twist 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable as closely as possible and connect the cable of the minimum length between modules Also use the thickest cable as possible Max 2mm to minimize the voltage drop Use M3 solderless terminals and securely tighten them with a tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 8Nem so that no problem will result Separate the 100V AC 200V AC or 24V DC cable from the main circuit lines high voltage large current and or I O signal lines Keep a distance of 100mm or more As measures against surge due to lightning connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below Lightning surge absorber connection L GOT AG 5 i i I O equipment as E2 __ Lightning surge absorber Point 1 Separate the grounding of the lightning surge absorber E1 from the grounding of the GOT E2 2 Select an appropriate lightning surge absorber so that the supply voltage does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit vol
301. he destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the ok button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels moving Process conpleted When moving is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog 1 3 52 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Before ARPOO001 G1P After LINE A_RECIPE G1P Change fi lename x O W x O W h ee W Process coisleted When renaming is completed completion dialog is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog O E of 2 N Ez lt x Mi E 4D oA Z O wg lt Sle iO Zur lt SEO If touch the Enter button displays the dialog shown left E If touch the OK renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen button starts 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 53 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation g Rename operation z File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed S ra Prog Data Control Operation Log Information p ER NA sa ae TE amp Select the file to be renamed by 2 DIR ee E G10 PELOG 20060300 0001 aK 03 00 06 oo 23 Al fouching CSV OPE 7K_03 38 G10 ME 33 Zz an 220
302. he file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function RES BD 9 Remark ees Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders Displayed folders and files For the folders and files displayed refer to the following lt 3 13 1 5 Display file 13 2 OS Information 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 13 9 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND m CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION se STATUS DISPLAY 5 oO ie GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Display operation of OS information 13 10 i A Built in CF card RI C Flash Memory Program Data control 0S information belect drive IC G1SYS Name Size Date Time OUT G 10SMONT 1156K 08 06 05 02 31 500K 08 06 05 02 31 406K 08 06 05 02 31 1K 08 06 05 02 31 302K 08 06 05 02 31 40K 08 06 05 02 31 456K 02 27 04 06 33 1K 02 27 04 06 33 107K 08 06 05 02 31 55K 02 27 04 06 33 058KB
303. he final H 7 fo 1 Im stage GOT and the bus connection l I lt Lj hays N N F cable before the final stage may be M are w er faulty a aA Raa x O x io w WW i gt 2 ja lt x a lt a lt Point gt Notes on narrowing the error part range 1 When disconnecting the extension base units in order use only an END instruction for the sequence program and any error resulting from the sequence o program will not occur and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained a easily a 2 When the frequency of occurrence of an error is low check the error by taking a g rather long time with the modules disconnected The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis operation is caused by noise al a z 20 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 20 15 20 3 2 Further locating error positions 20 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting Taking the following system as an example troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred When QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used PLC main base unit GOT 1 GOT 2 Extension cable z Bus connection Bus connection cable cable Y Check the error code step appearing on the PLC CPU Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs The SP UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU Y Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of t
304. he following methods Execute addition time reset e Switch OFF each bit of maintenance time notification cancel information GS638 Maintenance ae points Item Description Setting range Unit Reference page Backlight Sets energization time for the maintenance i notification output O to 100 maintenance time 1000 When 0 no message notification lt At factory 18 5 notification period Pair ae i hours The time is counted only when backlight is lit shipment 0 gt 0 to 100000 hour in every ten minutes Display section Sets energization time for the maintenance f f notification output 0 to 100 maintenance time 1000 j i When 0 no message notification lt At factory notification period one F j hours The time is counted only when energized in shipment 0 gt 0 to 100000 hour every ten minutes Touch key Sets touch key touching count for the 046 200 maintenance time maintenance notification output 10000 j lt At factory notification count When 0 no message notification hi wos times 0 to 2000000times Counts by every screen touch Snipment Built in flash memory Sets built in flash memory writing count for the maintenance notification output 0 to 200 maintenance time i 1000 j When 0 no message notification lt At factory notification count ae aoe times Counts by every writing in built in flash shipment 0 gt 0 to 1000000times memory By using
305. he network status of the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNETI II and MELSECNET B can be monitored Motion monitor The servo monitoring and parameter settings of the motion controller CPU Q series are available Servo amplifier monitor Various monitor functions parameter change test operation etc of the servo amplifier are available CNC monitor Functions equivalent to the MELDAS dedicated display such as Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor Tool Offset Param and Program Monitor are available This is not supported by the GT155 D 14 1 14 1 Debug 14 1 1 The Debug function 14 1 2 Display operation of Debug Zz O E Main menu Debug amp self check 2 gt 9 3 Utility Display 2 gt E Touch the debug to Abe operated 6 Debug amp self check E ow o Zz lt O E C O20 Debug is displayed For System monitor 2z DEV MON BAT MON TC MON lt By BM MON IRE Q Chno Gay Q0n 1 N ONE raem FEA TEZ isa lt 8 oak 0f5 Q Z lt z Si pE 2 a W i
306. he public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States Other company and product names herein may be either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL Tooo GT15 User s Manual MODEL GT 15 U SHO E MODEL 1D7M23 ODE SH NA O80528ENG F 0606 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUIL
307. he screen mentioned left is displayed Su If touch the OK button setup cancel is 532 TE Cancel executed sia Disable setup is completed D When the setup cancel is completed the Restart now dialog mentioned left is displayed Zz Touching the OK button restarts the zee GOT THE After restart the GOT monitors with the anu project data in the C drive FEA Mere DEO lt o5 oak oto FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO O GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 3 Project Information 1 3 25 13 3 4 Operation of project information 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information The extended alarm log file or alarm log file held by each drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory is displayed The functions below can be carried out for files For details of Advanced Alarm refer to the following manual C gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Function Description Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays name data size creation date and time of file or folder 13 27 13 28 G1A CSV conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to CSV file 13 29 G1A TXT conversion Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to TXT file 13 29 Deletion Deletes file 13 17 Copy Copys file 13 18 Graph Displays the advanced alarm watch result by historical graph or
308. he static electricity Not doing so can cause a unit corruption Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When loading the communication unit or printer unit to the GOT fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit When mounting the multi color display board onto the GOT tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Loose tightening may cause the unit and or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact Overtightening may damage the screws unit and or GOT they might malfunction Push the option function board onto the corresponding connector until it clicks so that it will be secured firmly Push the multi color display board onto the corresponding connector so that it will be secured firmly When inserting a CF card into the
309. heck 14 12 14 5 1 Fontcheck Tunction ee sta can 2 ncaa Pega aida eat aea tia ad eae deWiaha he nelle 14 12 14 5 2 Display operation of Font check 000 0 eee eee 14 12 14 5 3 Font check operation naasse aasan ee 14 13 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 14 14 6 1 Touch panel check function 00 00000 eee 14 14 14 6 2 Display operation of Touch panel check 0 000 cee eee eee 14 14 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations 0 0000 14 15 14 7 I O Check 14 16 147A VOchetk f nction c s seo 23k ee nS Baa oe ad aos wee Pe Pu ae ae SS aed 14 16 14 7 2 Display operation of I O Check 0 0000 eee 14 16 14 7 3 I O Check Operation 0 0 0002 14 17 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 20 14 8 1 Functions of the NETWK unit status display 0 0 00 14 20 14 8 2 Displaying the NETWK unit status display 0 2 00 ee eee 14 20 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display MELSECNET H communication unit 14 21 14 9 System Alarm Display 14 26 14 9 1 System alarm display function 0 000 ce eee 14 26 14 9 2 Displaying the system alarm display 0 000 ee ae 14 26 14 9 3 Operating the system alarm display 00 cee eee 14 27 14 10 GOT Start Time 14 28 14 10 1 GOT start time function 0000000 14 28 14 10 2 Display operation of GOT start time nnana aana aaa ee 14 28 14 10 3 Display of GOT start time 0 0
310. hed part becomes a yellow filled display Black filled screen If touch the upper left part returns to the self check N Upper left touch position Remark Checking the upper left part of the screen Em Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returnes to the self check by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally 1 4 15 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations 14 7 I O Check Zz O o 14 7 1 I O check function 2 The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other 5 If I O check ends normally the communication interface and the connection cable hardwares are normal To execute I O check the communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designer2 Refer to the following for the details related to the installation of the communication driver Z C gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Sw 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Szo Suit ene 824 Point P Precautions for executing I O check function TT Only the RS 232 Interface communication interface can carry out the I O check function E The connection with RS 422 is possible by installing the RS 422 conversion unit to lt 8 the RS 232 interface 2 Ow aon 14 7 2 Display operation of I O Check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check Fug gt gt 9
311. hen the backlight goes out The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor screen appears blank The display section of the GT1595 X is an analog resistive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit printer unit option function board or multi color display board onto from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the multi color display board wear an earth band etc to avoid t
312. ide device side Output side device side 2 Connect the noise filter s ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest cable as possible approx 10cm 3 94 in or less 5 5 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 1 3 Noise filter power supply line filter 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive a Z The Low Voltage Directive requires each device which operates with power supply ranging from 50VAC to m 1000V and 75VDC to 1500V to satisfy necessary safety items 2 In the Sections from 5 2 1 to 5 2 5 cautions on installation and wiring of the GOT to conform to the Low Voltage Directive requires are described We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the 6 Directive that we have collected z However compatibility of the devices which are fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the z2 above Directive is not guaranteed Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the final ro judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility aS 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT 2 Standard applied to GOT EN61131 2 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests F EN60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment g O W 5 2 2 Power supply 2 The insulation specification of the GOT was designed assuming installation category Il Be sure to use the installation category II p
313. ide GOTs connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit z power and ground them with a cable 2 O zZ 4 Zz O e oO O 7 2 Wiring of Connection Cables T 3 7 3 Grouding Make sure to carry out the followings for grounding e Carry out the independent grounding if possible If the independent grounding is impossible carry out the shared grounding as shown in fig 2 below Other Other Other GOT device GOT device GOT device Grounding j Centre J FN 1 Independent ground 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding ais Best condition Good condition Not allowed Use the cable of 2mm or more for grounding Set the grounding point closer to the GOT to make the grounding cable short as possible Example of independent grounding Power equipment servo etc PLC z Connection cable F E H CN1A CN1B LG CN2 CN3 Yo FG co GOT LG Ground terminal block Panel Ground grounding terminal block Grounding for control system Grounding for power system Ground the control system especially modules communicating each other to one end Example of shared grounding Power equipment servo etc l i ne Connection cable
314. ied Lit in orange Screen saving Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the utility and the user creation screen 4 For installing the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit or RGB 4 Video RGB interface l output unit For connecting a personal computer 5 USB interface Connector type MINI B For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 6 RS 232 interface Connector type D sub 9 pin 7 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 8 Extension unit interface For installing an extension unit 9 CF card interface For installing a CF card Lit CF card accessed 10 CF card access LED i Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 11 CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board 12 For installing the optional function board interface For installing the multi color display board Multi color display board 13 Wace For GT1575 VN and GT1572 VN 65536 color display is not supported even with interface the multi color display board installed Hardware r
315. ighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the following torque range i Screw A 0 186 to 0 245 N m Other screws 0 36 to 0 48 N m z When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT a A A z 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 11 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight For GT15 60VLTT or GT15 60VLTN Backlight replacement varies with the hardware version of the applicable GOT Before replacement please confirm the hardware version Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed standards Type Hardware version Reference D April 2005 or earlier 2 Replacement procedure 2 GT1565 VTBA E March 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1565 VTBD A Jul 2005 or later 1 Replacement procedure 1 GT1562 VNBA A Sep 2005 or later 3 Replacement procedure 3 GT1562 VNBD A Sep 2005 or later 3 Replacement procedure 3 1 Replacement 1 D Power off the GOT Disconnect the power supply cable and communication cable Remove the GOT from the control panel amp Remove the expansion unit cover on the right side of the GOT Remove the expansion unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Expanded figure of part A in 1 9 12 19 6 Backlight Replaceme
316. igned automatically Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channel Driver assign ChNo RS232 BY Supply ChNo USB 9 Host PC 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 1 E EET 2 ChNa L Non ChNa L None 3 4 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 Definition of ChNo None 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection 1 ChNo 1 CCommunication driver installed at 1st 3 ChNo 3 CCommunication driver installed at 3rd 4 ChNo 4 CCommunication driver installed at 4th a After communication driver is assigned automatically 2 ChNo 2 CCommunication driver installed at 2nd When saving the settings to the GOT with OK button after the automatic assignment of communication driver automatic assignment will not be performed at the next time and after 1 0 5 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Communication setting contents b Priority against Communication Settings of GT Designer2 If download the communication settings to the GOT with GT Designer2 after the automatic assignment the GOT will operate with the communication settings of the GT Designer2 The GOT operates with the latest communication settings When the communication driver does not match with the unit that is installed in the GOT An error is displayed on the GOT when displaying Communi
317. imeout Confirm communication pathway or modules 16 31 34 CPU error ChNo 1 1600Battery voltage low or equipment fault Network error No Error Point P 1 Before resetting System Alarm display T Eliminate each cause before resetting system alarms Without eliminating causes System Alarm display cannot be reset even when touching the Reset button 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset e GOT error code Write device e GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 1 4 27 14 9 System Alarm Display 14 9 3 Operating the system alarm display 14 10 GOT Start Time Zz fe o Zz 14 10 1 GOT start time function T a GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time 5 e Start time of GOT e Current time of GOT e Operating hours of GOT 5 q i Ow 14 10 2 Display operation of GOT start time Z20 sre zua Szo Main menu Debug amp self check lt 7 9 3 Utility Display a 2a 28 a5E z oik ty Touch GOT start time AOD Touch Debug amp self check N 2 gt FEA HUWA WEG 523 ook GOT start time Bes Debug self check Start time GOT Start Time Start Time Q a 11 10 2005 THU 15 59 20 Z Current Time 11 10 2005 THU 16 02 20 Z Si Operating hours mE fal Q i a 1S W ac O 4 Ww N k O O CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME N
318. ing GOT D sub 9 pin female GT01 C30R2 25P Cable length 3m Project data and PC D sub 25 pin male transfer cable For connecting GOT USB mini and PC GT01 C20USB 5P Cable length 2m USB For connecting GOT USB mini and PC GT09 C30USB 5P Cable length 3m USB 2 18 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 3 SPECIFICATIONS D bp a W 3 1 General Specifications 3 fe Item Specifications Operating Display section 0 to 50 C 5 ambient Other than 5 i 0 to 55 C temperature 1 display section m z Z Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C gt Q Operating ambient humidity 6 10 to 90 RH non condensing 3 Storage ambient humidity 6 10 to 90 RH non condensing d Half 2 Frequency Acceleration f Sweep Count amplitude x Conforms to Under 5 to 9Hz 3 5mm g JIS B3502 intermittent i O Vibration resistance 2 F 9 to 150Hz 9 8m s2 10 times each and vibration O in X Y and Z 1IEC61131 2 Under 5 to 9Hz 1 75mm Aso f t directions continuous eae 9 to 150Hz 4 9m s o vibration Z Shock resistance Conforms to JIS B3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s2 3 times each in X Y and Zdirections gt g Operating atmosphere No corrosive gas zZ x Operating altitude 2000 m 6562 ft max pam Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage category ll or less Pollution degree gt 2 or less z Cooling method Self cooling amS 225
319. ing a personal computer 4 USB interface Connector type MINI B For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal computer 5 RS 232 interface i Connector type D sub 9 pin 6 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 7 Extension unit interface For installing an extension unit 8 CF card interface For installing a CF card Lit CF card accessed 9 CF card access LED Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 10 CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board 11 l For installing the optional function board interface Multi color display board 12 For installing the multi color display board interface Hardware reset switch 13 Reset switch NUO n Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 14 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 15 Battery holder Houses the battery 16 Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement 17 Installation switch Used for OS installations at the GOT startup Remark ed 1 For the multi color display board refer to the following L3 3 2 1 GT1595 x Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the cconnector used for the RS
320. ing off the power in all phases may cause an electric shock Not removing the unit from the control panel can cause injury due to a drop CAUTION MAINTENANCE AND m z O O W Q a z e Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the GOT directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to GOT do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Before insert remove the connection cable power off the GOT Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction When replacing the backlight use the gloves Otherwise it may cause you to be injured Start changing the backlight more than 5 minutes after switching the GOT power off Not doing so can cause a burn due to the heat of the backlight Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted on the unit Doing so can cause the battery to be damaged due to the drop or the impact making the battery liquid to leak in the battery Do not use but dispose the battery that is dropped or given an im
321. install printer on GOT E A printer unit and another extension unit can be installed on a GOT together Refer to the following item after implementing the steps described in this section a One printer unit can be installed at either 1st to 3rd stage of the exteded interface i lt 77 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers Cable connection z o Q Connect the dedicated printer connection cable to the printer unit S S bE a o sow a tora T connection cable One Zox w gt O0 Attach the accessory connector holder to the dedicated printer connection cable and tighten the screw of connector holder with tightening torque of 0 36 to 0 48N m z Z 8 5 Printer Unit 8 5 1 Printer unit type 3 Depending on the use environment such as when fastening cable is difficult attach a cable clamp to the printer unit Be sure to attach the cable clamp to section A see the following figure with its band positioned outside and press it until it clicks For the band inserting direction refer to the arrow As a cable clamp RST 1NB manufactured by TAKEUCHI INDUSTRY CO LTD is used ol 2 R N S Cable clamp 4 Insert the dedicated printer connection cable in the looped cable clamp band and pull the band to fasten the cable Unit installation Power off the GOT 2 Remove one extension unit cover of the GOT In the case a cable clamp is attached 8 12 8 5 Printer Unit 8 5
322. ion 11 12 Display operation of brightness contrast 11 12 Buffer circuit Cable cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 2 6 Bus connection unit cee eee cece ee eseeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 8 14 Bus connector conversion DOxX 2 0 s0eeeee 2 11 Bus extension connector bOX 2 0eseeeeees 2 11 C CC Link communication unit ce 2 5 8 14 CF Canis eea uaa a lige ete ad atia 2 12 8 1 Applicable CF Card cceeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 8 2 CO ANN sits EPEE AA ET bya he tent den identity ste 15 1 Cleaning Method ceeceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeaes 19 3 Display operation of clean 00eeeeees 15 1 Operation of Clean 2 c cecceeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 15 2 Cleaning of display section ceeeeeeeeereeeeeees 15 1 Communication detail settingS cee 10 12 Communication detail settings display operation Index 1 10 12 Communication detail settings functions 10 12 Display contents of communication detail settings 10 14 Key word registration deletion and protection delete 10 15 Communication interface setting eeee 10 1 Communication Setting 0 0 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 1 Communication setting contents ee 10 2 Communication setting display operation 10 1 10 7 Communication setting functions 10 1 Co
323. ion AGE A drive Standard CF card Sai C drive Built in flash memory N ARD aS oak OZ 3 FILE DISPLAY AND m gt Q ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 1 13 1 1 Drive name allocation 13 1 2 Datatype and the storage location System The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below E GOT main unit BootOS Project data 7 D ae D Download C drive Built in flash memory pea Sa Upload Project BootOS Install Upload BOS dale GT Designer2 Download Project Ags data aa A Drive Q Copy files on Windows Project Standard CF card data when installed in GOT Write Project data OS Standard CF card when installed in PC Inserting Removing 1 3 2 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 2 Data type and the storage location At maintenance 5 5 E COT main unit Z i gt Resource data C drive 6 Built in flash memory 5 ow 220 5 Zy Si PC OZD GT Designer2 A Drive 2z Soa Standard CF card i ggz when installed in GOT Cogging Copy files on Windows puk EER p e gt Inserting Removing Q 255 Logging Fuig PEA Hard copy xiL Standard CF card ook when installed in PC OLN Instal
324. ion and vertical j Image Quality and Color Tone 100 to 100 Video Display Settings direction and image quality color tone lt At factory shipment 0 gt Contrast 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt contrast brightness color intensity can be set The captive area and image quality can Brightness 100 to 100 be set for each channel lt At factory shipment 0 gt Intensity 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt 1 1 34 11 10 Video Display Settings 11 10 1 Functions of the video display settings 11 10 2 Displaying the video display settings z O Main Menu 5 9 3 Utility Display Z Video RGB Setting x 5 Touch 2 GOT steup bel video Display Settings 5 Communication Settings Video RGB Setting e 10 1 Communication Setting Su 28 WE O20 Touch Video Display Settings 1 Video RGB Shanne AT che crs cra Captive Area Hor izont 1 000 Vertical 000 a Zz Tog gt E IgE Tuc Mow AON Image Quality Co lor Tone 000 Contrast 000 EET E ntensity N 9 z een FEA BE ista xng oak Soe OLN A z lt z Si a Q O gt wo 30 LO x O D T O Fi im ao al oO oO z O we On oo Sa go 12 oA z O wg QG O Ezz Zur Eemi 2ro 11 10 Video Display Settings 1 1 35 11 10 2 Displaying the video display settings 11 10 3 Operating the video display settings
325. ion of all stations stopped from host or other station f Cause of Stop No Shared Param Parameters cannot be received Bad Shared Param Set parameter error Bad Self Sta CPU A medium critical error occurred in the host CPU Com Aborted Host data link error occurred 4 Transient status Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error code No Item Description g Transmission Err Displays the number of transient transmission errors Error histories of 16 errors are For other than the seca i isplayed in ows from the GT155 pa latest h ErrCode Only the latest error history is For the GT155 0O displayed as only a single low is provided 14 8 NETWK Unit Status Display 14 8 3 Display example of the NETWK unit status display 14 23 CC Link communication unit 1 LED status Displays the CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 operation status f check NETWK unit STE 1 lt D Link_Info gt D Link Boot Status D Link in prog Error Status Normal b c LED d No Item Lit Not lit Blink color WDT error occurred or unit RUN Green Running normally being reset i aa There is a communication All station communication No communication error ERR Red oo error station or duplicated error occurred or unit being reset station numbers No responses from all stations due to cable
326. iption Reference page zZ Opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight language gt battery alarm display human sensor sensor detect level sensor detect time 11 2 So Display Sit sensor off delay zv H Brightness 11 13 Szi Buzzer volume window move buzzer volume Key sensitivity 41 15 1 1 Key reaction speed Operation Security setting 11 19 a lt 6 Utility call key 11 21 zE Touch panel calibration 11 24 ZME OON Q QnA ladder f Data save location 11 27 monitor Transparent mode Ch No 11 30 9 a Video RGB o ETS Video unit video display RGB display 11 9 UEa Setting lt HS coz OEI a Zz lt z a D els 48 Lo x O W a 4 Lu N e O Zz O 58 z N 2z j oa Zz O we SE Boe Zur Sey 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 Display Settings Display setting functions 11 2 Setting regarding display is possible The items which can be set are shown below When each item part is touched the respective setting becomes possible Items Opening screen time Description The title display period at the main unit boot can be set Setting range 0 to 60 seconds 1 lt At factory shipment 5 seconds gt Screen save time The period from the user stops the touch panel operation till the screen save function starts can be set 0 to 60 minutes lt At factory shipment 0 minutes gt Screen save backlight Whether turn ON or OFF the backlight simultaneously at the scree
327. isplay section is operated 8 10 1 Applicable protective sheet The following protective sheets are applicable for GT1500 When giving priority to brightness select the clear protective sheet when giving priority to preventing glare select the anti glare protective sheet Product name Protective sheet 1 Model GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW 15 protective sheet Description Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW Protection sheet for 12 1 Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW Protection sheet for 10 4 Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW Protection sheet for 8 4 Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW 5 7 protective sheet Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame white 5 sheets Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets Because the frame section is white use
328. isplay setting and GOT setup a screens after completing the setting of all lt items to change with lt lt button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents A 4 48 LO x O W x O W h N e O Oo Zz O So On it oa Zz O wg SF lt Zur Seu 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 7 11 1 3 Display setting operations Language Language English Opening screen time 6 Sec Screen save time Min O None S Screen save backlight OFF Q Battery alarm display OF Brightness contrast Setting Human sensor Effective Sensor detect level 10 MAX 10 Sensor detect time 0 0 Sec Sensor off delay 0 Min 10 Sec Language Human sensor Screen save time Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display OFF Brightness contrast Setting Sensor detect level 10 MAX 10 Sensor detect time 0 0 Sec Sensor off delay 0 Min 10 Sec English Opening screen time 6 Sec Min O None S Effective 11 8 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations D Touch the setting item to display the Select Language screen 2 When touching the button of a desired language the language is selected and the screen returns to the Display screen 1 Touching the Ok button determin
329. ition 6 2 6 4 Control Panel Inside Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 4 6 5 Installation Procedure 6 4 7 WIRING 7 1to7 6 7 4 Power Supply Wiring 7 2 7 2 Wiring of Connection Cables 7 3 7 3 Grouding 7 4 7 4 Power Supply Connection 7 6 8 OPTION 8 1to 8 43 8 1 CF Card 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable CF card 0 000 c cet 8 1 A 10 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card 0 cee eee 8 2 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor 8 6 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor 2 0 00 cect eee 8 6 8 2 2 Installing procedure sae r a enaere h ree e r ee eee eee eee 8 6 8 3 Option Function Board 8 7 8 3 1 Applicable option function board nsss sssaaa aeee 8 7 8 3 2 Installing procedure 2 0 bee bee eee bee ee bebe bebe be beens 8 7 8 4 Multi Color Display Board 8 9 8 4 1 Applicable multi color display board 00 0 cece eee 8 9 8 4 2 Installing procedure 0 00 cee eee 8 9 8 5 Printer Unit 8 11 8 5 1 Printer unit type eias nrrainn pe e a a A ee ee eae 8 11 8 5 2 Installingiprocedure sisese aah uya a anA a a a a ah Do A Me 8 11 8 6 Video RGB Unit 8 15 8 6 1 Video RGB unit types 0 0 00 ee ee eee eee 8 15 8 6 2 Installing procedure 0 00 eee eee 8 15 8 7 Communication Unit 8 18 8 7 1 Applicable communication unit 0000s 8 18 8 7 2 Installing procedure ste Sie ia eA Ras Lata Rated eae Soldat aa fabs ae EY 8 19 8
330. itor OS 02 04 A iS Hard copy function Compatible with the printer output 2 27D Extended function OS O x x 5 A a Printer 02 04 z Function for loading the data read with bar 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 00 Oo x Oo cord reader to PLC CPU Ww Number of settable devices is extended f 2 Barcode i 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x Oo oO from 32 to 1024 points De ke Space 0x20 or NULL 0x00 can be ne 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 oO x oO ons selected for blank device a hee Standard monitor OS 03 00 F Function to display an image taken by a Video display 2 32J Extended function OS Oo x x video camera on the GOT i Video RGB 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 00 Function to display the personal computer n RGB display 2 32J Extended function OS O x x mf screen on the GOT O Video RGB 03 00 a Number of screens that can be called on a Set overlay screen GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Oo Oo O a Up to 2047 screens F Function for changing device value with Test function i i 2 09K Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x Oo displaying test window Function to execute scripts in unit of 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x Project Script project file roj i 4 te 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo O Oo fi ii Z Function to execute scripts in unit of 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 O O x Screen Script Screen 2 1
331. k E Password error If touch OK returns to the Memory check screen Zz O ar Zz Sv am O20 Internal Flush memory area write read check Executing now a Zz lt 3 IRE Oot n aon N gt Z gt 4 Fug WEG 58 Internal Flush memory area Ooz write read check OS Normaly completed Q Z lt z Si pE N O 0K T m Point gt When error is found in memory 1 When error is found by memory check 4 the dialog indicating the area in which Internal Flush memory area m the error occurred is displayed write read check In case of error contact your local write read error H Mitsubishi Electric System Service If touch OK returns to the Memory check screen O o s On Oe Sa T Mi A 4 o oa Zz e wit 99 SE oO Ezz Zur f ZF 14 3 Memory Check 1 4 6 14 3 3 Memory check operation 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 1 Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display check move check among screens 14 4 2 Display operation of drawing check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt 7 9 3 Utility Display Touch i pale TS Touch y Self check Display check Touch Debug amp self check Display check Debug self check Self check Display Start Drawing check Drawing check Font check If touch the Drawing check o
332. l Download Write gt o xt Upload Read gt 5 oO 2 Pree O gt The data of the build in flash memory Project data etc can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes yi low LO Item Data type Storage location x BootOS BootOS i Standard monitor OS 2 PLC communication driver Built in flash memory C drive a OS Extended function OS 2 Option OS Project Project data Standard CF card A drive orbuilt in Including recipe setting alarm conditions time action and GOT setup flash memory C drive a we Alarm data O g Extended alarm log file and alarm log file S z Recipe data Advanced recipe file Recipe file Fa Standard CF card A drive oa Logging Logging Logging file z Hard copy Image file Hard copy function e Be wq 4 When use the project data stored in the standard CF card A drive with GOT use the project data with the CF card installed to SS GOT SE o ug EZZ Zur lt SEG 13 1 Data Storage Location 1 3 3 13 1 2 Data type and the storage location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and standard monitor OS When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically 1 When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installtion so that the older version may not be written Even when the ver
333. l No of a controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted cannot be set by the utility The controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted can be set by GT Designer2 For channel settings refer to the following C gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 1 Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU Setting of clock setting and battery The battery is not installed in GOT at purchase When select Broadcast or None in clock setting set the clock of the GOT once with installing the optional battery to the GOT Operation setting by GT Designer2 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operation GOT Setup 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display Clock display Carry out the display and seting of GOT clock data The setup methods of clock data are shown below Time Setting amp display If touch the clock display section the Clock setting Adjust 8 31 2005_ 15 59 03 WED keyboard for input is displayed and the clock update stops GOT internal ery None Low voltage statu E Gs y Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below Input the schedu
334. larm information If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is C Flash Memory displayed i ndName Size Date Time A Built in CF card DIR PROJECTI 07 08 04 16 03 m If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of 7 the folder of the one upper hierarchy is Mu displayed 42 12KB 14990KB OF ile BIA gt CSvpIA gt TXT Del Copy Graph 2 If touch A button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch a file name the file is selected Refer to the following for G1A CSV G1A TXT delete copy graph operations G1A gt CSV GIA gt TXT K this section Delete ce L gt this section EEE E K gt this section Grape iaaa ICF this section If touch D lt button the screen is closed 1 3 28 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation G1A gt CSV conversion operation G1A gt TXT conversion operation 2 The selected G1A file is converted to CSV file or TXT file S Ww gt Touch and select the G1A file which is to 5 be converted to CSV file or TXT file 5 Sura fil The following dialogue is displayed when AAMOQOO1 G1
335. ld separately Product name Model name Description Option function board GT15 FNB i Applicable for MELSEC A FX ladder monitor function Option function board GT15 QFNB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function Option function board with add on memory Option function 16MB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function GT15 QFNB16M Option function board Option function board with add on memory Option function 32MB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function GT15 QFNB32M Option function board with add on memory Option function 48MB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function GT15 QFNB48M 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 15 We OVERVIEW zZ O lt x ao D oO m zZ Q Oo SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 16 Multi color display board Sold separately Product name Multi color display board Model name GT15 XHNB Description Multi color display board for XGA For 65536 color display Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display ms GT15 VHNB Multi color display board for SVGA VGA For 65536 color display 4 To use it fora SVGA or VGA GOT install the following OS to the GOT
336. le key positions GT1595 1 point GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT155 1 or 2 points Point P Operation settings by GT Designer2 OO Set the utility call key at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation Main menu GOT setup Operation settings lt gt 9 3 Utility Display i j Touch i S Touch GOT setup Operation Touch Utility call key Menu call key GOT setup Operation Menu call key Please select keys D Touch buttons to set for the menu call key Notel Pressing time is effective only in case one point 1 1 20 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation Zz O z i GOT setup Operation Menu call key Touch o or displayed at the 4 x Pileas select keys corners of the setting screen The button repeats gt with 5 every touch Set the corner to be set to a key position to ra fe an Zo Zy ZWE Notel Pressing time is effective only in case one point 9zW ja aed SSS anf aa When setting 1 point specif
337. led time when the operation of 2 is to be carried out since the input time is reflected at the time of the operation of The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date Key Description 0 to 9 Key Input numeric value in cursor position lt gt Key Move the cursor Move the cursor to the left by one character when Del Key is touched while inputting Del Key year month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display Enter Key The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the keyboard Cancel Key The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of With do not if you close value will be canceled OK If touch OK button the setting contents are reflected and the clock display push OK button update re starts the screen the changed 4 If touch button the GOT restarts if the clock settings is changed or the screen closes if clock setting
338. lf size character are not displayed e The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen N OS 2 ERS 2 Tally graph display UEA Program data control Alarm information Total graph Pad 652 ie ist A failure ES Sok terial IA in Ta A ofn FILE DISPLAY AND m 5 oO ie I 1 m 2 1b 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 S 5 x e Displays the generated frequency of each alarm by the sideways bar chart E By the name of each alarm the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT Designer2 D are displayed with up to 12 characters of full size character up to 24 half size characters 3 The 13th of full size character and after the 25th and after for half size character are not displayed e The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen Zz fe 58 On ae fe oa Zz O wg ZE o9 Ze Seu 13 4 Alarm Information 1 3 33 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 13 5 Hard Copy Information 13 5 1 The function of hardcopy information Carries out delete copy and move to the file created by the hardcopy function Refer to the following manual for details of hard copy function C gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 13 2 Hard Copy Function Description Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 13 35 13 36 Delete Deletes the file 13 17
339. ligent module ae buffer memory on the dedicated screen monitoring signal O x x x O monitor Debug statuses of an I O module 0S g N twork monitor Monitoring the network status of MELSECNET H f MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II MELSECNET B O x x x a Motion moniter Monitoring servos of motion controller CPU Q series setting parameters O x x x Servo amplifier Executing various monitoring functions of servo amplifier monitor changing parameters testing operations O x x x Executing position display monitor alarm diagnosis monitor CNC monitor tool offset param program monitor etc equivalent to the O x x x MELDAS dedicated display App 17 Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function Continued to next page Applicable X Not applicable Not required 2 GT Soft Deni Puz rawin Item Functions overview GT15 GOT GT11 ae oE Fa 1000 sae o A drive Standard CF card memory check O x O x Sru GOS LULH Memory check C drive Built in Flash Memory memory check O x O x D drive Built in SRAM memory check x x O x e fe Liquid crystal missing bits check color check drawing Zoo Drawing eheck check display check and overlapping display check O x O x E29 INI O Font check Installed fonts check O x O x x52 5 VOR O Zz D p Zon Touch panel check Touch panel operation check O x O x 3 a C ting t t check onnecting target checi
340. ling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may result Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an electric shock Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or control panel to drop resulting in an injury BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an injury Before replacing a backlight allow 5 minutes or more after
341. link connection e Peel the sheath with the length shown below of the cable to expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 a For RS 232 cable GOT side PLC side m E iM ft 230 or less 40 9 06 1 57 Unit mm inch b RS 422 cable For AC30 100 300R4 25P GOT side PLC side 230 or less 40 9 06 1 57 Unit mm inch 5 15 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product 5 4 2 Processing connection cables 3 Ethernet connection Strip the outer insulation layer at both ends of the cable by the length shown below to expose the braided shield for grounding For grounding with cable clamps refer to Section 5 4 3 s e Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the position as illustrated below E 5 GOT side Ferrite Core PLC side 3 ZCAT3035 1330 Zz e Ke 8 20 ae 40 400 or less aS 1 57 15 75 Unit mm inch 4 PLC manufactured by other company microcomputer temperature controller inverter servo 9 amplifier or CNC connection e Produce the cable RS 232 cable RS 422 485 cable for connecting the GOT to a controller with reference to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual g D Point P Configure the system to meet the EMC Directive specifications for the connected e device when connecting the GOT to
342. log when data is normal Data normal Dialog when data is error Data error KIS 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 4 Special data information operation Select a data check target file and touch the Data check button The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left If touch the OK closed button the dialog is Download operation Zz Transfers the special data written in the A drive Standard CF Card to the C drive Built in flash F memory 5 i gt a Point P Special data to be stored in a CF card 5 When storing the project data from GT Designer2 to CF card select C Built in flash memory for Project Data in Boot Drive 2 O z Communicate with Memory Card So Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write Ste Untitled Project1 GOT Type GT15 640x480 xl aos Common settings ES zZ a C Communication Settings Boot Drive C Standard monitor OS Project Data J Communication diver C Builtin Flash M Extended function 0S Option 0S Inteligent unit monitor data C A motion monitor data C Servo amplifier monitor data a z z sg e See gak O00 EE install a CF card on the GOT ee Refer to the following for inserting B o 4 lt x E removing method of CF card Era HUWA me t 8 1 CF Card ern coz Touch A Standard
343. lowing describes the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 Version2 32J For using the following functions use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later Added GOT main unit Communication unit Target Models Menon ae Version of OS Designer2 GT1595 XTBA 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1595 XTBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1585 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1585V STBA 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 STBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575V STBA 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1565 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1155 HS QSBD to GT1150 HS QLBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT SoftGOT1000 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 02 Communication driver GT15 QBUS 2 GT15 ABUS 2 GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE 2 18U For communication drivers used in each connection use 02 02 or above Added connection types ree Version of GT i GT GT Soft GT Item Description f Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Communication driver Bus connection 2 09K O x x Q173HC
344. m or less oe GOT A mm inch GT1595 2 0 08 0 0 ers8s 2008 00 i et1570 20 08 oo er156L 1210 08 0 0 etss 2 0 08 0 0 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 2 0 08 0 0 6 3 Mounting Position When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be left from the other device gt Wu A W Zz E E C D lt gt gt k gt i fe fe 2S HO XQ Pi J Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 2 0 08 to 0 16inch f sai E LL Type GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 g 50 1 97 50 1 97 D GOT or Bus connection unit is 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 fitted 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more or more or more z 50 1 97 50 1 97 ie Bus connection unit or serial 50 1 97 or more or more or more 65 2 26 2 communication unit fitted 20 0 79 or more 31 1 22 36 1 47 or more lt m or more or more a 50 1 97 51 2 01 68 2 68 73 2 87 RS 422 Conversion unit is fitted or more or more or more or more 50 1 97 6 i Ethernet communication unit is 50 1 97 or more or more 297 fitted 20 0 79 or more 40 1 58 Qar mefa or more MELSECNET 10 communication 50 1 97 or more 6 unit coaxial is fitted 20 0 79 or more CC Link communication unit 50 1 97 or more 5 GT15 75J61BT 13 Z fitted 20 0 79 or more z
345. maintenance time notification count and Built in flash memory maintenance time notification count which are additioned for the maintenance time notification respectively and resets these values 17 1 Addition times reset iy n Ww ind n Ww E z O a Q lt uz Ze ga me BE 25 ES Lu S LE INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS 17 1 1 Addition times reset function Resets the value which is additioned by the 16 1 1 Function of the maintenance timing setting to 0 Item Description MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Backlight power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 Display power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 Touch key pushing addition times reset Function to reset the pushing addition times to 0 Build in flash memory writing addition times reset Function to reset the writing addition times to 0 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM 17 1 2 Display operation of Addition times reset Main menu Addtion times reset L gt 9 3 Utility Display Addition times reset Power on addition time Back light x 1000 H Reset Display x 1000 H Reset ouch key pushing addit ion times Touch key 10000 Reset Memory writing tipe Build in flash 1000 Reset APPENDICES Touch Addtion times reset Addition time INDEX
346. manufactured by other company microcomputer tem z perature controller inverter servo amplifier or CNC connection gt g Fae FL a Point gt Connected devices o ol If connecting to the PLC or microcomputer other than Mitsubishi products MELSEC Q series MELSEC QnA series or MELSEC A series please refer to the EMC Directive compliance manual for that specific device a ja z O W w w gt OF LO a ox S0 INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 10 5 3 2 Connection method 5 3 3 When the communication unit is used Use the following communication unit with the GOT to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive The GOT does not comply with the EMC Directive when connected with other than followings 7 Tik Hardware version of the communication unit Connection method Communication unit used Production year and month Bus connection Version D or later GT15 QBUS Oct 2005 GT15 QBUS2 Version C or later GT15 ABUS Oct 2005 GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Version G or later Mar 2005 Direct connection to CPU Computer link connection GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GOT RS 232 interface GT15 RS2T4 9P Version D or later Jan 2006 Version A or later GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S Version D or later Jan
347. me and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods 2 For deleting the folder Z The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted m 5 Delete the folder after having deleted the files 2 g In addition on the advanced recipe information screen the file other than that for advanced recipe Za is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot le be deleted confirm whether there is other file in memory card by using personal computer etc Zz O wg Ge SUF S 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 63 13 7 5 Precautions Precautions for operation 1 Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the advanced recip is excecuted while the GOT is in access to other file CF card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the Advanced Recipe after the processing for other file has completed
348. memory of the C drive can be read written C drive memory check i normally 14 3 2 Display operation of memory check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt gt 9 3 Utility Display Touch D y Touch Self check Memory check Touch Debug amp self check Memory check Debug self check Self check Memory check Be lect Drive A Built in CF card Select the memory to check and touch Check lenory Board for option function type GT 15 QFNB48M Memory Board for 65536 colors type GT15 VHNB i amp Remark Mounting condition of optional devices board i The mounting status of option function board and multi color display board is displayed on the lower left of the memory check screen When mounted The model numbers of the mounted option function board and multi color display board are displayed When not mounted None is displayed 14 3 Memory Check 1 4 4 14 3 1 Memory check function COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY m4 FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION 14 3 3 Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory Point f When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not dis
349. ments Dielectric withstand voltages are shown in the following table Reinforced Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category II source IEC664 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area 150 VAC or below 300 VAC or below Surge withstand voltage 1 2 50 us 2500V 4000V SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS ol a ja z O W w w gt OF LO a ox S0 INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 8 5 2 5 External wiring 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration The information of the EMC Directive compliant models is obtained from the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb homepage MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html 5 3 1 GOT Use any of the following GOTs with which CE mark logo is printed on the rating plate For how to confirm the hardware version of a GOT refer to the following gt Appendix 2 Confirming of Versions and Conformed standards When using a GOT other than shown below the system does not conform to the EMC Directive Hardware version of the GOT Item Model Production year and month GT1595 GT1595 XTBA Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1585 STBA Version C or later Apr 2005 GT1585 GT1585 STBD Version B or later Jan 2006 GT1575 STBA Version C or later May 2005 GT1575 STBD
350. mmunication Unit cccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 8 14 Applicable communication unit 05 8 14 Installing PrOCCCUIEC ceeeeteeeeettteeeeeeeetaees 8 15 Component liSt 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 Connection cables for MITSUBISHI PLCs 2 7 Control panel inside dimensions for mounting GOT 6 1 Control panel inside temperature and mounting angle 6 3 D Daily MepectON isnie aa 19 2 Dedicated printer connection cable 2 13 Display and operation settingS cere 11 1 Display operation of display setting 11 5 Display setting functions eects 11 2 Display setting operations 0 eeee 11 6 Drawing Chek orco a aE 14 7 Display operation of drawing check 04 14 7 Drawing check function eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 14 7 Drawing check operation cceeeeeeeeeeeees 14 8 Drawing software ssessssseessrresseerrresrrinreseeerneaers 2 15 E EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 5 1 Error message and system alarm cceee 20 1 List of error message system alarm 05 20 3 Ethernet communication unit e 2 5 8 14 Explanation of the GOT model name 55 2 2 Explanation of the option model name 2 2 External dimensions 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 1 F File display ANd COPY
351. munication driver 2 32J O O x for QCPU redundant system MELSECNET 10 03 00 Supporting connection to CC Link CC Link Intelligence device station Communication driver 2 09K n O x x connection Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK ID 01 02 Intelligent device Q173HCPU a Supporting connection to CC Link Ver 2 2 32J Sommuricaton driver ppomng i CC Link Ver2 ID 03 00 O O x Supporting connection to CC Link Via CC Link ae f G4 Communication driver connection Via 2 09K pe O x Oo G4 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK G4 01 02 Q173HCPU Supporting connection to the Ethernet Communication driver O Ethernet Supporting connection to Q172HCPU 2 09K QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 O x Q173HCPU 01 02 x connection Supporting automatic system switching Communication driver 2 32J O O x for QCPU redundant system QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 00 Extended device range monitored Communication driver The setting of TIM or CNT up to 4095 2 09K OMRON SYSMAC O O O OMRON PLC etc 01 02 connection Communication driver Supporting delay time setting 2 27D OMRON SYSMAC Oo x Oo 02 04 KEYENCE PLC A Communication driver Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 18U O x O connection KEYENCE KV700 1000 02 02 SHARP PLC Communication driver f Supporting connection to SHARP PLC 2 09K O x Oo connection SHARP JW 01 02 Communication driver TOSHIBA PLC S Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC 2 09K TOSHIBA PROSE
352. n OS List editor for Function for displaying editing sequence i a 2 09K List editor for MELSEC A O x O MELSEC A program saved from ACPU with list mode 01 02 App 29 Continued to next page Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series ee Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS i Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 one ZOO Function to display edit the sequence Option OS Ose a program read out from the FXCPU in the 2 18U List editor for MELSEC FX Oo x O Fig z2 list mode 02 02 e2 renee Extended function OS aoz List editor for Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 2 27D List editor for MELSEC FX Oo x O MELSEC FX 02 04 Supporting display of Chinese Simplified w PpS eee Simp Extended function OS ie Traditional German and Korean Zog i 2 27D List editor for MELSEC FX O x Oo OZ GT11 supports display of Chinese 02 04 Bao 04 2 Simplified Traditional and Korean 404 FOZ pi Function to monitor the servo amplifier BOs Servo amplifier Option OS EM i and also to change parameters execute 2 18U o O x x monitor function Servo amplifier monitor 02 02 test run etc A Function to execute servo monitor and i zZ j Option OS lt parameter setting for motion controller 2 18U i x Oo x x H Q motion monitor i Q motion monitor 02 02 2z CPU Q series go function Z E
353. n cable 2 5 QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection CADIC cece eeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas 2 6 R Rough pre operation procedure ccceceeeees 1 5 RS 232 Cable anni niian 2 7 RS 422 Cable cccccccececceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeeees 2 7 RS 422 Conversion unit ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 8 26 Applicable RS 422 conversion unit 8 26 Installing PrOCECUIEC eceeeeeeeseteeeeeetettteeeeees 8 26 S Screen data transfer Cable eceeeeeeeeeseeeees 2 15 Security level change eceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeenteees 11 18 Security change display operation 11 18 Security level change functions 0 00 11 18 Security level change operation 00 11 19 Small size CPU extension cable n 2 6 Small size CPU long distance connection cable 2 6 Special Data Information 0 ceeeeeeeee 13 83 Stander seas oie ote essa ened sea eae 2 13 8 32 Applicable stand cccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeees 8 32 Installing PrOCECUIEC eceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeettteeeeeeees 8 32 Standard OS sy istun ENa 18 1 System configuration 00 2 2 eeeeeeeee settee eeeeeettteeeeeeeaes 2 1 Systemi MONRO cece ecececceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneees 14 1 T Third party PLC connection cable eeeeeee 2 3 Time setting and display ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 12 1 Clock setting operations 12 2
354. n for monitoring testing device of Extended function OS PLC CPU or buffer memory of intelligent 2 09K S x Oo System monitoring System monitor 01 02 function module function Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Extended function OS 7 2 27D F O x O Traditional German Korean System monitor 02 04 Function to monitor the network status of Option OS 2 18U O x x Network monitor MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 etc Network monitor 02 02 function Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Option OS We 2 27D Oo x x Traditional German Korean Network monitor 02 04 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC A 01 02 Function for displaying sequence program 2 09K Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q O x x loaded to CPU on GOT QnA 01 02 Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 01 02 Ladder monitoring i Option OS function x f oe des Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA Supporting display of Chinese Simplified i 2 27D 02 04 Oo x x Traditional German Korean Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 02 04 Supporting language switching Option OS Japanese Korean for displaying file 2 27D Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA x x name and title of the sequence program 02 04 Function to monitor and change the data Option OS Intelligent module i of intelligent function module buffer 2 18U Intelligent module monitor O x x monitor function memory using a dedicated screen 02 02 f i f Optio
355. n installing with the utility install the OS and download the project data from their respective operation screens 4 Installation cannot be interrupted Do not perform any of the following during a BootOS or standard monitor OS installation Failure to do so may result in installation failure causing the GOT malfunction e Powering off the GOT e Pressing the reset button of the GOT e Turning off the CF card access switch of the GOT e Removing the CF card If the installation failure and the GOT malfunction occur take the following action e If BootOS installation failed Install CoreOS lt 18 5 1Installing the CoreOS If standard monitor OS installation failed Install BootOS 18 3 1Installing when starting the GOT 1 8 4 18 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using Memory Card 18 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT N The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of standard monitor OS When zOS the screen requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen 250 529 852 Operation procedure ET Power OFF GOT and CF card access switch Insert the CF card in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT B Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT u ra 4 aad am z n z 26 Z lt 3 De OA 5z of an Power on the GOT e For GT1595
356. n list eee ERE EEE 9 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty t
357. n log files created with the operation log function can be copied deleted or renamed etc Without using a personal computer you can manage operation log files on the GOT For details of the operation log function refer to the following manual E lt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 15 2 Operation Log Function Sw S lt z0 Function Description Refer to Displaying file The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are displayed 13 89 13 90 folder data G10 CSV os G10 file of operation log file is converted to CSV file 13 91 oz conversion LON gt EO G10 TXT Ime G10 file of operation log file is converted to Unicode text file 13 91 owe conversion o0u Del File or folder is deleted 13 93 Copy File is copied 13 94 D 2 z Move Folder is moved 13 95 Zza Huo Rename File name is changed 13 97 GEO See Create Folder New folder is created 13 98 oox OEL List Displays operation logs in a list and allows searching 13 99 1 3 A zZ xt z e i oO a O gt wo O wO x O W a Ww Lu N e O Zz O Sf 2 25 go ay oa Zz wg oo Ww jm 250 woz Zur lt SEO 13 11 Operation Log Information 1 3 87 13 11 1 Function of operation log information 13 11 2 Display operation of operation log information Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display Touch Program Data control BREE Touch Operation log Information Name Size Date Time
358. n of a language to be displayed and then OK button and the language is selected i The gt mark moves 9 5 9 3 Utility Display 2 Touching the X button restarts the GOT and the language on the utility is switched to the selected one 1 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual zZ O fam O Z Wwe gt 5 GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters Point When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and 3 _ the installed fonts are not matched g q ow The following screen will be displayed Z2 0 Le Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is Zn F switched to the selected one 95y Sel o aor gt EO Are Tuk aon N gt S3 Era HWD WEG Sue oad Doth A Z lt z Si pE D o gt wo O LO x O W a O Ww Lu N d O Oo Zz O E of 2 N Ez lt a 4D oA Z O wg lt 250 woz Zur lt SEO 9 3 Utility Display 9 6 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu The following three types of operation can display the main menu Display the main menu after installing the basic OS from GT Designer2 to the GOT built in flash memory 1 When project data is undownloaded If the power supply of GOT tur
359. n prog FData link being executed D Link Stop A Cyclic transmission stopped from other station D Link Stop H Cyclic transmission stopped by host B Pass exec No Area Host B W send no allocation d Com Status B Pass exec Param Err Error in host parameters B Pass exec Param unreceived Common parameters not received Disconnect No B Pass Station numbers duplicated cable not connected Disconnect Line Err Cable not connected Testing Testing online offline Reset in prgr Hardware failure Displays the cause of disabled communication transient transmission of the host Normal Comm Communicating normally Offline Offline Offline test Testing offline Initialize Error error code F101 F102 F105 Change Ctrl Sta Error error code F104 F106 Testing Online FError error code F103 F109 F10A Baton Missing Error error code F107 Baton Duplicated Error error code F108 e Cause of Ssp 4 Dup Sta No Error error code F10B Dup Ctrl Sta Error error code F10C Rev Retry Err Error error code F10E Send Retry Err Error error code F10F Time Out Err Error error code F110 Abnormal Line Error error code F112 Disconnection Error error code F11B No Own Sta Baton Error error code F11F Other error code Error error code displayed Displays the cause of disabled data link cyclic transmission of the host Normal Communicating normally StopOrder Cyclic transmiss
360. n save function start can be specified ON OFF lt At factory shipment OFF gt Language Confirmation of the current language and switching language can be performed regarding with the language displayed by utility and dialogue BAW Japanese __ fralish English __ exam Chinese Simplified mee Chinese Traditional m e Korean Deutsch German lt At factory shipment User s selection gt Battery alarm display Whether to display system alarm when the voltage of the GOT internal battery has dropped can be specified lt At factory shipment OFF gt Brightness Contrast The brightness can be adjusted 3 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment Human sensor CHC ICh X V S S Screen saver status cancel by human sensor can be set to Effective or Invalid Effective Invalid lt At factory shipment Effective gt Sensor detect level 2 GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X V S S The sensor detect level can be set 0 to 10 lt At factory shipment 10 gt Sensor detect time 2 X V S S 11 1 Display Settings The time corresponding to the Sensor detect level is displayed setting is disabled When the Sensor detect level is changed the corresponding time is reflected by touching Enter button 11 1 1 Display setting functions 0 to 4 lt At factory shipment 4sec gt Items Sensor off delay The time period from wh
361. nce timing setting data 8 9 2 Battery specifications Item Specifications Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 1800mAh Storage life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Total power stoppage time Refer to Section 8 9 4 Battery life Lithium content 0 49g Application For backup of clock data and maintenance timing setting data 8 9 3 Battery replacement procedure Replace battery periodically by referring to Section 8 9 4 Battery life Keep the GOT power supply on for 10 minutes or more and turn it off Executes step to within 5 minutes of powering the GOT power supply off l Remove the battery holder form the GOT backside For other than GT1550 For GT1550 Remove the old battery from the holder and disconnect the connector QO Connect the new battery to the connector Insert the battery into the holder and set it into the GOT backside Q Turn the GOT power supply on 8 9 Battery 7 8 9 1 Applicable battery 8 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display lt gt 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY Point P 1 Precautions after ba
362. ncorrect All on line Read Anti Write or operation ae write operation write 7 plagiarism t protect protection protec protec protect protect cancelled Monitoring devices O O O x O O T C set value and file Gee register x x x x O O O anging D1000 and devices the following Other than O O O x O O O the above 3 Difference between all online operations prohibition and all operations prohibition When specifying All online operations prohibited displaying devices and inputting data with a programming tool or GOT are all prohibited When all operations are prohibited displaying devices and inputting data with the GOT are enabled while all operations using a programming tool are prohibited 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 1 0 16 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 1 ra Q lt x Q z Q 1 x0 LZ YE W He LU Zn DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING oO UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION Deletion Delete a registered keyword Touching the Regist key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword 2 Input a key word and touch the Enter key and the keyword is deleted Keyword Please input keyword
363. ndant system a i Change the Q redundant setting in accordance with the actual 451 settings and current O Q redundant CPU system config do not match re 1 Reset the power of the GOT 460 Communication unit error 2 Replace the unit O Channel CH No 1 to 4 to communicate with a controller is not ae set Communication channel ae 1 After setting the Communication Settings on the GT j 480 not set Set channel i f Designer2 download it to the GOT O number on Utility aa 2 Change the channel assignment in the Communication Setting on the utility 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 8 Channel Error Error message Action No to code uz storage r95 Uga The interface where the channel CH No 1 to 4 is set does o 2Ze oo not have a communication unit installed e2 Communication unit not HR ogu 1 Install a communication unit to the interface where the j 298 481 mounted to the slot of O channel CH No 1 to 4 is set active channel 2 Change assignment of the channel CH No 1 to 4 in the 7 P w Communication Setting Oun Za Too many same units are Units are mounted on the GOT exceeding the maximum E o ba 482 mounted Confirm the no number of mountable units O 384 Zz of units Check the number of units and remove unnecessary units 938 Two or more units which cannot be mounted on the GOT Simultaneous mounting of 1 483 i simultaneously
364. ndard monitor OS 02 02 x x O zW Setting GOT FAD SZ System messages to be displayed on Dialog window GOT can be customized or created by the 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O x O user w 0 Standard monitor OS 03 00 a Function to save the GOT operation ne Operation log 2 32J Option OS O O x we performed by the user as a history Zy Operation Log 03 00 xoz m4 a 2 00A Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O x vzg Comment Comment group can be used 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo Oo User defined key window display can be switched in synchronization with the 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Oo O Oo language switching device a Key Window iS In the user defined key window input 5 range maximum value and input range 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O a minimum value are displayed q Object rename Function to allow setting of object name 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O Lamp Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O O Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O oO Touch switch Data change switch can be used 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O Q o Setting for displaying an input value at the z Numerical input ae 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O input target object position is possible Function to store NULL 0x00 at the end f 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O O O of input characters F Standard m
365. nes 12 dot standard font 66 characters x 50 lines 16 dot standard font 40 characters 30 lines 12 dot standard font 53 characters 40 lines GT1575 VN Display Display color 65536color 2 Zobeclor GT1572 VN section 16color Left Right 50 Left Right 45 Left Right Top degrees Left Right Top degrees Display angle Bottom Top 35 degrees Bottom Top 30 degrees 85 degrees Bottom 45 85 degrees Bottom 20 degrees degrees Intensity of LCD only 400 cd m 280 cd m 380 cd m 200 cd m 4 level Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h Approx 41 000 h Operating ambient temparature 25 C Operating ambient temparature 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set snd Approx 40 000 h or longer Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the Life j z operating ambient temperature of 25 C Number of touch 1 900 objects screen 1 200 objects screen Matrix structure of keys Matrix structure of 38 lines x 50 columns 30 lines x 40 columns Minimum 16 x 16 dots 16 x 8 dots for the _ Key size last li k Minimum 16 x 16 dots per key Touch ast line only per key panel Number of objects ne cate Maximum of 2 objects simultaneously touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98 max Detection length None H
366. ng Check 1 4 10 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 14 11 c Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlaped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal d Pattern 4 Shape Check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal If touch the upper right part of the screen returns to Display check screen h 144464646464 O ud Seem To Display check The main screen image after the screen information read and write is executed 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 14 5 Font Check Zz fe Zz 14 5 1 Font check function gt a The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed 5 on the upper left part of the screen one by one 14 5 2 Display operation of Font check Z an Z20 Main menu Debug amp self check Self check Zy lt gt 9 3 Utility Display SET 020 oy zis Touch we rhe J Self check Display check Q Touch Display Zan Debug amp self check zaz Da AOD N gt Z gt 4 Fue Display check ES MEO aS Starts font check Sak JZE Oxun Touch When touch Font check of the Display check Font check Font check starts z a D a m i Point f Notes on Font Check Ju
367. ng an extension unit on the outer layer refer to the following L 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer cover the top of mounting screws 4 places with accessory labels in order to avoid receiving static electricity Keep the connector cover fixed Keep the seal stuck as it is Accessory labels Connector cover Point gt Remove the serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit If you remove the serial communication unit or Ethernet communication unit detach it from specified direction shown PULL so as not to break a connector 8 24 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 2 Installing procedure 2 Terminal block socket installation For GT15 RS4 TE only D Insert the terminal block socket in the serial communication unit Fasten the terminal block by tightening the terminal block fixing screws 2 places with the tightening torque of 0 20 to 0 25 N m Extended figure of part A A terminal block fixing screw Point gt When attaching or removing a communication cable When attaching or removing a communication cable to from the terminal block socket detach the terminal block socket from the connector When extension units are installed in multiple layers the units do not have to be removed from the GOT main unit 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 2 Installing procedure 8 25 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SY
368. ng connection to OMRON 2 18U OMRON THERMAC INPANEL Oo x O controller temperature controller NEO 02 02 connection FUJI temperature inne Supporting connection to FUJI Communication driver controller 2 32J O x O temperature controller FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 00 connection YAMATAKE temperature Supporting connection to YAMATAKE 2 18U Communication driver controller temperature controller i YAMATAKE SDC DMC 02 02 O m O connection RKC temperature Communication driver Supporting connection to RKC Ea controller 2 18U RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Oo x O i temperature controller connection 02 02 Inverter Communication driver Supporting connection to inverter 2 18U O x O connection FREQROL 500 700 02 02 Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 02 02 CNC connection Supporting connection to CNC 2 18U A QnAQJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 O O O 02 02 MELSECNET 10 02 02 CC Link ID 02 02 a oit lif 200K Communication driver upporting connection to servo amplifier p i p MELSERVO J2S M 01 02 O a O Supporting connection to MELSERVO J3 Communication driver 2 18U O x O series MELSERVO J3 J2S M 02 02 Servo amplifier Supporting writing to the E PROM area in 292 Communication driver connection parameter writing l MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 O x O Supporting the point table setting for MR Communication driver 2 32J O x O J2S CP MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 5 inae ast 233
369. ng the display section The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time 504 Warning Touch panel needs replacement soon The dedicated GS is notifying that the touching count of the touch key has reached 80 or more of the set count number The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the touch key The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times 505 Warning Built in Flash ROM needs replacement soon The dedicated GS is notifying that the built in flash memory writing times have reached 80 or more of the set times The GOT must be replaced In that case Data backup and re setting are needed The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition times 506 Warning Backlight needs replacement The dedicated GS is notifying that the backlight power on addition time has reached the set time or more The GOT can be restored by executing the addition times reset function after replacing the backlight The GOT can also be restored by turning off the notification signal manually In such a case turn it OFF after setting a value greater than the addition time
370. nge assignment Tuk Hiene e Touch the lt j button and return to the ogy 4 None Change assignment 7 y ee Communication Setting screen Darcode 9 Host PC N OS 2 FEA HUN WEG xng oak oto A Z lt QO Confirm that the selected communication z ME driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is a gt Chive RS SYNSUBBIVE CAN6 USB assigned HS 1 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 9 Host PC LO Extend I F Setting After the confirmation touch the OK Extend F 1 Ist CN None button x 0 None Q 2nd None Touch the 5x button to restart GOT 3 0 None 0 j ie 3rd None m 0 None n al O Definition of Cho o 0 None 8 Barcode connection Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection Zz O of 2 N Z gt 25 go ay oA Z O wg Qo E lt 250 woz Zur q SEG 10 1 Communication Setting 1 0 8 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation Channel number setting operation Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set Standard I F Setting Channe1 Dr iver assign ChNo RS232 5Y supply ChNo USB 9 Host PC 9 Host PC Extend F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist GT 15 5QBUSL GM None Ne ChNo None ChNo None CoO None o None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None H S Earcod jon 0ther connection OK SS Se aoe commons MMO 18191 Del lt i OLD 2 3 4 Cancel Enter Definition of ChN
371. ngle tone tone length adjustable Protective structure Outside the enclosure IP67 Inside the enclosure IP2X External dimensions Excluding USB environmental 241 9 49 W x190 7 48 H x52 2 05 D mm inch protective cover Panel cutting dimensions 227 8 94 W x176 6 93 H mm inch Weight 1 9 kg mounting fixtures are not included Compatible software package GT1565 VTBA 2 04E or later 2 177 or later GT Designer2 Version GT1565 VTBD 2 17T or later 1 Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel due to its characteristics It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect 2 With the hardware version indicated below it will be 256 colors when the multi color display board is not installed For how to confirm the function version refer to the following Appendix Confirming of Versions and Conformed Standards GT1565 VTBA A evita GT1565 VTBD A 3 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life 4 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 5 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at
372. nication unit GT15 J71E71 100 Ethernet 100Base TX 10Base T unit MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 2 Optical double loop unit GT15 J71BR13 2 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z Optical loop unit A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set GT15 75J71BR13 Z Coaxial bus unit A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 2 Intelligent device station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compliant GT15 75J61BT13 Z Intelligent device station unit Set of ASGT 61BT13 GT15 75IF900 Interface converter unit 4 2 GT15 75IF900 Conversion unit for GOT A900 GOT800 series communication unit When using this unit use a standard monitor OS and communication driver of GT Designer2 Version2 15R or later With a standard monitor OS and communication driver of an older version the GOT has cannot recognize the unit to perform monitoring This can be used with the GT1585 STBA and GT1575 STBA of hardware version C or later or the GT1575 VTBA and GT1565 VTBA of hardware version E or later 8 7 Communication Unit 8 7 1 Applicable communication unit Installing procedure 8 7 2 When installing a communication unit together with some other extension unit after executing the procedure A communication unit can also be installed together with another extension unit in this section refer to the following This section d
373. ns The performance specifications of the GT15 is as follows cS e 3 2 1 GT1595 X e 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S e 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN e 3 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN e 3 2 5 GT1555 Q GT1550 Q 3 2 1 GT1595 X iem Specifications GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD Type TFT color liquid crystal display High intensity and wide angle view Screen size 15 Resolution 1 024 x 768 dots Display size 304 1 12 0 W x 228 1 8 98 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 64 characters x 48 lines Display 12 dot standard font 85 characters x 64 lines __ Display color 65536color 2 section Left Right 75 degrees Display angle Top 50 degrees Bottom 60 degrees Intensity of LCD only 450 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 52 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 50 000 h or longer Life S Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Number of Touch key 3 072 objects screen 48 lines x 64 columns Key size Minimum 16 x 16 dots per key Touch Number of objects that Simultaneous presses not allowed panel can be simultaneously Only 1 point can be touched touched Life 1 million times or more operating
374. ns ON the main menu is displayed automatically after title display Main menu etting amp display Debug amp self check GOT power supply ON 2 When touching menu call key If you touch the menu call key while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility or GT Designer2 The menu call key is set in the position as described below at factory shipment Model name Default setting at factory shipment GT1595 1 point press on the GOT screen upper left corner Simultaneous 2 point presses on the GOT screen upper right and left corners GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT1550 Menu call key 1 point touch on the upper left corner Menu call key Simultaneous 2 point touch 9 7 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu Point P 1 Prohibited simultaneous 2 point presses on the GT1595 X _ In the case of using a GT1595 X do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point z O fam O Z S Wwe gt 5 2 When setting menu call key to 1 point When having set Pressing time of the menu call key setting screen to other than s 0 s keep pressing the touch panel for the period set to Pressing time or more gt before le
375. nt 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight QO Disconnect the cable connector of the upper H01 backlight and the cable connector of the lower H02 backlight from the GOT side connectors Expanded figure of part A in C ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION w 2 Yn AS ez ie Q Remove the cables of the upper connector H01 from the 2 slits black E52 Similarly remove the cables of the upper connector H02 from the 2 slits black 220 9 MAINTENANCE AND m z O O mf a a z Press the upper backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left Q Similarly press the lower backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the De left y one 29 wut mi a Gi Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal a When connecting the cable connectors of the backlight and the GOT unit connect by crossing the cable connectors each other as the below x lt a z Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48N m When mounting the case take care of not biting the cables between the case and the GOT 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 13 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight 2 Replacement 2 Pow
376. nt values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pul
377. o Ach 2R The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed Input the channel number from the keyboard and touch key and the value is defined Simultaneously the name of the communication driver corresponding to the channel number assigned by GT Designer2 is displayed in the driver display BOX Communicat io Standard I F Setting Channel Dr iver assign ChNo R5232 5V suppl ChNo USB 9 Host PC 9 Host PC Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend _ F 2 Ist ChNo None ChNo_ None 1A A Q BUS 0 None 1 0 9 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation Communication detail settings switching operation If you touch the driver display BOX the screen switches to the detailed setting screen of the related controller device C7 10 2 Communication Detail Settings an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 5V power supply setting operation When connecting a controller to the RS 232 interface whether to supply 5VDC power or not to the controller through 9 pins can be selected Thus it is not necessary to connect an external power supply When setting the RS 232 interface to 9 Host PC the 5V supply is automatically changed to NO Zz fe i O Zz O 8 LO Zz YE W He LU Zn Touch 5V supply
378. oLogix Extend interface display SIEMENS S7 200 BOX SIEMENS PLC connection SIEMENS S7 300 400 L This section 3 Microcomputer connection Microcomputer connection OMRON THERMAC i OMRON temperature controller connection INPANEL NEO FUJI PXR PXG PXH FUJI temperature controller connection YAMATAKE SDC DMC YAMATAKE temperature controller RKC SR Mini HG RKC temperature controller connection FREQROL 500 700 Inverter connection MELSERVO J3 J2S M Servo amplifier connection Barcode Barcode reader connection 8 E71 Gateway Ethernet connection and gateway function 1 to4 Gateway Gateway function Ethernet download At Ethernet download al miele MERIA i Printer Printer connection lt gt This section 3 Video RGB Input Video RGB Input RGB Output RGB Output z Ataner oS Eda TA Standard interface Host PC ARR a S P A display BOX RS232 USB 9 transparent function C This section 2 Display None in the driver display BOX in case of the followings e The communication driver is not installed gt 13 2 OS Information In channel number specification menu BOX 0 is set e The communication unit type and the communication driver are mutually not corresponding at the extend interface side When set the channel number to 9 the communication driver Host PC is automatically assigned 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 10 4 1 Zz Q lt x Q zZ Q 1
379. observed by the z No of alarm has alarm history display function has exceeded the maximum Z 311 exceeded upper limit points x Delete restored alarm Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory and Accumulate Average were set in the x No of sampling has fi scatter graph S 312 exceeded upper limit x 1 Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph Delete collected data ee 2 Set the Operation at frequency over time to Initialize and Continue in scatter graph 315 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device Correct device Correct the device x In indirect specification of comment parts number the data operation result exceeded the range in which device type can Cannot display or input be expressed 316 operation value Review x Review the data operational expression in order not expression exceeding the range in which the device type can be expressed 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 3 20 4 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage Data of an object to which Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied is set are collected too frequently or the number of objects has exceeded the number of objects Too high frequency of i i collectable simultaneously 317
380. og is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Copy operation z Copies the selected file S ra gt Touch and select the file to copy 5 Pr Data control Alarm information E lect drive Apel s e Te If touch Copy button the message CERET l o0000 1K 03 15 05 12 37 F Please select a destination is displayed ciii iash Menory in the left bottom of the screen gt If the copy destination folder is touched 5x2 r Syf the screen display is changed to the folder SHE of copy destination O20 At this time it cannot be copied into the 7 same folder where the file exists A Select other folders A Please select Zz a destination lt u gt E See cham Copy file name If touch Next button the following dialog 9 AAMOO000 G1A ie di Copy dest natine shown left is displayed C D Copy now 0 hace HUWA HEA xiL ORS oss ON OK Cance 3 File is already exist Touch button Overwrite now If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao Q g touch the button overwrites the ile T O ox Carce If touch Cancel button cancels to copy i LU Z O Oo Copy is completed When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed r
381. old in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive are required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive EMC Directives are those which require any strong electromagnetic force is not output to the external Emission electromagnetic interference and It is not influenced by the electromagnetic wave from the external Immunity electromagnetic sensitivity Items 5 1 1 thru 5 1 3 summarize the precautions to use GOT and configure the mechanical unit in order to match the EMC directives Though the data described herein are produced with our best on the basis of the requirement items and standards of the restrictions gathered by Mitsubishi they do not completely guaranteed that all mechanical unit manufactured according to the data do not always match the above directives The manufacturer itself which manufactures the mechanical unit must finally judge the method and others to match the EMC directives 5 1 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 1 1 EMC directive The standards of the EMC Directive are shown below Applied standard EN6
382. olls up down by one line 3 If touch amp button the screen scrolls up down by one screen Touching gt lt button returns the screen to the previous screen display FILE DISPLAY AND m 5 oO ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 2 OS Information 1 3 13 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file Dialog et date check normal Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check Data normal Touching button closes the dialog Dialog at data check abnormal Data error 1 3 14 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information 13 3 Project Information z O O Ea 13 3 1 Functions of the project information 2 The project data files stored in each drive A standard CF card C built in flash memory can be displayed 5 by lists In addition the files can be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc 6 Function Description Reference page A Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size the creation date and time of the file or folder 13 16 13 17 2o airs Delete Deletes project data 13 17 Shr O5 u Copy Copies
383. on The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type Moreover there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which cannot be set Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Soft eni i rawin Item Functions overview GT15 GOT GT11 a 1000 Setting of channel number for the communication interface and assignment of communication driver O x O O 5 Setting of communication parameter O x O O 8 Sequence program protection key word setting When FX z series PLC is connected O x O x O y A o Detail settings Sequence program protection key word deleting When FX series PLC is connected O x O x Sequence program protection status cancel When FX series PLC is connected O x O x Setting of opening screen time O Setting of screen saving time Setting of screen saving back light ON OFF Switching of message language Japanese English Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Korean German O O Oe O Battery alarm display ON OFF setting O O O Human sensor Effective Invalid setting Display mi m E O xX x x E GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X V S S wn 5 9 Sensor detect level setting O xX xX xX Displaying sensor detect time E i E O x x xX X V S S J m 0 Sensor off delay setting C O xX xX xX GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 Liquid crystal intensity setting O x O x Brightness contrast Liquid crystal contrast setting x O x
384. on driver 2 The following display and operations are not allowed with the GT11 e Chinese Traditional cannot be displayed Japanese and Chinese Simplified cannot be selected on the GOT screen Japanese and Chinese Simplified fonts cannot be installed at the same time 3 It is necessary to set the security level by GT Designer2 4 If necessary please install the battery 5 It is necessary to install the RS 232 connector for the test C 14 7 I O Check 6 It is necessary to install the option function board and the battery Appendix 3 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 18 Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Appendix 4 1 Relevant models The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below Battery for GOT1000 Series GT15 BAT Lithium battery Non dangerous goods Appendix 4 2 Transportation guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company App 19 Appendix 4 Transportation Precautions Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series The fol
385. onfiguration 2 2 0 eee 9 10 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 0 0 0c cee eee 9 11 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1to 10 17 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 0 0 ee 10 1 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation 0 2 00 ee 10 1 10 1 3 Communication setting contents 0 0 tee 10 2 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation 00 ee 10 7 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 12 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions 0 ee 10 12 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation 0 000 eee 10 12 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 0 0 00 eee eee 10 14 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 11 1 to 11 39 11 1 Display Settings 11 2 11 1 1 Display setting functions 0 0 ete 11 2 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting 0 0 0 0 0c 11 5 11 1 3 Display setting operations 1 2 0 eee 11 6 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 12 11 2 1 Functions of the brightness contrast 02020 c eee eee 11 12 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness contrast 2 0002 cece eee 11 12 11 2 3 Operating the brightness contrast 00 ee eae 11 13 11 3 Operation settings 11 14 11 3 1 Operation setting functions 0 0 tee 11 14 11 3 2 Display operation of displ
386. onitor OS 02 02 Function to convert characters input in ASCII Display Kana into Kanji e Option OS O O x ASCII Input KANA KANJI JP 02 02 Alignment setting is added 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Oo O Oo Setting for displaying an input value at the Kiop 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O O O input target object position is possible Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page App 26 Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Number of alarms settable for GT11 is User alarm extended to the same as GT15 Up to 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O Oo Oo 8192 alarms Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O Oo 3072 alarms i Function to save alarm history data to the i Alarm history 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O O O A drive standard CF card for GT11 Function to display the cursor by touching an alarm and function to output the 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 Oo O Oo corresponding comment No to a device Function for detecting alarm even at the Advanced Alarm fall of bit device with Advanced User 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O O x Alarm Parts Display Function for using BMP JPEG data in 2 09K Standard monitor
387. or 8 3 Option Function Board The optional function board is used to extend the option function and the built in flash memory Refer to the following for the functions requiring the optional function board L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 8 3 1 Applicable option function board The following option function boards are applicable for GT1500 Model Description Option function board GT15 FNB Applicable for MELSEC A FX ladder monitor function Option function board GT15 QFNB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function GT15 QFNB16M Option function board with add on memory Option function 16MB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function GT15 QFNB32M Option function board with add on memory Option function 32MB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function GT15 QFNB48M 8 3 2 Installing procedure Option function board with add on memory Option function 48MB Applicable for MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor function multi channel function Power OFF the GOT 2 Detach the expansion unit cover I F 1 side of GOT rear face 8 3 Option Function Board 8 3 1 Applicable option function board OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION z O a
388. or special data to display Property as shown E Q6SADV G6BAD I 0644AD 1 0 Monitor 2 C6BADV Q68AD 0644D Graph Mon left PENE Operat ion Poni tor 062 t Output Moni to ra O04 aah nr onitor In Property display the following information 52 2 Op Mon A 4 0620 0062 0062 1 0 Moni tor is displayed 5 QD75D Operation Monitor E QD75P QD75D 1 0 Monitor Su q 75D Basic parameters 1 o q QD75D Basic parameters 2 329 a 75D Detailed para 1 1 Sys ein ace E SEE ase rer ODTEP QD7AD Detai led para 2 2 ten pescribtion O20 E ee Date Displays date and time of file creation q 1 0 signal amp Status Q 5D Axis monitor data 1 Author Displays the author of the project data q Axis monitor data 2 r ei R epos control Drawing S W Displays name and version of the drawing B pe EA PB cena hae version software by which the project is created eon 75 Axis control data 2 352 Dik If touch the A button the screen scrolls anu up down line by line zx o gt touch the 4 button screen scrolls up ON Zom down by one screen peg VETT f touch the X the property display is closed Soe JZE and returned to the previous screen OS FILE DISPLAY AND m gt ao O GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 10 Special Data Information 1 3 83 13 10 4 Special data information operation 13 84 Data check operation Checks the selected special data Dia
389. ore installation If you do not install the Core0S turn off the GOT and remove a CF card 18 5 CoreOS 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS 4 Turning the CF card access switch off executes Core OS installation tu us Core0S Install Ver 02 01 00 E as zg TE RE UAROTLES Os ZZE Warning YE KRS EPEAT LEE e2 E Do not turn off the power supply aa Do not push the reset button aoa Senahned 18 Writing data Phase Progress u a 4 aad am z n z 26 Z lt P De OA 5z Of an Q When the installation is completed the dialog as shown below is displayed The POWER LED of the GOT blinks green orange at the installation completion Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Core0 Install Ver 02 01 00 E TLEL e COTM RE MY CRA RERIT ESE Installation is completed Turn OFF GOT and remove CF card Phase ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM Progress QO Remove the CF card after powering the GOT off APPENDICES Powering the GOT on again displays the screen as shown below The GOT goes to the status of factory shipment Install OS Standard monitor OS communication driver etc or download project data as required For how to install each OS or download project data refer to the following manual lt gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA INDEX EROS fH VAR IVL TSK RSV Plea
390. orque Terminal block terminal 0 5 to 0 8 Nem screw 3 3 Power Supply Specifications 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply 3 14 4 PART NAME AND SETTINGS 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GI1595 7 bd ag 4 m Z lt x Ww n 10 ZZ bE Fam an S m i a oe lt 0 30 GOT rear face 1000000000000 DOOOOOOOOOOZ DOO TTOOOIOU00000 o 0000074000000 3 oO f JOQUMIUO0 OU 0o00 9 000000 00 Z 11 A Q O 4 1 Part Names and Settings of the GT1595 4 1 No Name POWER LED Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb 4 2 Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the Utility and the user creation screen 3 Touch key For operating the touch switches in the Utility and the user creation screen For connect
391. ory Information Displaying memory space of GOT Special data information 9 2 Utility Function List Displaying file holder name data size and creation date and time of the file or folder Deleting file holder of the special data Checking file of the special data Downloading the special data written in the A drive Standard CF Card to C drive built in flash memory Debug amp self check Debug Item System monitor Functions overview Monitoring and testing PLC devices monitoring and changing values in the special module buffer memory Ladder monitor Displaying ladder monitor executing hard copy A List editor Changing sequence programs or parameters of the ACPU FX list editor Editing FXCPU sequence program in a list Intelligent module monitor Monitoring buffer memory or changing data of an intelligent function module with the dedicated screen monitoring signal statuses of an I O module Network monitor Monitoring the network status of the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET Il or MELSECNET B Motion monitor Monitoring the servo of a motion controller CPU Q series setting parameters Servo amplifier monitor Executing various monitor functions of servo amplifier parameter changes test operations etc CNC monitor Executing position display monitor alarm diagnosis monitor tool offset param and i program monitor equivalent to the M
392. ory size 5MB 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC Memory size 5MB GT1572 VNBA 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 5MB GT1572 VNBD 10 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 24VDC Memory size 5MB GT1565 VTBA 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB GT1565 VTBD 2 2 Component List 2 2 1 GOT 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC Memory size 9MB Continued to next page k Product name Model name GT1562 VNBA Specifications 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 5MB GT1562 VNBD 8 4 640 x 480 dots TFT color liquid crystal 16 colors 24VDC Memory size 5MB GOT GT1555 QTBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB GT1555 QSBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 4096 colors 24VDC memory size 9MB GT1550 QLBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal 16 Grayscale 24VDC memory size 9MB For GOTs that can display 65536 colors refer to the following 3 2 Performance Specifications 2 2 Component List 2 _ 2 2 1 GOT 9 We OVERVIEW zZ O
393. ouching the setting numerical a E keyboard is displayed Input numeric with alley inti dla ay O the keyboard Brightness contrast Setting lur or Effective T0 MAX 10 A EEN 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched With do not push OK button If touch gt lt button without touching if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is displayed value will be canceled 0K 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with DX button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 1 1 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations Screen save backlight battery alarm display Zz O GOT setup Di splay 5 ra EAEN D Setting item is changed if setting item is s Opening 6 Sec PA mi en save n4 D Min 0 None touched ON w OFF gt Screen save backlight OFF a Battery alarm display __OFF n i 5 Sta 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button Effective et D is touched 0 0 Sec 0 Min 10 Sec an Zo Ee Ozu Q l l Zep With do not push OK button If touch gt lt button without touching z5 if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialog mentioned left is TME value will be canceled displ d AOD 0K isplayed N A a5 oak Doth a If close the d
394. ower supply to the GOT z The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by lightning strike Ap Category has the lowest durability category IV has the highest durability ge g E o ol WD way Category IV Category III o Category II a Category j a m Zz T Q W w w gt OF LO hw o S0 Installation Category Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution z z ip Z O zZ a Zz fe E O 5 2 Requirements for Conpliance with the Low Voltage Directive 5 6 5 2 1 Standard subject to GOT 5 2 3 Control panel Because the GOT is open type equipment device designed to be stored within another device be sure to use it only when installed in a control panel 1 Shock protection In order to prevent those who are unfamiliar with power facility e g an operator from getting a shock make sure to take the following measures on the control panel a Store the GOT within the control panel locked and allow only those who are familiar with power facility to unlock the panel b Build the structure in order that the power supply will be shut off when the control panel is opened Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also provides protection from dust water and other substances Insufficient ingression protection m
395. p display Comment display and Numeric display can be laid out arbitrarily to be displayed Moreover the multiple screens created by GT Designer2 can be overlapped and switched to be displayed For details refer to the following GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Utility Screen Utility screen is a screen prepared beforehand for GOT Installing BootOS or standard OS in the GOT from GT Designer2 enables utility screen displaying The utility screen has menus as Brightness contrast adjustment screen and GOT memory check screen etc For details refer to the following Chapter 9 to Chapter 17 About Manual The following manuals related to GOT1000 series are available Refer to each manual in accordance with the intended use it gt x 1 Installation of the software programs Drawing Data transfer z For operations from creating project data to transferring data to GOT refer to the following manuals Z O z 0 fe fe LE DO Purpose GT Designer2 Version Basic GT Designer2 Version O Operation Data Transfer Manual Screen Design Manual 2 Zz fe z Installing product on PC Detailed 2 8 W or N Creating projects Detailed 9 lt W n Ea 2z a5 La Creating screens Detailed O ow aw gt Drawing figures Detailed es oh Z0 w gt O Making Common Settings Detailed z O z
396. pact Before touching the unit be sure to touch grounded metal or similar objects to discharge the static electricity from human body Not doing so can cause a failure or malfunction of the unit When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste e ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM e e e e APPENDICES INDEX The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery backlight periodically For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen please consult Mitsubishi Electric System Service Refer to the following section for the lives of the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight LF 3 2 Performance Specifications 19 1 19 1 Daily Inspection Daily inspection items Inspection Method Check for loose mounting screws No Inspection Item Criterion Action Retighten screws within the 1 GOT mounting status ee specified torque range Securely mounted Loose terminal screws Retighten SCTEWS Not loose Retighten terminal screws with screwdriver 2 Connection Poxmale wOldedians Visual check Proper intervals Correct status terminals Loose connectors Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws U Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one sage z z 3 status Foreign material Vi
397. played confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following CF card inserting removing method C gt gt 8 1 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen Replace the memory card or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Bulit in CF card A drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen Internal Flush memory area If select OK button the numeric keyboard window is write read check displayed Execute now If select button returns to the initial menu OK Cance 2 Touch to input password 5 9 o and touch Enter If touch Enter executes read write check for the built in i flash memory which is completed in around 10 seconds Please input password 8 EA 2 A Del Enter EEFE zboli 1 4 5 14 3 Memory Check 14 3 3 Memory check operation A Remark Password change z EN z The password cannot be changed S When input password error the cancel Internal Flush memory area rd 7 F j gt dialog is displayed write read chec
398. product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or curre
399. project data Enabled to copy only from the A drive to the A drive 13 18 ozo Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of GT Property display 13 13 Designer2 Data check Data check of the file can be executed 13 14 5 Zz Downloads the project data written in the A drive Standard CF card to C drive LOW Download ne 13 21 gt EO Built in flash memory Se TuE Setup The project data to be displayed can be selected 13 23 am Uploads the project data written in the C drive Built in flash memory to the A drive Upload 13 24 Standard CF card N Setup cancel Cancels the item which is selected for the project data to be displayed 13 25 ue a Fibs ee WEG 13 3 2 Display operation of project information 508 ses OLU Main menu Program Data control a gt gt 9 3 Utility Display Z z e i E O gt is Touch 46 Touch mnga LO I Project information Program Data control x O w I O 7 u Project Information D a Program Data control Project information p t drive C D Name oO A Built in CF card G PROJECT 1 CIRDAT z O we On On a Operate Project data file Z 4D oa z 5058KB File O Property Data check aa OO Delet C Download Upload me elete OpY lown loa ploa au GOS EZZ Zur lt SEG 13 3 Project Information 1 3 15 13 3 1 Functions of the project information 13 3 3 Display example of project information Belect drive C Flash Memory Program Data control Proje
400. ption Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Standard interface Channel no Ch No setting i Extend interface Communication parameters PEN ae tti Set communication parameters of communication devices setting 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation Main menu Communication setting 377 9 3 Utility Display Communication Setting Touch Standard I F Setting Channel Driver assign Communication CAN RSZ SUNSUBBIVE CHNo USE setting 9 9 Host PC F Setting xtend F 1 Extend F 2 ChNo GT15 75QBUSL ChNo None 1 Q BUS 0 None ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo None ChNo None 0 0 0 None None Definition of ChNo 0 None 8 de connection Other connection OK 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection 1 0 1 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 10 1 3 Communication setting contents This section describes setting items and display contents for Communication Setting an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Extend F 2 ChNo None 0 None ChNo None None 0 None Zz fe i O Zz O 8 3 LO LZ ite Wu LU Zn None ChNo None None 0 None
401. r failure occurs in the power supply and continues for E more than the permissible period the GOT will be reset we 2 e Make sure to power on the unit more than 5 seconds after power off eae 3 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply 12 Zz O z o S Specifications G A GT1575V STBA GT1575 STBA GT1575 VTBA Item GT1585V STBA GT1595 XTBA GT1575 VNBA GT1572 GT1585 STBA 9 VNBA GT1565 VTBA z Lu GT1562 VNBA Z 8 Input power supply voltage 100 to 240VAC 10 15 HE lt W Input frequency 50 60Hz 5 e Input max apparent power 110VA maximum load Power consumption 56W or less 41W or less 39W or less At backlight off 30W or less 28W or less Sim ow gt 50A or less 4ms 45A or less 4ms 40A or less 4ms 225 Inrush current i onu maximum load maximum load maximum load aoe Permissible instantaneous 20ms 100VAC or longer power failure time o 1 500Vp p noise voltage 1us noise width when measuring with a noise simulator Noise immunity under 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Z j Dielectric withstand voltage 1500VAC for 1 minute across power terminals and earth x ip 10M or more across power terminals and earth by a 500V DC insulation resistance Z Insulation resistance tester Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm7 p Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 S3 3 V2 N3A Applicable solderless terminal F
402. r installing communication driver touch i tend E the Channel Driver assign button in Communication Setting ChNo RS232 SVSuppIYT ChNo USB 1 AJ710024 9 Host PC None 2nd ChNo None 0 None 3rd ChNo None 0 None Definition of ChNo 0 None 8 Barcode connection Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection 2 Touch the Change assignment button on 1 AJ71QC24 Change assignment the dislayed screen as shown left 2 None Change assignment 3 None Change assignment 4 None Change assignment 8 Barcode 9 Host PC OK Vv Continued to next page 1 0 ae 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Communication setting display operation Change assignment Channel No 1 Please select communication driver amp AS the communication driver A QnA None i QCPU QJ71C24 installed in the GOT is A QnA OCPU QJ7 1624 displayed touch it MELSEC FX OMRON SYSMAC an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Zz fe i O Zz O 8 3 LO LZ ite Wu LU Zn Channel Dr iver amp 4 The screen returns to the Channel Driver 9 1 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 Change assignment assign screen Touch the OK button Seg 2 None Change assignment SE 3 None Cha
403. r target x Confirm the monitor target channel of the screen data 1 Confirm whether the memory card is installed 2 Confirm whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is 535 Cannot open image file x ON 3 Confirm whether any file exists in the memory card F i 1 Confirm whether the image file in the memory card is Image file error or invalid 536 normal x file format 2 Confirm whether any image file of invalid format is stored 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 20 11 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Ww 0 1 gs aja Zy RT o Xz wc a lt i lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 12 Channel Error Error message Action No code storage Error occurred while executing the auto repeat function of the touch switch object Confirm the followings 540 Auto repeat error Confirm 41 Confirm that the other system error has not occurred during system information x auto repeat 2 Confirm that any error information is not stored in the system information GS during auto repeat The key code input execution trigger was ON with the non 7 target key code set in the key code storage device eee Wield KEVESSE Confirm the key code supported by the object where error x occurs Language switch failure Switched language specifying KANJI other than Japane
404. r to the following manual for details of the ladder monitoring function GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual Select the ladder data storage C Flash Memory A Standard CF Card Not store lt Default C Flash Memory gt Data save location location of the Q QnA ladder monitor Point P 1 Ladder data to be saved a The ladder data to be saved is used by the GOT to execute ladder monitoring The ladder data can be saved in the CF card with this function however it cannot be copied in the PC to be referred edited with GX Developer etc For the name of ladder data to be saved refer to the following L gt 13 1 5 Display file b The ladder data saved in the built in flash memory and standard CF card file name CIRDAT can be deleted by selecting Project information of Program Data control 13 3 4 Operation of project information 2 For the GT1555 Q GT1550 Q This setting is not provided for these models since they do not support the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor 1 1 26 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 11 7 1 Q QnA ladder monitor setting function 11 7 2 Display operation of Q QnA ladder monitor Main menu Touch GOT setup GOT setup Touch Q QnA ladder monitor Q QnA ladder monitor GOT setup Q QnA ladder monitor Data save location C Flash Memory Select the ladder data storage location of the Q QnA ladder monitor Point f Restart after setting chang
405. rawing Check 14 4 3 Drawing check operation 14 8 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY m9 FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 DISPLAY SECTION Basic figure check Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Filled circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse ke ue EY Wi To a Pattern 1of 3 Move check among screens 1 4 9 14 4 Drawing Check 14 4 3 Drawing check operation Move check among screens 3 l fe a Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check E x Zz The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal S l To Pattern 2 Zz O a 220 Ee Szo Q Za stg e See ow OON Pattern 1 N gt Zza b Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check mer N The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals lt a aie If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal Ze A To Pattern 3 Z gt S pE D Q W Ww x O W pal O We l Ww op E ie 0 Pattern 2 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 14 4 Drawi
406. rd Registration condition 1 cannot be selected FX CPU not compatible with 2nd keyword 1 Registration condition The access restriction can be selected from Read Write Protect Write Protect and All Protect For access restriction on each setting refer to the following manual KE The User s Manual of the FX series PLC you are using 1 0 15 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Point P 1 How to select a keyword protection level _ For equipments that are allowed to operate the FX PLC on line 3 levels of protection level can be set When performing monitoring or changing settings with any on line equipment is required set password with referring to the following a When setting keyword only Select a protection level by the initial letter of keyword All operation protect Set a keyword with initial letter of A D to F or 0 to 9 Anti plagiarism Set a keyword with initial letter of B Incorrect write protect Set a keyword with initial letter of C b When setting keyword and 2nd keyword Select a protection level by Registration condition 2 Monitoring availability at each keyword protection level Device monitoring availability at each keyword protection level is shown in the following A When registering keyword and 2nd Keyword When registering keyword only keyword not registered Item All I
407. re displayed at the end 14 13 14 5 Font Check 14 5 3 Font check operation 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 6 1 Touch panel check function Touch panel check is a function which checks whether there is no dead zone area in touch key minimum unit 16 dots x 16 dots 14 6 2 Display operation of Touch panel check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check gt 9 3 Utility Display eug Touch Self check ES Touch panel check Debug amp self check Starts Touch panel check When touch Touch panel check of Display check Touch panel check starts Point P Notes on Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 14 6 Touch Panel Check 14 6 1 Touch panel check function 14 14 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY m9 FILE DISPLAY AND CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY x O W pal O We l Ww op i je 0 DISPLAY SECTION 14 6 3 Touch panel check operations If touch Touch panel check of self check a black filled screen is displayed over the entire screen area Touch a part of the screen The touc
408. rective specifications for the printer as requested by the printer manufacturer 5 3 5 Cables 1 Applicable cables Refer to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for the applicable cables for connecting a GOT and PLC 2 Adjusting a cable for the EMC Directive compliance Modify the cables including user produced cable to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive For details refer to Section 5 4 2 5 3 EMC Directive Compliant System Configuration 5 3 4 When the option unit is used 5 12 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS ol a ja z O W w w gt OF LO a ox S0 INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 4 Precautions for Wiring Connecting the EMC Directive Compliant Product Wire and connect GOT1000 series equipments as instructed below If the GOT1000 series equipments are configured in a way different from the following instructions the system may not comply with EMC directives 5 4 1 Power and ground wires wiring method 1 Power and ground wires wiring method Connect the power wire and connection cable as shown in the illustration and be sure to attach a ferrite core TDK Corporation type ZCAT3035 1330 within the range shown below Lead the power wire and ground wire as shown in Section 5 1 2 2 Always ground the LG and FG wires a 100 240VAC GOT power section GOT power supply section INPUT J 100 240VAC LN LN O p alel
409. reparatory soldering Connector pin type of the connection target For third party PLC side Number of connector pins Indicates the number of terminals for solderless or preparatory soldered terminals Cable distinction numbers for one manufacturer s products Two digit sequence number 01 02 When cable distinction is needed for one manufacture s products Example Wirings are different for each PLC type Connecting targets are different such as servo inverter temperature controller Cable classification 01 For OMRON PLC 02 For YASKAWA PLC 03 For YOKOGAWA PLC 04 For HITACHI PLC 05 For TOSHIBA PLC 06 For SHARP PLC 07 For Allen Bradley PLC 08 For SIEMENS PLC 09 For MATSUSHITA PLC 11 For KEYENCE PLC 12 JTEKT PLC Application classification R4 For RS422 communication For GOT1000 side R2 For RS232 communication Length classification Indicated in 10cm unit Example 3m 30 30m 300 Third party PLC connection cable Commonly used for GT15 and GT11 2 2 Component List 2 3 Ie OVERVIEW Zz O T a L Zz Q 1S SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 1 GOT 2 4 GOT Product name Model name GT1595 XTBA Specifications 15 1024 x 768 dots TFT color liquid crystal high intensity wide angle view 65536 colors 100 to 240VAC Memory size 9MB
410. rt of MATSUSHITA PLC Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately Product E Model name Description name GT09 C30R40201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P Cable length 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40201 9P Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40202 14P Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P Cable length 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C200R40202 14P Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P Cable length 30m GT09 C30R20201 9P Cable length 3m GT09 C30R20202 15P Cable length 3m RS 232 For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC bi GT09 C30R20203 9P Cable length 3m cable GT09 C30R20204 14P GT09 C30R20205 25P Cable length 3m Cable length 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option 2 13 OVERVIEW zZ O x a oO IL Zz Q oO SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Product md Model name Description name GT09 C30R40301 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T Cable length 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40301 6T Cable length 30m cable GT09 C30R40302 6T Cable length 3m GT09 C100R40302 6T Cable length 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T Cable length 20m GT09 C300R40302 6T Cable length 3
411. ry check function n 14 4 Memory check operation n 14 5 Memory information ccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeneees 13 81 Mounting positos aana Eia 6 2 Multi color display board cccccceeeeeees 2 13 8 8 Applicable multi color display board 8 8 Installing procedure of the multi color display board 8 8 0 Operation of system alarm cceeeeeeeeeeeee 14 21 Display operation of system alarm 05 14 20 System Alarm Display eeeeeeeeees 14 20 System alarm display function 0 ee 14 20 Operation SettingS cee eeteeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeaes 11 14 Display operation of display setting 11 15 Operation setting functions eee 11 14 Setting operation of operation 06 11 16 ODpliOn 2 c4ntaieds pointer 2 5 Option function board 0 0 0 ccccecceees eee eeeeees 2 12 8 6 Applicable option function board 68 8 6 Installing procedure of the option function board 8 6 OS Information Display operation of OS information 13 10 OS information eenaa aaia 13 10 Function of OS information cceee 13 10 Operation of OS information 0005 13 12 Overall configuration seerne 2 1 P PaK Ste i a T eee A 22 Panel cutting dimensions cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 1 Part names and settings of the GT1565 4 7 Part names and settings of the GT1575
412. s is not changed If touch button without touching button the dialog shown left is displayed and the changed contents are cancelled and the screen is closed 12 1 Time Setting and Display 1 2 4 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION we SETTINGS UTILITY FUNCTION n 0 2 Cui Wwe oz lt a So AZ Oct FILE DISPLAY AND COPY CLEANING OF TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING gt lt L a n Q n lt n GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status Display Status Normal Normal Low None Low voltage When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately Refer to the following for battery replacement procedure gt 8 9 Battery 1 2 5 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY Zz O PROGRAM DATA CONTROL ZA T Z E OS project data screen data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or memory card can be displayed and data can be transferred between GOT and memory card The format of the memory card is also possible E q Sw 13 1 Data Storage Location 529 13 1 1 Drive name allocation For the GOT built in flash memory or standard CF card the following drive names A drive and C drive are allocated oS LON gt F0 Drive name Allocat
413. s unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z Optical loop unit A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set Coaxial bus unit A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 751F900 set CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compliant GT15 75J61BT13 Z Intelligent device station unit A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900 Conversion unit for GOT A900 GOT800 series communication unit QCPU Q Mode bus connection cable Sold separately Product name Q extension cable GOT to GOT connection cable Description For connecting QCPU and GOT For connecting GOT and GOT Model name GT15 QC06B Cable length 0 6m GT15 QC12B Cable length 1 2m GT15 QC30B Cable length 3m GT15 QC50B Cable length 5m GT15 QC100B 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Cable length 10m Product name Q long distance connection cable GOT to GOT long distance connection cable Model name GT15 QC150BS Cable length 15m GT15 QC200BS Cable length 20m GT15 QC250BS Cable length 25m GT15 QC300BS Cable length 30m GT15 QC350BS Cable length 35m Description For long distance connection 13 2m or longer of QCPU and GOT A9GT QCNB is necessary For long distance connection of GOT and GOT We OVERVIEW Zz O E lt x a pe 0 m Z Q 1S SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
414. se 560 Ihstall optionaltunction without the option OS installed x P Install the option OS Language switch failure Switched language specifying a KANJI region other than Japanese without the option function board with add on 561 Load expansion memory x board memory installed Install the option function board with add on memory The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the 570 Recipe device points too specified range large Put the number of the set points of the recipe device within x the specified range 574 Capacity shortage of user There is no empty area space in D drive memory RAM Format the D drive in the memory to secure free area x Advanced Recipe cannot be executed for advanced recipe Abnormal Advanced ee see MEO 581 file with incorrect contents Delete the advanced recipe file x recipe file from the memory card Cannot generate advanced recipe file Confirm the following and execute recipe processing again 582 Cannot generate 1 Confirm whether the memory card is installed Advanced recipe file 2 Confirm whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is x ON 3 Confirm the available memory of the memory card Unable to save device value to advanced recipe file Unable to save device 1 Confirm the write protection of memory card 583 value to Advanced recipe f x file 2 Confirm whether the attribute of saving file is for reading only An error has occurred during the advanced r
415. se Return button m s o r LU When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the gt lt Close return button in the right corner 2 of screen is touched returns to the previous screen 3 If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen Zz O 3 Scroll button ae W For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll Zo button on the screen ZS U g ee a A lt gt Scroll one line column Qa 4 X 44 D gt Scroll window Z O wg ae t 250 woz Zur lt SEG 9 3 Utility Display 9 10 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Change of setting value Security sett MAg Utility call kes Key sensitivity Communi ca A QnA QCPU Key reaction speed Standard msec Setting item Select button Setting item Select button ES D Touch the select button setting point on the screen According to the setting item the button requires selecting setting value inputting value or displaying other setting screen e ON Key It is a key for selecting the setting value Repeats with each touch ON OFF Numerical Key It is a key for inputting the numerical value It displays the keyboard on the bottom of the screen when touched In the above mentioned screen example
416. se install the Standard 0S BootOS Version 02 01 00 E 18 5 CoreOS 1 8 13 18 5 1 Installing the CoreOS 18 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed When the CoreOS cannot be installed confirm the following item If the CoreOS cannot be installed even after checking the following item the error may be caused by a hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative Error The CoreOS installation is not executed even when installing the CF card in the GOT Action 1 Check whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is on If the switch is off switch it on 2 The writing from the GT Designer2 to the memory card may not have been completed normally Execute the writing from the GT Designer2 to the memory card again The message is displayed on the GOT 18 14 GOT error Contact your local sales office The GOT main unit is broken Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative CF card error Installation will be cancelled Check whether the CF card can be used The CF card is defective 1 Format the CF card and re execute 2 Replace the CF card Optional unit has been connected to extension I F slot The optional unit should be removed before starting installation Installation will be canceled Remove the extension unit installed on the GOT GOT type and OS version do not matc
417. setting device value N OS 2 FEA RWG WEG xng oe ae hd OLN iz 13 Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT PLC PLC 6O0T GOTSPLC Value a Z z Record No 1 If touch the kgad record button the dialog 5 Record Comment Process 1 setting shown left is displayed ae TS Do you want to load record E If touch the OK button starts loading record x O W x O u D 5 Presses completed When loading is completed completion dialog is displayed Z If touch the OK button closes the a5 Lu dialog oY 25 go 12 oA Z O we ae t gt 25 ioe Zur lt SEO 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 1 3 57 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Record save operation Device value of a controller is saved in the selected record 13 58 rive PROJECTI REC IPE 1 indame Size Date Time Execute File Name A AE PROECTINECIPENARPODOO GIP Setting No 1 Name Recipe No 1 Process 2 setting il Process 3 setting P Process 4 setting aa Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT PLC PLC gt G0T GOTSPLC Value Record Comment Q HERTYTTET AJSIDIFIGIK JIKIL LIXICIVIBINIM Enter Vv Continued to next page 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 4 Advanced recipe information operation Select the recipe file and touch the button
418. setting is reflected If touch gt lt button without touching OK button the dialog mentioned left is displayed 4 Touching the DX button restarts GOT After restarting GOT operates with changed value 11 8 Transparent Settings Zz Transparent Mode Setting 2 gt 11 8 1 Function of the transparent mode 5 When using the multi channel function the channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be specified K For the multi channel function refer to the following manual 2 q L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 305 Also refer to the following manual for the FA transparent function ite OZW gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 33 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION ET Function Description Setting range S When using other 1 2 3 4 y lt lt Z en The channel No of a controller to which the FA than the GT1550 lt Default 1 gt ae o 2 transparent function is executed can be set When using the 1 2 aon GT1550 lt Default 1 gt 8 2AN 11 8 2 Displaying the transparent mode Eig AA a5 oak OH Main menu GOT setup C gt 9 3 Utility Display S lt 3 pE Touch Touch BS GOT setup Transparent mode S x Transparent mode D GOT setup Transparent mode 5 z Lu N k zZ O 58 Touch the channel g9 No display area of ChNo 25 al 4D oa Zz O
419. sic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 45 l Standard monitor OS S SIF FON 500K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 45 1 tandard Gothic Font Japanese 4 3 6 FO o Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 Explanation of OS version 12dot Standard Gothic Font Japanese IG 10SMONT G1D 2K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 01 00 00A System Screen Information ap ae S10SMONT 61 637K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 L_ BootOS version System Screen Data SIF TTNMG FON 40K Basic 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 Appears only when the property True Type Numerical Font 6 CHAAR OUT mee 10 Comm 02 04 00 02 03 00 04 46 of the BootOS is displayed A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 IS 10SRECP OUT Option 02 04 00 02 02 00 19 38 Minor version Recipe Major version m F Refer to the following for details of the screen display operation lt 13 2 OS Information 1 3 4 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation Zz H Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate Point P y rating p Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating Z Ww plate of GOT rear face gt I MITSUBISHI 5 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL _GT1575 VTBA IN 100V to 240V AC 50 60 Hz POWER MAX 90VA__ SERIAL _00004701AA00001 A S B iL in BY Ow A A Zlo MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC _ MADE IN JAPAN BootOS version az BACKLIGHT GT15 70VLTT Sie OF OSO Q Zz sty e SE IeZ Oot N ately N OS 2 FEA FUD HES xiL Sok otb
420. sign RS232 5V suppl A QnA QCPU QJ 1C24 9 Host PG a Extend I F Setti 28 xten etting EO Extend F 1 nee Mow Cursor aon T L0 None _ _ 6 gt z gt FEA KWo HEA xiL oak otb Keyboard 011121314 Carell Enter ee g lt z a Input numeric with keyboard ae wo e 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric TO e Enter Key Touching the Enter key completes numeric input and closes the keyboard e Cancel Key Touching the Cancel key cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard W lt gt Key Moves the cursor to the right or left side 5 Available only if any selectable item is at the right left side of the cursor 3 N Del Key key is used when canceling the input by 1 character G gt key and the key which is not mentioned do not function 4 If Enter key is touched numeric input is completed and keyboard is closed Z LE On 2 N z 5 Sp OA Z O we SE Boe Zur SEY 9 3 Utility Display 9 12 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING In the communication setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel communication driver names display and channel numbers are set Moreover in the communication detail settings the communication interface details are set Communication parameters setting 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 1 Communication setting functions Function Descri
421. sion of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version the version information and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed When installing from the standard CF card the dialog is displayed by the main unit When installing from GT Designer2 via USB or RS 232 the dialog is displayed by the GT Designer2 2 When install standard monitor OS communication driver option OS When standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist amoung all OSs standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled 3 When download project data GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the memory card storing the project data and OS beforehand is recommended The version of each OS installed in the GOT can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen Program Data control 0S_informat ion Property lame Size Kind Version Date Time OS_Name 2 IS 10SMONT OUT 1233K Ba
422. sions of the bus connection cable connector Dimensions mm and Cable model Cable length m ft shape of the connector GOT side PLC side GT15 QCOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 10 33 Fig 3 Fig 3 GT15 QCOBS 15 49 20 66 25 82 30 98 35 120 Fig 3 Fig 3 GT15 CONB 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 1 Fig 2 GT15 ACOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 2 Fig 2 GT15 A1SCOB 0 7 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 1 Fig 1 GT15 A1SCONB 0 45 1 5 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 4 Fig 2 GT15 J2COB 1 3 Fig 1 Fig 6 GT15 370COB S1 1 2 3 9 2 5 8 2 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 COEXSS 1 10 6 34 8 20 6 67 6 30 6 100 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 COBS 10 33 20 66 30 98 Fig 4 Fig 4 GT15 EXCNB 0 5 2 Fig 5 Fig 4 1 The GT15 CLJEXSS GT15 CLBS cable has a grounding wire 1 m Be sure to connect the wire to control panels 2 The GT15 CL EXSS 1 is the set product consisting of GT15 EXCNB GT15 CLIBS Refer to Fig A a PLC side GOT side Fig A Fig 4 Fig 5 de Fig 4 Fig 4 p40 pe GT15 EXCNB GT15 COBS C buffer circuit cable extension cable 11 5 Figs ig 29 0 1 30 a Fig2 60 0 2 36 0 2 i y j I i n 35 0 1 38 33 0 1 30 _ _ 42 0 1
423. size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive Displays switch of each function executable in the Special data information download upload 8 Operation switch etc Number of folders and files Displays the total number of displayed files and folders Remark Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 13 1 5 Display file 1 3 80 13 10 Special Data Information 13 10 3 Special data information display example 13 10 4 Special data information operation Zz O O 5 Special data information display operation x 5 Program Data control Special data information If touch a drive in Select drive the special data elect drive k A Built in CF card bi poem Oor O45 Fy in the drive is displayed z Dir EIRDKT 27 04 21 09 A 2 a P q 2 Refer to the following for operation of delete So lt 0 property data check and download sre au C e Delete 020 Property esirin U e Data check F 5058KB File 2 gt Property Data check e Download a se lt LOn Delete Down load zaz m Touching the x button closes the screen Sai N N OS 2 FEA Fug HEA A a5 FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie GOT SELF CHEC
424. splay can be recorded x Occurred Message Restore Checl A 04 6 1 10 25 Temp error J z 04 6 1__ 8 05 Fuse error 11 25 10 45 Create a screen to display alarms and confirm the details of the alarms and take measures 20 1 Error Contents Display 20 1 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND STANDARD OS Zz lt W O Z lt W Z q O INSPECTION Ww 0 1 gs aja Zy TA o Xz wc a lt L a lt APPENDICES INDEX 20 2 Error code and reference manual Channel A No storage Error source Error code Description TRS Reference destination 1 0 to 99 User s manual of the ACPU Error code of CPU for ACPU Value of D9008 connected with GOT Error code of the following User s manual of the controllers FXCPU connected with Controller FXCPU 2 GS263 GOT 100 to 299 e Third party PLC When connecting a third e Temperature controller party PLC deal with the OMRON temperature error according to the error controller only message Error code of the GOT main unit 300 to 399 function Error code of the GOT 20 2 List of Error Message GOT 400 to 499 D GS262 4 communication function System Alarm Error code of the GOT main unit 500 to 699 function Reference manual of the Network 800 to 999 Error code of network GS264 network connected
425. stem Environment of the GT Designer2 lt L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function z z Si a o Tore T E If touch the setup item the setup contents me Clock setting Adjust A 30 is changed TO 07 08 2004 15 30 53 ty Adjust lt __ GOT internal battery Norma voltage status y Broadcast m O None 2 O y 0 Adjust Broadcast z K fe If touch OK button the setup contents 55 is reflected 2S 25 go amp oa z O wg Q9 TE lt SE fig Zur lt SEG 12 1 Time Setting and Display 1 2 2 12 1 3 Operating the time setting amp display 12 3 With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed amp If touch gt lt button without touching OK button the dialog mentioned left is value will be canceled displayed OK Point 1 2 3 4 4 If touch X button GOT restarts After restart GOT operates with the changed settings When connecting to an external device which does not have clock function If set to Adjust or Broadcast for clock setting while the GOT is connected to external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the clock data will not be adjusted Refer to the following for the list of PLC installed with clock function gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 3 PLC CPUs with clock function Clock setting when using the multi channel function The channe
426. sual check No foreign matter Rermovedean attachment sticking Refer to the following for the model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure lt 8 10 Protective Sheet 19 2 Periodic Inspection Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Ambient Display section 0 to 40 C t t Maks measurement i o For use in control panel l emperature with thermometer or Other portions 0 to 55 C die hea eka Surrounding temperature inside control 1 i Ambient hygrometer f environment ip F 10 to 90 RH panel is ambient humidity Measure corrosive temperature as Atmosphere a No corrosive gas GOT with A 100 to 240VAC 100 240V a A Measure voltage 85 to 242VAC Change supply power AC power 9 across terminals 2 check GOT with Input polarity 24VDC Left 24VDC of 24VDC Measure voltage Right Change wiring power power across terminals gat Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws 3 Mounting status Dirt foreign Visual check No dirt foreign matter Remove d an matter sticking Loose terminal Retighten Sere WIth Not loose Retighten terminal screws screwdriver screws 4 Connection Proximate status solderless Visual check Proper intervals Correct terminals Loose Visualicheak Not loose R
427. t _ 011121314 Cancel Enter x m Zz Tog gt E Sse Qi Ooty A00 N gt With do not push OK button If touch gt lt button without touching OK 2x4 if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is displayed HES value will be canceled ET 0K Sok oto S o a D 2 wo ZS If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with gt lt button GOT x restarts and reflects the setting contents F u m N O Oo Zz O 58 On f oa Zz O we E fos Zur Seu 11 1 Display Settings 1 1 11 11 1 3 Display setting operations 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Functions of the brightness contrast The brightness and contrast can be adjusted Function Description Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels 4 levels for the GT1575 Brightness settin g ing VN GT1572 VN or GT1562 VN The display section contrast can be adjusted by 16 levels GT1555 QSBD Contrast adjustment GT1550 QLBD 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness contrast Main menu GOT setup Display lt 37 9 3 Utility Display IED Touch Touch GOT setup Display Touch Brightness contrast SNOM Brightness contrast adjustment GOT setup Display Brightness contrast X Brightness setting Touch Elto adjust the brightness
428. t lt button after completing the setting of all items to change GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents Key sensitivity setting Zz O Ea bUT setup Uperation T Buzzer vo lune OFF If touching the setting items keyboard is displayed E Window move buzzer ON p y 5 S 5 Sair Stine Input numeric with the keyboard Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity H ax 8 10 The key response speed corresponding to Z ey reaction vii a ie di O a a e O the Key sensitivity setting is displayed E ow 220 Touching the Ox button determines the sre Sw setting lam OK a Zz Tog gt E age Qi Ooty OOV Touch panel adjustment Refer to the following for touch panel adjustment operation lt gt 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 11 3 Operation settings 1 1 17 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 1 Security level change functions Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer2 Security level setting 00 L gt G
429. t Jeni rawin Item Functions overview GT15 GOT GT11 oe 1000 G10 CSV conversion Conversion from G1L of operation log file to CSV O O x O G10 TXT conversion Conversion from G10 of logging file to TXT O O x O Deletion of a operation log file or folder O O x x Operation log information Copying of an operation log file O O X x Moving of an operation log file O O x x Changing of an operation log file name O O x x 5 2 Creating of a new operation log folder O O x x a Displaying and searching of the list of operation logs O O x x xe Deleting hard copy file O x x x 5 Hard copy information Copying hard copy file O x x x Memory card format Formatting memory card O x O x Memory information Displaying memory space of GOT O x O x Displaying file folder name data size and creation date and time O x x x Deleting file or folder of special data x x x Special data information Checking file of special data x x x Downloading special data written in the A drive Standard CF card to C drive Built in flash memory O x x x System monitor Monitoring and testing PLC devices monitoring and y changing values in the special module buffer memory O x O x Ladder monitor Displaying ladder monitor executing hard copy O x x A List editor Changing sequence programs or parameters of the ACPU x x x FX list editor Editing sequence programs of the FXCPU in a list O x x 2 r Monitoring or changing data of intelligent function module O Intel
430. t again e When the printer has been connected to a personal computer and used before it is connected to GOT power on the printer again and connect it to GOT e Any printer cannot be connected to GOT via USB hub e Do not connect any device to the printer while GOT is connected to it e Do not connect any device other than printer to the printer unit 2 Cable connection disconnection When connecting and disconnecting the dedicated printer connection cable leave an interval of at least 3 seconds 3 Printer unit removal To remove the printer unit detach it from specified direction APULL so as not to break the connector 4 Cable clamp e Pulling out the cable clamp band The cable clamp band can be pulled out after cable treatment Pull out the band with pressing the tab of the cable clamp outward using a driver etc e Removing from the printer unit The dedicated printer connection cable can be removed from the unit with the cable clamp attached Remove the cable clamp by pressing it in both directions arrow A S ee IN p f 5 Screw of the connector holder Do not remove the screw attached to the connector holder In the case the screw is removed do not use any other screw Doing so may damage the unit 8 14 8 5 Printer Unit 8 5 2 Installing procedure 8 6 Video RGB Unit The video RGB unit is used to connect a video camera personal computer or commercially available z display to a GOT
431. t cover from the right side of the GOT Remove the expansion unit e g bus connection unit if it is mounted ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION INSTALLATION OF BOOTOS AND Lo STANDARD OS MAINTENANCE AND m z 0 8 mf a 7 Z Remove the case after passing the battery holder through the mounting hole When removing take care of not cutting the cable of the battery holder Lu O Ds xn uct Q Pull up the backlight drive board and disconnect the cable connector of the backlight from the connector of the backlight drive board it T lt When replacing GT15 80SLTT remove the cable from the cable holder ra a zZ When replacing GT15 80SLTT Cable holder 19 6 Backlight Replacement 1 9 9 19 6 2 Replacement procedure of backlight Press the backlight fixing latch black with your finger and pull out the backlight to the left When pulling the backlight press the packing with your finger so that the backlight will not be hit with the packing When replacing GT15 80SLTT When replacing GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT or GT15 70VLTN Latch Mount a new backlight in the reverse procedure of removal Also assemble the case in the reverse procedure of disassembly Tighten the GOT rear fixing screws within the torque range of 0 36 to 0 48 N m When mounting the cas
432. ta is out of the input enabled range 510 aas dat input out ot In this case the input value is not accepted x 9 Confirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the build in flash memory 520 Insufficient Flash ROM 1 Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified capacity i x buffering area size 2 Install the option function board with add on memory The capacity for the buffering area is insufficient in the user memory RAM 594 Insufficient user memory 4 Confirm whether there are no mistakes in specified E RAM capacity F buffering area size 2 Install the option function board with add on memory The old file of different contents has been deleted and a new Unnecessary file deleted Mle has besn created 522 oeae ai file Note that the old file is deleted and the new file is created if x i the file of the same name with different contents exists when creating files 524 Device writing error When writing in the device error occurred Correct device Correct the device x Unable to read write Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different 525 alarm log files under project x different projects Confirm where to store the alarm log file and alarm log file The channel of the specified monitor target does not exist or Improper monitor device f 530 Cornfim monitorchannel the channel is not the monito
433. tage of the surge absorber even when it rises to the maximum 7 s3 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 2 Wiring of Connection Cables e Keep the connection cables away from the main circuit lines high voltage large current or I O signal z lines e When using GT15 C O EXSS 1 or GT15C OBS perform the grounding in the following steps u Point About GOT terminal block The terminal block layout of a GOT differs depending on the model 5 s E Before wiring confirm the terminal layout of the GOT to be used S ae BR 1 When using GT15 C O EXSS 1 Do too we Not connected PLC GOT i o 2 6 GT15 COBS moore a 1 OUT IN x cs 5 Soe f 2 EN oF L 5 2SQ cables to FG terminals 28cm or less m zZ lt W 28 Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the GOT unit power and ground them Z with a cable t i aw Use the 6T15 C BS s FG cable of 28cm or less Do not connect the GT15 EXCNB s FG ground cable 4 Connect the GT15 C BS s FG cable on the GOT side to FG of the GOT unit power s terminal Stile block 425 oan Sou Connect the GT15 C BS s FG cable on the PLC side to FG of the PLC s power supply module w gt O QO Connect the LG and FG terminals of the terminal block on the PLC and ground them with a cable Zz fe 2 When using GT15 COBS z For the both s
434. tal protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental cover is opened 8 40 8 11 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 11 2 Installing procedure 8 12 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily 8 12 1 Applicable stand The following stand is applicable for GT1500 Product name Model Description GT15 90STAND Stand for 15 GT15 80STAND Stand for 12 1 Stand GT15 70STAND Stand for 8 4 10 4 GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 8 12 2 Installing procedure 1 GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND Set the stand so that the front side of the GOT to be mounted faces the front For GT15 70STAND the surface to be used to set the GOT changes according to the GOT mounted Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting screw of the stand Put the GOT into the Stand from the front side and fix it using the fixtures For the GOT mounting method refer to the following L77 6 5 Installation Procedure For GT15 90 STAND GT15 80 STAND For GT15 70 STAND 8 12 Stand 8 12 1 Applicable stand 8 41 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION 8 42 2 GT05 50STAND Determine the angle for installing the GOT Slide the angle adjustment fitting as shown below to determine the angle The angle can be adjust
435. tallation using CF card 18 4 Boot OS and standard OS required for installation 18 2 Prior preparations for installing boot OS and Standard OS sinnir ipii 18 3 Program data control function 18 6 The 2 point presses installation function 18 5 When installing the different version of boot OS Standatd OS siii eia eine Bevis a 18 8 Installation procedure ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 6 3 Interface Converter UNit c ccecceeeeeeeeeees 2 5 8 14 L Ladder monitor cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeees 14 1 Large size CPU extension cable cere 2 6 Logging information cc ceeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeee 13 67 M Maintenance time notification setting 16 1 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting 16 3 Maintenance time notification function 16 2 Operation of maintenance time notification 16 4 MELSECNET 10 communication unit 2 5 8 14 Memory card adaptor eeeeeeeeees 2 12 8 5 Applicable memory card adaptor 05 8 5 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory Card adapto bien iein a ada rece dadedee Memory card format ccececeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeees Display operation of memory card format 13 41 Format operation of memory card 13 42 Memory card format 13 41 Memory Check 2 2 0 aa a EATE A 14 4 Display operation of memory card 00 14 4 Memo
436. tally graph 13 32 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information Main menu Program Data control 9 3 Utility Display Touch Touch Program Data control Alarm information Alarm information Program Data control Alarm information belect drive Name A i Built in CF card gt ROJECT 1 IG1SPC ICIRDAT Operate Extended alarm log file or Alarm log file b058KB bi A gt CSYBIA gt TXT Del Copy 1 3 26 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information Zz O Program Data control Alarm information Select drive K A Built in CF card prn ESI 5 IG 1SPC CIRDAT f 5 C Flash Memory Zz O 5 Su 2 3 6 Zo airs sre He 828 9 7 E Fie am 1A gt CSVB1A gt TXT ION gt FO0 Del Copy wee Day aon Number Item Description 1 Select drive The drive which displays file or folder can be selected D When CF card is not installed A Built in CF card is not displayed 25 Erm 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder DES In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR TE ode Displays the file name or folder name Doth For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 1 3 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy
437. td m Model name 17LE 23090 27 D4CK or equivalent D GT1575 VNBD A July 2005 or later product a GT1572 VNBA A September 2005 or later 4 GT1572 VNBD A September 2005 or later m Z lt x Ww n L10 ZZ bE Fam an EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 3 Part Names and Settings of the GT157 4 7 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GI1560 mnm 7 p 2 3 gt Lz L leI 1 __ E m i 4 4 B fl 2 TTA j I 5 6 GOT rear face 13 D aa coo e ML e E popeo a ee a 8 a l E 9 Wo A lI 10 ere n En haag L le Pp 11 12 4 4 Part Names and Settings of the GT156 No Name POWER LED Description Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving Blinks in orange green Blown back light bulb Not lit Power is not supplied 2 Display screen Displays the utility and the user creation screen 3
438. tend interface relay board on the Extend I F 2 side of the GOT After the installation detach the connector cover from the extend interface relay board Remove the connector cover 4 Install the video RGB unit in the expansion unit interface of the GOT rear face When the extension unit is installed in GOT remove the installed extension unit And do not touch the board in the GOT when install the video RGB unit After the installation tighten the mounting screws 4 places in the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 8 16 8 6 Video RGB Unit 8 6 2 Installing procedure O Tighten the extend interface relay board installed by the step within the specified torque range 0 36 to 0 48N m 2 places a W gt O Z O Ke 2 ai nz A Removing the video RGB unit Point emoving the video RGB uni o O Before removing the unit unscrew the extend interface relay board fixing screws E n 9 I above a rm N When installing an extension unit on the unit refer to the following L3 8 7 3 Installing multiple extension units in layers S lt When not installing an extension unit on the outer layer cover the top of mounting screws 4 T places with accessory labels in order to avoid receiving static electricity ae Keep the connector cover fixed o Keep the seal stuck as it is O sow Soz LLO Sgr w gt O Zz fe b Z z O a 8 6 Video RGB Unit 8 17 8
439. terface Connector type D sub 9 pin 7 Power terminal Power input terminal LG terminal FG terminal 8 Extension unit interface For installing an extension unit 9 CF card interface For installing a CF card Lit CF card accessed 10 CF card access LED i Not lit CF card not accessed Used for stopping the access to the CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 11 CF card access switch ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF CF card not accessed CF card removal possible Optional function board f 12 For installing the optional function board interface Multi color display board F 13 For installing the multi color display board interface Hardware reset switch 14 Reset switch nee F ios Inoperative in the bus connection or with the bus connection unit installed 15 Hole for unit installation fitting Hole for inserting the unit installation fitting 16 Battery holder Houses the battery 17 Human sensor Sensor that detects human movement 1 Itis provided for the GT1585V S only 2 For the multi color display board refer to the following lt 3 3 2 2 GT1585V S GT1585 S Remark Connector used for the RS 232 interface The specification of the connector used for the RS 232 interface of GT1585 is as follows GOT model name GT1585V STBA Hardware version Connector A March 2006 or later Manufacturer DDK Ltd
440. the date or time to be searched button displays the O Touching the Enter dialog on the left OK Touch the OK button When processing is being executed the Processing message is displayed on the screen 8 The results found are displayed and the dialog on the left is displayed To continue a search touch the OK button To stop a search touch the Cancel button File Nane A PROJECT1 OPELOG OPELOS_20060310_0002 610 9 When searching IS completed a 6 ho 206 completion message is displayed in the Date Time Screen No Operation oO 03 10 Jase Fa pato pg B 2 Touch switch Screen switching i dialog A T 03 10 12 09 04 Process completed gt 8710 12 08 09 Touching the OK button closes the 03 10 12 09 11 B 10 dial 03 10 12 09 11 loa 10 12 09 21 B 1 ialog 5 03 10 0 03 10 12 10 10 B 1 03 10 12 10 13 03 10 12 10 14 d 03 10 12 10 15 d tion Log 03 10 12 10 42 g i 03 10 12 10 43 03 10 12 10 44 6 03 10 12 10 45 Switch applications 03 10 12 10 47 Switch appl ications Utility z l ow 50 Search Ede Zz Str e OE5 u 02H Q Za SOR gt W Doty AON N 2 z ze a FEA HUN HEG xng oak Soe O lt FILE DISPLAY AND m gt oO ie GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION TIME NOTIFICATION MAINTENANCE SETTING 13 11 Operation Log Information 1
441. thest from the operating position in the system and check for the status of occurrence of the error each time the cables are disconnected until the error does not occur The module or extension cables bus connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to cause the error ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to locate error positions im tae O Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below When use the extension base unit 298 QnASCPU REg De Example 1 Example 2 226 Doh Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the GOT Zan Turn off the power of the PLC Turn off the power of the PLC A Z Disconnect the bus connection cable Disconnect the bus connection cable kag w IN side from the final stage GOT E OUT side from the GOT located one E ZZ vy stage before the final stage fo gO A A Ze W O Turn on the power of the PLC Im 4 e Eu J a me Za 4 iy Turn on the power of the PLC a g y 22 Turn on the power of the GOT ya 4 7 lt Turn on the power of the GOT A FEN EEEa aa Lr If an error does not occur the final PP alae 4 a N 7 stage GOT may be faulty 7 If an error does not occur t
442. this when making the GOT front face other than the display section white 8 10 Protective Sheet 8 37 8 10 1 Applicable protective sheet OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME AND SETTINGS EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION z O a 8 10 2 Installing procedure ED Remove the old protective sheet from the GOT and clean the GOT surface Peel the release paper from the back of the new protective sheet and attach its adhesive side to the GOT display section When attaching the protective sheet make sure to fit iton the display section closely without leaving any clearance between them 3 Peel the protective film off the protective sheet a Remark Replacement time of protective sheet a Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly 8 38 8 10 Protective Sheet 8 10 2 Installing procedure 8 11 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environment cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil The GOT is installed with the USB environment cover at factory shipment Replace when damage and deterioration are caused 8 11 1 Applicable USB environmental protecton cover The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT1500 Model Description
443. tional expression 360 Confirm operation Review the data operational expression so that the divisor x expression should not become 0 Upper and lower limit The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower 370 value error Confirm value limit x setting Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit gt Lower limit The time out error occurred during communicating 1 Confirm the cable omission the communication unit mounting status and status of the PLC Channel No is not displayed in error code or error message in the case an error occurs when using the multi channel function Communication timeout Refer to the following manual to identify the channel No in 402 Confirm communication error O pathway or modules cs GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Description of Checking for normal monitoring of each connection type 2 This error may occur when the load of PLC CPU becomes heavier while accessing other stations In such case transfer the data of the other station to the host station PLC CPU and monitor them at the host 3 Put COM instruction when the PLC scanning is long 20 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Channel Error Error message Action No code storage Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received Confirm the cable omission the communication module mounting status st
444. ttery replacement Make sure to turn on the GOT power supply once upon completion of battery replacement Failure to do so may decrease the battery life 2 When the 2 slot type extension unit is connected to GT1560_ Before installing or replacing the battery disconnect the unit When connecting or disconnecting the unit be sure to power off the GOT and PLC 8 9 4 Battery life Life span of the battery set in the GOT is shown below Battery life Operating ambient Operating ambient Data backup time after detection temperature of 0 to 45 C temperature of 45 to 55 C of battery voltage low 5 years 14 days In the following conditions the data backup time is 5 minutes after the power supply is turned off The battery connector is disconnected The battery lead is disconnected Point P Battery life and replacement time 1 Battery life reference Approx 5 years in actual use Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Battery replacement time reference 4 to 5 years Calculate the natural discharge amount of the battery as necessary 2 Check if the battery condition is normal within the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display K gt 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 8 36 8 9 Battery 8 9 4 Battery life 8 10 Protective Sheet The protection sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT d
445. tting display operation 10 2 Communication Detail Settings Zz O S Ea 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions R Z Function Description 5 Communication Set various communication parameters of communication devices 1 0 parameters setting The settable parameters differ according to the communication device 5 fe Keyword setting For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set F Ow Key word deleting For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted Zgo re Key word protection atc For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled OZN cancel For the FX series PLCs the cancelled program protection status in the PLC can be returned Keyword protection to the protection status again o ZZ lt b ag FE 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation Oey N Touch the driver display BOX of the communication parameter to be set in the communication setting 2 screen Era re GEO lt o5 OBE ogg i OL Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Channe l Dr i ver assign 2 Zz CHo R232 Tio USE gt Host PC Host PC z a Extend I F Setting mia wo Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo GT15 75QBUSL ChNo None 0 None lt T ChNo T 0 None 0 None T 3rd ChNo None ChNo None H 0 None None 5
446. uched Effective Invalid Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display OFF Briahtness contrast e 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button Human sensor Effective k Sensor detect level 0 MAX is touched Sensor detect time 0 0 Sec Sensor off delay 0 Min 10 Sec With do not push OK button If touch D lt button without touching OK if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is displayed value will be canceled OK If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with gt X button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 1 1 10 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations g Sensor detect level sensor off delay Z o 5 GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 GOT setup Di splay eC CS nee Bat If touching the setting numerical Opening s n time 6 Sec ine 0 Min CO None keyboard is displayed Input numeric with es battery are dienas the keyboard Bidmeontect ET To move the cursor touch the lt or gt oy Sensor detect level 1m MAX 10 button Ste Ser detect t 0 0 Sec Suir Sensor off del 0 Min 70 S OS y 02n B Setting contents are defined if OK button 11 is touched Je kl a g
447. uct name CF card Model name GT05 MEM 16MC Description Flash ROM 16MB GT05 MEM 32MC Flash ROM 32MB GT05 MEM 64MC Flash ROM 64MB GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB Commercially available CF card E 2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb website http Awwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html Bar code reader Sold separately Model name Product name Description fos 4 Commercially available bar code reader 3 3 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available The Technical News above is available as a reference at the information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation products MELFANSweb home page MELFANSweb website http Awwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html Bar code reader Memory card adaptor Sold separately Model name GT05 MEM ADPC Product name Description Memory card adaptor CF card to memory card Type II conversion adaptor Option function board So
448. uman Detection range None sensor Detection delay time None Continued to next page 3 6 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 3 GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN Specifications GT1575 VNBA Item GT1575 STBA GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VNBD Crib SBS GT1575 STBD GT1575 VTBD GT1572 VNBA gt GT1572 VNBD u Built in flash Q C drive Built in flash memory 9Mbytes memory 5Mbytes i x for storing project data and OS for storing project Memory ing proj ing proj A data and OS 2 Life Number of a eee 100 000 times Be write times ir Batery GT15 BAT lithium battery Option gt 6 Backup target Clock data and maintenance time notification data Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C 3 RS 232 1ch 5 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800 bps 5 RS 232 6 Connector shape D sub 9 pin Male 5 Application For communicating with a controller or connecting a personal 5 W computer Project data upload download OS installation FA transparent function 5 USB Full Speed 12 Mbps 1ch USB Connector shape Mini B Application For connecting a personal computer Project data upload download 9 Built in OS installation and FA transparent function a interface Compact flash slot 1ch g CF card Connector shape TYPE 7 E Application Data transfer data storage EE Option function board For option function
449. unction of GOT installation and Required for display and deletion of the OS file or project data touch operation of the user created key control or display function of the screen screen and utility screen and guidance Not installed in GOT at factory Standard f EA monitor System screen data shipment Built in flash memory os System screen management information file Install it from GT Designer2 or CAG1SYS 7 the memory card TrueType numerical font f p At installation select Mincho 12 dot standard font Gothic or Gothic for the 16 dot 16 dot standard font Mincho standard font 16 dot standard font Gothic 1 8 2 18 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for installation 18 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS For the installation using GOT the memory card storing BootOS or standard monitor OS is required For the method of writing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the memory card the following two methods are available 1 To Memory Card from GT Designer2 ADDITION TIMES RESET ey FOR MAINTENANCE eve TIME NOTIFICATION K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 9 Transferring Data Using a Memory Card PC gt memory card GOT cL a 4 aad am z n z 26 Z lt 9 De Og 5z of an 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed 7 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROG
450. urn ON OFF buzzer when move window can be selected ON OFF lt At factory shipment ON gt Security setting screen change Security level change screen can be displayed L3 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key screen change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed gt 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting Key sensitivity setting The touch panel sensitivity when touching the GOT screen can be set E g a setting can be changed when double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once For preventing chattering 1to8 1 Touch panel calibration Ch GT1595 Touch panel reading error can be corrected 11 6 Adjusting the Touch Panel Position Touch panel calibration Setting 1 Relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed The larger the set value in Key sensitivity is the shorter the time taken from touching the touch panel until the GOT responds becomes E g decrease the value set for Key sensitivity wnen double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once Decrease the reaction speed The relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed is as follows Quick response lt Slow response Key sensitivity setting Key reaction speed 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 20ms 10ms ERNS 30ms 60ms 120ms 240ms Standard Point P Operation settings by GT Designer2 Set buzzer volume an
451. vo amplifier System information of report function and f i 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 x x O System print are added information D drive automatic recovery status 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x x O App 25 notification signal is added Appendix 5 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Continued to next page me Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description f Version of OS i Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 oS xOO In clock management both adjust and fake 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x O n9 broadcast can be set BEE Ogo Data save device of MELSEC Q QnA Sa ladder monitor data can be set at GT 2 18U O x x ere Designer2 GOT Setup Time setting for call key ON until the start up of utility can be set for 1 point 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x a oO pressing 520 ete Alarm can be set to be displayed in J383 system language switching or battery 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Oo O O Koz drops Zan Designation of the channel No used for Clock Setting a DAt i 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O x x adjusting and broadcasting is possible a Z Function for setting any screen for the Standard monitor OS 01 02 a Startup Logo 2 09K O O O O GOT startup screen Boot OS 01 02 C 2 Handy GOT Setting of the grip switch LED of handy E o i 2 18U Sta
452. w Execute setup cancel lt gt 2 Setup cancel before downloading the project elem data 2 Project data to be stored in a CF card When storing the project data from GT Designer2 to CF card select C Built in 9 flash memory for Project Data in the Boot Drive Seg Sie uaa Communicate with Memory Card Sai Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write Ly Untitled Project GOT Tye GE i Base Screen oO Z C Common settings Boot Drive Z A C Communication Settings Project Data T E 2 ep J Stanciasd montor OS C Built in Flash Memory 652 C Communication diver AE Extended function OS eas Option OS COUN EISSN MOM r ON C Intelligent unit monitor data 3 s C A motion monitor data J 1 3 C Servo amplifier monitor data C Buitin Flash Memoy m Z z 5 Ma Ego wo s e O TE Install a CF card in the GOT A Built in CF card 4 B al Refer to the following for inserting C Flash Memory removing method of CF card 5 8 1 CF Card 5 a N Touch A Standard CF Card in Select 5 drive S hd z m S 212KB 15600KB File i 5 Property Data check ou Delete Download Z go a E Continued to next page Z O 20 mie Ze Seu 13 3 Project Information 1 3 21 13 3 4 Operation of project information 13 22 Project data download now Same named project data has already downloaded Current Target Built Version 215R 215R Built Date 06 03 01 07 28 05 Built Time
453. with the power supply wires By ie twisting with the earthing wire noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the x earthing However if a filter is installed on the power supply wires the wires and the earthing 2 wire may not need to be twisted pi Z x Zz O E 5 1 Requirements to Meet EMC Directive 5 4 5 1 2 Control panel 5 1 3 Noise filter power supply line filter The noise filter power supply line filter is a device effective to reduce conducted noise Except some models installation of a noise filter onto the power supply lines is not necessary However conducted noise can be reduced if it is installed The noise filter is generally effective for reducing conducted noise in the band of 10MHz or less Usage of the following filters is recommended Model name FN343 3 01 FN660 6 06 ZHC2203 11 Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK Rated current 3A 6A 3A Rated voltage 250V The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below 1 Do not install the input and output cables of the noise filter together to prevent the output side noise will be inducted into the input side cable where noise has been eliminated by the noise filer Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Induction a Installing the input and output cables b Separate the input cable from the output together will cause noise induction cable Output s
454. x Z i Z lt x SETTING 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 1 6 3 16 1 2 Display operation of maintenance timimg setting 16 1 3 Operating the maintenance timing setting ED Touch a select button item to be set on the screen Key If touched displays the keyboard in the bottom part of the screen For keyboard operation refer Section 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change page Si Gi 7 89 Del lt gt OLA 24 3 4 s Cancel Enter Define the numerical input by Enter Remark a If touch Enter after inputting the value out of the setting range the alarm message is displayed Example Please set a value as the range of 0 100 ox If touch OK button the settings are reflected If touch X button instead of touching button the settings are canceled after the dialog below is displayed and the screen closes With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK ED If touch gt lt button GOT restarts After restart GOT operates with the changed settings 1 6 4 16 1 Maintenance Timing Setting 16 1 3 Operating the maintenance timing setting 17 ADDITION TIMES RESET FOR MAINTENANCE TIME NOTIFICATION ADDITION TIMES RESET Displays the present value of Backlight maintenance time notification period Display section maintenance time notification period Touch key
455. xecute Number Item Description 1 Drive A Built in CF card is displayed Even if CF card is not installed this message appears 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder in In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 3 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the button etc gt 13 7 4 Ga Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 7 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 9 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders Point P About the displayed file The files other than that for advanced recipe are not displayed on the advanced recipe information screen Remark Folders and files displayed Qs For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 13 1 5 Display file 1 3 44 13 7 Advanced Recipe Information 13 7 3 Example of advanced recipe information displ
456. y Card Memory card write Boot OS write Core OS write Points of caution Install CoreOS to a Memory card lt How to Install gt 1 Tum OFF GOT and insert CoreOS installed Memory card into the GOT 2 Tum ON GOT 3 t will take a few minutes to start CoreDS installation Do not tum OFF or reset GOT during Core0S installation to avoid failing in restarti After completion of installation restart GOT after turning OFF and removing Memory card Reinstall and download the followings after GOT is restarted JBasic OS Communications driver Required other OS 2 Special data 3 Project data lt Precaution gt Remove all units connected to extension I F slot before Core0S installation BootOS will be installed together with CoreOS GOT Type GT15 V 640 480 Boot OS Version Transter size 16417 kbyte Memory card e x Empty area size 29210720 kbyte Install After confirming that the GOT is powered off install the CF card in the GOT After installing switch the CF card access switch on Powering the GOT on displays the following screen 18 12 To cancel the installation power the GOT off and remove the CF card ja instal Ver 02 01 00 E e fring Pe he Wrote RATIA ammes n L TB Re act EEE Cees Grete ees vers a RET wines FA Efir Do you execute the CorelS installation The internal memory is initialized and return to the state before factory shipment Turn off the CF card access switch bef
457. y GT1155HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT1100 GT11 Abbreviation of GT1155 Q GT1150 Q GT11 Handy GOT GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms GT15 QBUS Description GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Bus connection unit GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 3 Interface converter unit 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 AQ9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 751F900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set GT15 75IF900 E Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15 PRN Video input unit GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit GT15V 75R1 Video RGB input unit GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT15V 75ROUT E Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description Backlight GT15 90XLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 80SLTT GT15 60VLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 60VLTN GT15 70VLTT
458. y and wide angle view Screen size 8 4 Resolution 640x480dots Display size 171 6 73 W x128 5 04 H mm inch Display character 16 dot standard font 40 characters x 30 lines Display 12 dot standard font 53 characters x 40 lines section Display color 65536color 2 16color Left Right 65degrees Left Right 45degrees Display angle Top 50 degrees Top 20 degrees Bottom 60 degrees Bottom 20 degrees Intensity of LCD only _ 380 cd m 150 cd m Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment 4 level adjustment Life Approx 41 000 h Operating ambient temperature 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube replaceable backlight shutoff detection function is Backlight included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 40 000 h or longer Lifes Time when display luminance reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Numbers of touch key 1 200 objects screen Matrix structure of 30 lines x 40 columns Key size Minimum 16 x 16 dots par key Touch Number of objects that panel can be simultaneously Maximum of 2 objects touched Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max Detection length None Human Detection range None SORS Detection delay time None ane Built in flash memory 9Mbytes Built in flash memory 5Mbytes 4 for string project data and OS for string project data and OS Memory Life Number of E aA 100 000 times write times
459. y time for aT Plese aa lect keys keeping pressing the key position to switch ee to the utility DSH pressing tine MO Touch the time input area Touching the input area displays a Oo amp zA keyboard ae Input numerical value from the keyboard pRa Sok Touching OK button determines the Doth setting Q Z lt z ap wo P l 30 With do not push OK button If touch lt button without touching OK BS if you close the screen the changed button the dialog mentioned left is value will be canceled OK displayed x W x O u p zZ O E amp If close the display setting and GOT setup 5g screens with D lt button after completing Sz the setting of all items to change GOT g restarts and reflects the setting contents 2s Z O we t Zur SEY 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 1 1 21 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation Point 1 When using GT1595 X 11 22 For the key position 1 point only can be set 2 Setting another key position when two have been already set Change either key position from to before making the setting You cannot select three at the same time Example Changing the 2 points of the upper left and right corners to those of the upper left and lower left corners p Change at the upper Change at the lower right corner to left corner to
460. ystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots and flickers appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect 2 The GOT screen saving backlight off function prevents images from becoming permanently etched on the display screen and increases the backlight life 3 ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data 4 Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Compliant with IP2X at the USB interface only when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all users operation environment 5 When using multiple extension units and a bar code reader the total current of the extension units and bar code reader must not be greater than the total current that the GOT can supply For current values of extension units and bar code reader and the total current that the GOT can supply refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function 3 12 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 2 5 GT1555 Q GT1550 Q 3 3 Power Supply Specifications The following describes the power supply specifications for the GT51 L 3 3 1 For GOTs powered from the 100 to 240VAC power supply g gt 3 3 2 For GOTs powered from the 24VDC power supply 2 B B Remark Operation at momentary failure R e If an instantaneous powe

GT15 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents